ZXWM M900 V2 20 Hardware Manual 156108 PDF

ZXWM M900
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

Optical Transmission System
Hardware Manual
Version 2.20
ZTE CORPORATION
ZTE Plaza, Keji Road South,
Hi-Tech Industrial Park,
Nanshan District, Shenzhen,
P. R. China
518057
Tel: (86) 755 26771900 800-9830-9830
Fax: (86) 755 26772236
URL: http://support.zte.com.cn
E-mail: doc@zte.com.cn

LEGAL INFORMATION

Copyright 2007 ZTE CORPORATION.

The contents of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties. Any reproduction or distribution of
this document or any portion of this document, in any form by any means, without the prior written consent of ZTE
CORPORATION is prohibited. Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by contractual confidentiality
obligations.

All company, brand and product names are trade or service marks, or registered trade or service marks, of ZTE CORPORATION
or of their respective owners.

This document is provided as is, and all express, implied, or statutory warranties, representations or conditions are
disclaimed, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, title or
non-infringement. ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable for damages resulting from the use of or reliance on
the information contained herein.

ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or applications covering the subject
matter of this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license between ZTE CORPORATION and its licensee, the
user of this document shall not acquire any license to the subject matter herein.

ZTE CORPORATION reserves the right to upgrade or make technical change to this product without further notice.

Users may visit ZTE technical support website http://ensupport.zte.com.cn to inquire related information.

The ultimate right to interpret this product resides in ZTE CORPORATION.
Revision History
Date
Version
No.
Revision
No.
Serial No. Description
31/07/2005 V1.0 R1.1 sjzl20040738
The first publication for ZXWM M900
(V1.0).
24/09/2007 V2.0 R1.1 sjzl20051582
This manual is issued due to the
upgrade of ZXWM M900 from V2.0 to
V2.20. The modifications of new version
equipment include:
The installation in 600 mm cabinet is
provided.
Centralized wavelength supervision
subsystem optical power automatic
equalization, function of wavelength
tuneable, and 100M supervision system
are provided.
The technical specifications are updated,
including board consumption and the
specifications of system elements.
30/10/2007 V2.1 R1.0 sjzl20073165
This manual is issued due to the
upgrade of ZXWM M900 from V2.0 to
V2.1. The modifications of new version
equipment include:
OTUE10G, VGSC, DGE and SWE
boards are not provided any longer.
New boards EOA and DSAF are
available now.
The function of OTU10G, OTUF,
OMU, ODU, OBM, OCI, VMUX, OWM
and LAC boards are updated.
Date
Version
No.
Revision
No.
Serial No. Description
The SC/PC connector of the board is
changed into LC/PC connector.
This new version supports C-band DWDM
system over G.653 fiber. This manual is
revised according to the modifications of the
new version equipment.
05/30/2008 V2.20 R1.0 sjzl20081768
This manual is issued due to the upgrade of
ZXWM M900 from V2.1 to V2.20. The
modifications of new version equipment
include:
OA, HOBA and OTUP boards are not
provided any longer.
New boards MCPD and EOTU10G
are available now.
48/96-wavelength system in C band
is available now, and the functions
of Mux/DeMux board are updated,
including OMU, ODU, OCI, VMUX
and OBM.
ROADM function is available now,
the boards include WBU, WSU and
WBM.
TMUX subrack with the functions of
electric cross and electric layer
protection are provided. The boards
include DSAE, SMU and CSU.
Convergence boards are provided,
including GEM2, GEM8, DSA and
DSAF.
Protection boards are provided,
including OPCS and OPMS.
The function of EOA, OWM and OPM
boards are updated.
The technical specifications are
updated, including board
consumption and the specifications
of system elements.

ZTE CORPORATION
Values Your Comments & Suggestions!
Your opinion is of great value and will help us improve the quality of our product
documentation and offer better services to our customers.
Please fax to: (86) 755-26772236; or mail to Publications R&D Department, ZTE
CORPORATION, ZTE Plaza, A Wing, Keji Road South, Hi-Tech Industrial Park,
Shenzhen, P. R. China 518057.
Thank you for your cooperation!
Document
Name
ZXWM M900 (V2.20) Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing Optical
Transmission System Hardware Manual
Product
Version
V2.20
Document
Revision Number
R1.0
Equipment Installation Date
Presentation:
(Introductions, Procedures, Illustrations, Completeness, Level of Detail, Organization,
Appearance)
Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A
Accessibility:
(Contents, Index, Headings, Numbering, Glossary)
Your
evaluation of
this
documentation
I ntelligibility:
(Language, Vocabulary, Readability & Clarity, Technical Accuracy, Content)
Your
suggestions for
improvement
of this
documentation
Please check the suggestions which you feel can improve this documentation:
Improve the overview/introduction Make it more concise/brief
Improve the Contents Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials
Improve the organization Add more troubleshooting information
Include more figures Make it less technical
Add more examples Add more/better quick reference aids
Add more detail Improve the index
Other suggestions
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
# Please feel free to write any comments on an attached sheet.
If you wish to be contacted regarding your comments, please complete the following:
Name Company
Postcode Address
Telephone E-mail

Contents

About this Hardware Manual .......................................................... i
Purpose............................................................................................i
Whats in This Manual ....................................................................... ii
Related Documentation.................................................................... iii
Conventions.................................................................................... iv
Typographical Conventions..................................................................................iv
Mouse Operation Conventions.............................................................................iv
Safety Signs.....................................................................................v
How to Get in Touch ........................................................................ vi
Customer Support ................................................................................................vi
Documentation Support.......................................................................................vi
Chapter 1........................................................................................ 1
Cabinet ........................................................................................... 1
ZTE Cabinet .....................................................................................1
Structure............................................................................................................... 1
Basic Fittings in Cabinet....................................................................................... 3
Cabinet Configurations for ZXWM M900..............................................6
Chapter 2........................................................................................ 9
Components ................................................................................... 9
OA Subrack......................................................................................9
Board Slots.......................................................................................................... 12
Common Interface Area..................................................................................... 15
OTU Subrack..................................................................................21
Board Slots.......................................................................................................... 23
TMUX Subrack................................................................................25
Board Slots.......................................................................................................... 25

Orderwire Phone Bracket.................................................................29
Independent Fan Unit .....................................................................29
Power Alarm Subrack......................................................................31
Power Distribution Subrack............................................................................... 32
Monitoring Plug-in Box....................................................................................... 33
ODF Plug-in Box.............................................................................34
DCM Plug-in Box.............................................................................36
Chapter 3...................................................................................... 39
Boards .......................................................................................... 39
Overview.......................................................................................39
Structure of Boards.........................................................................41
Structure of Boards in OA/OTU/TMUX Subrack............................................... 41
Structure of PBX Board...................................................................................... 42
Structure of PWSB Board................................................................................... 43
Structure of FCB Board....................................................................................... 43
OTU Board.....................................................................................44
Functions ............................................................................................................ 44
Operating Principle............................................................................................. 45
Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators............................................................. 47
Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................... 50
OTUF Board ...................................................................................51
Functions ............................................................................................................ 51
OTU10G Board...............................................................................59
Functions ............................................................................................................ 59
EOTU10G Board.............................................................................65
Functions ............................................................................................................ 65
SRM41/SRM42 Board......................................................................75

GEM2 Board...................................................................................86
Functions ............................................................................................................ 86
GEMF Board...................................................................................94
Functions ............................................................................................................ 94
GEM8 Board................................................................................. 102
Functions .......................................................................................................... 102
Operating Principle........................................................................................... 102
Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators........................................................... 104
Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 106
DSA Board................................................................................... 111
Functions .......................................................................................................... 111
Configuration of DSA Board............................................................................. 116
DSAF Board .................................................................................123
Functions .......................................................................................................... 123
Configuration of DSAF Board........................................................................... 135
DSAE Board................................................................................. 136
Functions .......................................................................................................... 136
Configuration of DSAE Board........................................................................... 141
SMU Board................................................................................... 145
Functions .......................................................................................................... 145

OCI Board.................................................................................... 154
Functions .......................................................................................................... 154
Optical Connections of OCI Board ................................................................... 158
OBM Board .................................................................................. 160
Functions .......................................................................................................... 160
Optical Connections of OBM Board.................................................................. 164
OMU Board ..................................................................................166
Functions .......................................................................................................... 166
Optical Connections of OMU Board.................................................................. 169
VMUX Board................................................................................. 171
Functions .......................................................................................................... 171
Optical Connections of VMUX Board................................................................ 174
ODU Board ..................................................................................176
Functions .......................................................................................................... 176
Optical Connections of ODU Board.................................................................. 179
OAD Board...................................................................................181
Functions .......................................................................................................... 181
Optical Connections of OAD Board.................................................................. 184

WBU Board.................................................................................. 185
Functions .......................................................................................................... 185
Optical Connections of WBU Board.................................................................. 189
WSU Board..................................................................................191
Functions .......................................................................................................... 191
Optical Connections of WSU Board.................................................................. 198
WBM Board.................................................................................. 200
Functions .......................................................................................................... 200
Optical Connections of WBM Board................................................................. 203
SDM Board .................................................................................. 205
Functions .......................................................................................................... 205
Optical Connections of SDM Board.................................................................. 208
EOA Board................................................................................... 209
Function and Operating Principle.................................................................... 209
Optical Connections of EOA Board................................................................... 223
DRA Board................................................................................... 226
Functions .......................................................................................................... 226
Optical Connections of DRA Board................................................................... 231
LAC Board.................................................................................... 232

Functions .......................................................................................................... 232
Optical Connections of LAC Board ................................................................... 235
OWM Board ................................................................................. 236
Functions..................................................................................... 236
Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicator............................................................. 238
Optical Connections of OWM Board................................................................. 239
OPM Board................................................................................... 240
Functions .......................................................................................................... 240
MCPD Board.................................................................................244
Board Function ................................................................................................. 244
Performance and Alarm................................................................................... 245
OP Board..................................................................................... 247
Functions .......................................................................................................... 247
Optical Connections of OP Board..................................................................... 251
OPMS Board................................................................................. 255
Functions .......................................................................................................... 255
Configuration of OPMS Board.......................................................................... 259
OPCS Board.................................................................................260
Functions .......................................................................................................... 260

Configuration of OPCS Board........................................................................... 264
OMCP Board.................................................................................265
Functions .......................................................................................................... 265
Optical Connections of OMCP Board................................................................ 269
NCP Board................................................................................... 271
Functions and Operating Principle .................................................................. 271
Front Panel: Interface and Indicators............................................................. 272
OSC Board................................................................................... 275
Optical Connections of OSC Board................................................................... 278
OHP Board................................................................................... 280
Functions and Operating Principle .................................................................. 280
NCPF Board.................................................................................. 283
OSCF Board................................................................................. 286
Configuration of OSCF Board........................................................................... 291
OHPF Board ................................................................................. 293
Front Panel: Interface and Indicators............................................................. 294
APSF Board.................................................................................. 296
PBX Board ................................................................................... 300

Front Panel and Rear Panel ............................................................................. 301
PWSB Board ................................................................................ 302
FCB Board ................................................................................... 310
Front Panel........................................................................................................ 310
CA Board..................................................................................... 311
CSU Board................................................................................... 316
Functions .......................................................................................................... 316
Front Panel........................................................................................................ 319
Appendix A................................................................................. 323
Optical Connections of ZXWM M900.......................................... 323
8/16/32/40/48-Channel System.................................................... 323
80/96-Channel System................................................................. 324
160/176-Channel System.............................................................. 324
Requirements on Operating Wavelength......................................... 325
Wavelength Allocation in 8/32/40-Channel Systems.................................... 325
Appendix B................................................................................. 331
Configuration of Optical Supervision System............................ 331
2 M Supervision System................................................................ 331
Definition .......................................................................................................... 331
System Composition......................................................................................... 331
Hardware Configurations................................................................................. 332
Optional Hardware Configurations.................................................................. 333
EMS Software Configurations .......................................................................... 334
100 M Supervision System............................................................335
Definition and Features.................................................................................... 335

System Composition......................................................................................... 336
Hardware Configurations................................................................................. 337
EMS Software Configurations .......................................................................... 338
Appendix C ................................................................................. 341
Configuration of Integrated Wavelength Supervision Subsystem
.................................................................................................... 341
Overview..................................................................................... 341
Subsystem Composition................................................................ 342
Hardware Configurations............................................................... 343
Configurations of OTM...................................................................................... 343
Configurations of OADM................................................................................... 344
EMS Software Configurations......................................................... 345
Appendix D................................................................................. 347
Configuration of OMS Layer Power Management Subsystem.. 347
Introduction to Automatic Power Management ................................ 347
Power Management of OMS Layer.................................................. 348
EMS Configurations....................................................................... 352
Creating an OMS Power Management Subsystem......................................... 352
Configuring the OMS Power Management Subsystem................................... 354
Abbreviations............................................................................. 357
Figures........................................................................................ 361
Tables ......................................................................................... 365
Index.......................................................................................... 371

This page is intentionally blank.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION i

About this Hardware Manual
Purpose
The Unitrans ZXWM M900 Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing Optical
Transmission System (ZXWM M900 for short) is a kind of DWDM equipment
developed by ZTE CORPORATION. Its operating wavelength is located at the
C and L bands near the 1550 nm window, with the maximum transmission
capacity of 1760 Gbit/s. The ZXWM M900 supports access of multiple
services, featuring powerful protection and network management function.
Applicable to backbone networks, local switching networks and various
private networks, it can meet networking requirements and network
management requirements at different levels.
This manual describes the cabinet, components, and available boards of the
ZXWM M900 equipment.
ZXMP M900 (V2.20) Hardware Manual

ii Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Whats in This Manual
This manual contains the following chapters and appendixes:
TABLE 1 CHAPTER SUMMARY
Chapter/Appendix Summary
Chapter 1 Cabinet
Describes the appearance, dimensions and structure
of ZTE unified cabinet for transmission equipment
used by ZXWM M900.
Chapter 2 Components
Describes the outline, structure, dimensions and
functions of ZXWM M900s components.
Chapter 3 Boards
Provides detailed information about the function,
operating principle, panels, interfaces, indicators and
performance and alarm messages of all boards in the
ZXWM M900.
Appendix A Optical
Connections of ZXMP
M900
Introduces optical connections of ZXWM M900
equipment in 40/80/160 channel DWDM systems and
corresponding wavelength requirements.
Appendix B
Configuration of Optical
Supervision System
Presents the concepts of 2 M supervision system and
100 M supervision systems, and introduced the
software and hardware configurations of a 100 M
supervision system.
Appendix C
Configuration of
Centralized Wavelength
Supervision Subsystem
Describes the concept of centralized wavelength
supervision subsystem and its software/hardware
configurations.
Appendix D
Configuration of OMS
Layer Power
Management Subsystem
Describes the concept of optical multiplex section
(OMS) layer power management subsystem and its
software/hardware configurations.
Abbreviation
Lists the abbreviations of technical terms you
may encounter while reading this manual

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION iii

Related Documentation
There are four manuals associated with the ZXWM M900 equipment:
Unitrans ZXWM M900 (V2.20) Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
Optical Transmission System Technical Manual
Optical Transmission System Installation Manual
Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual
Optical Transmission System RPOA Subsystem Users Manual

iv Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Conventions
Typographical Conventions
ZTE documents employ with the following typographical conventions.
TABLE 2 TYPOGRAPHI CAL CONVENTI ONS
Typeface Meaning
Italics References to other guides and documents.
Quotes Links on screens.
Bold Menus, menu options, function names, input fields, radio
button names, check boxes, drop-down lists, dialog box
names, window names.
CAPS Keys on the keyboard and buttons on screens and
company name.
Constant wi dth Text that you type, program code, files and directory
names, and function names.
[ ] Optional parameters
{ } Mandatory parameters
| Select one of the parameters that are delimited by it

Note: Provides additional information about a certain
topic.

Checkpoint: Indicates that a particular step needs to be
checked before proceeding further.

Tip: Indicates a suggestion or hint to make things easier
or more productive for the reader.

Mouse Operation Conventions
TABLE 3 MOUSE OPERATI ON CONVENTI ONS
Typeface Meaning
Click Refers to clicking the primary mouse button (usually the
left mouse button) once.
Double-click Refers to quickly clicking the primary mouse button
(usually the left mouse button) twice.
Right-click Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button (usually
the right mouse button) once.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION v

Typeface Meaning
Drag Refers to pressing and holding a mouse button and
moving the mouse.
Safety Signs
TABLE 4 SAFETY SI GNS
Safety Signs Meaning

Danger: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation,
which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
This signal word should be limited to only extreme
situations.

Warning: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,
which if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.

Caution: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It
may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.

Erosion: Beware of erosion.

Electric shock: There is a risk of electric shock.

Electrostatic: The device may be sensitive to static
electricity.

Microwave: Beware of strong electromagnetic field.

Laser: Beware of strong laser beam.

No flammables: No flammables can be stored.

No touching: Do not touch.

No smoking: Smoking is forbidden.


vi Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

How to Get in Touch
The following sections provide information on how to obtain support for the
documentation and the software.
Customer Support
If you have problems, questions, comments, or suggestions regarding your
product, contact us by e-mail at support@zte.com.cn. You can also call our
customer support center at (86) 755 26771900 and (86) 800-9830-9830.
Documentation Support
ZTE welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and
usefulness of this document. For further questions, comments, or
suggestions on the documentation, you can contact us by e-mail at
doc@zte.com.cn; or you can fax your comments and suggestions to (86)
755 26772236. You can also explore our website at
http://support.zte.com.cn, which contains various interesting subjects like
documentation, knowledge base, forums and service request.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 1

Ch a p t e r 1
Cabinet

This chapter introduces the size, weight, outline and basic fittings of the
unified cabinet for ZTE transmission equipment (ZTE cabinet for short). In
addition, the cabinet configurations for the ZXWM M900 are described.
ZTE Cabinet
This section covers the structure of ZTE cabinet and basic fittings in it.
Structure
The ZTE cabinet is designed following unified industrial processes. It is a kind
of 19-inch cabinet complying with IEC standards. And it features excellent
performances of electromagnetic shield and heat dissipation.
Table 5 lists the structural parameters of ZTE cabinet.
TABLE 5 STRUCTURAL PARAMETERS OF ZTE CABI NET
Dimensions (Height Width Depth)
(mm)
Weight
(kg)
2000 600 300 59
2200 600 300 65
2600 600 300 77
2000 600 600 102
2200 600 600 114
2600 600 600 128
Note: The weight listed in the table is that of the cabinet without fittings in.


2 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

For example, the outline and dimensions of the ZTE cabinet with the depth of
300 mm are illustrated in Figure 1 as follows.
FI GURE 1 OUTLI NE AND DI MENSI ONS OF ZTE CABI NET ( WI TH DEPTH 300 MM)

Unit: mm

Chapter 1 Cabinet

Basic Fittings in Cabinet
Take the ZTE cabinet with the dimensions of 2200 mm (height) 600 mm
(width) 300 mm (depth) as example. Figure 2 illustrates the basic fittings
in the cabinet.
FI GURE 2 BASI C FI TTI NGS I N ZTE CABI NET

1. Outlet for Power Cables 2. Top Outlet 3. Alarm Panel
4. Door Lock 5. Front Door 6. Bottom Outlet
7. Small Door of Cable Area 8. Mounting Bracket
9. Grounding Copper Busbar 10. Cable Area 11. Fiber Cable Reel-in Box
12. Cable Arranging Clip 13. Cable Fixing Clip


Alarm Panel
It is located at the upside of the front door. The running indicator on it
indicates the working status of the equipment in the cabinet.
Front Door
The front door of the cabinet has a lock. And on the top right corner of it,
there is the equipment nameplate with blue ground and white characters
to indicate the type of the equipment.
Outlet
Outlets are located at both the top and bottom of the cabinet. Users can
lay cables with either the upper cabling mode or lower cabling mode
according to actual situation.
Each outlet has a small active door on it to seal the cabinet after laying
cables.
Cable Area
The cable area is located close to the side door of the cabinet. There is a
small detachable door which can be opened and closed in the cable area.
The ring trip switch, ring trip reset button and the jack for antistatic wrist
strap are located at the middle of the inner frame in the cable area.
Generally, the mounting bracket, cable fixing plate, cable arranging clip
and fiber cable reel-in box are mounted in the cable area.
Mounting bracket: used to support components such as subrack of
the equipment and power alarm subrack. It can be fixed at any
position on the framework of the cabinet.
Cable fixing plate: the cable arranging clip and fiber cable reel-in box
are mounted on it.
Cable arranging clip, fiber cable reel-in box: used to fix the internal
cables and external optical cables. They are optional fittings for the
ZXWM M900.
Mounting Hole
Mounting holes are located at both the top and bottom of the cabinet.
Users can use either top mounting holes or bottom mounting holes
according to the actual fixing mode of the cabinet: top fixing, combined
cabinet fixing, back-to-back fixing or bottom fixing.
Grounding Copper Busbar
It is located at the back in the cabinet. The grounding terminals on the
side door, front door, subrack, power alarm subrack and other
components are connected to the grounding copper busbar with
grounding wires to achieve good electrical connection of the equipment
in the cabinet.
Take the ZTE cabinet with the dimensions of 2200 mm (height) 600
mm (width) 300 mm (depth) as example. The grounding copper
busbar in the cabinet and the grounding terminals on the cabinets side
door and front door are illustrated in Figure 3.
Chapter 1 Cabinet

FI GURE 3 GROUNDI NG TERMI NALS I N CABI NET

1. Grounding Copper Busbar in Cabinet
2. Grounding Terminals on Side Door
3. Grounding Terminal on Front Door

Heat Dissipation Aperture
Heat dissipation apertures are distributed at the font door, rear door, top
and bottom of the cabinet to guarantee good heat dissipation of the
equipment.


Cabinet Configurations for ZXWM
M900
Corresponding components should be mounted in the ZTE cabinet for ZXWM
M900 equipment to perform different system functions. This section
introduces the configurations based on the cabinet dimension and
equipment type.
For detailed information about components of ZXWM M900, please refer to
Chapter 2 Components.
Configurations based on the dimension of ZTE cabinet
Table 6 lists the components which can be mounted in corresponding ZTE
cabinets and their quantity.
TABLE 6 CABI NET CONFI GURATI ONS OF ZXWM M900
Component/ Quantity
Cabinet (mm)
Power
Alarm
Subrack
Subrack
ODF
Plug-in Box
DCM
Plug-in Box
2000 (H) 600 (W) 300 (D) 1 2 1 1
2200 (H) 600 (W) 300 (D) 1 3 1 1
2600 (H) 600 (W) 300 (D) 1 3 1 2
2000 (H) 600 (W) 600 (D) 1 4 2 2
2200 (H) 600 (W) 600 (D) 1 6 2 2
2600 (H) 600 (W) 600 (D) 1 6 2 4

Note: Additional information about cabinet configurations:
For ZTE cabinets with the depth of 600 mm, the doors should be mounted in both the
front and the rear of the cabinets if the subracks are required to be mounted
back-to-back. If the doors are only mounted in the front of the cabinets, the
configurations for ZTE cabinets with the depth of 600 mm are the same as those with
the depth of 300mm.
The optical distribution frame (ODF) plug-in box and dispersion compensation
module (DCM) plug-in box are optional components. Table 6 recommends the
maximum configuration quantity of them. Equipment of other manufacturers can
also be mounted in the cabinet according to user's requirements, such as routers.
However, the outline and dimension of the equipment should meet the mounting
requirements of ZTE cabinet.
Three kinds of subracks are provided for the ZXWM M900. They are optical
transponder unit (OTU) subrack, optical amplifier (OA) subrack, and transparent
multiplexer (TMUX) subrack. For the main rack, which is configured with NCP or NCPF
board, at least one OA subrack should be mounted.

Chapter 1 Cabinet

Configurations based on the type of ZXWM M900 equipment
The ZXWM M900 can be configured as optical terminal (OTM), optical
add/drop multiplexer (OADM) or optical line amplifier (OLA) through
plugging various functional boards and service boards in the subracks.
OTM
Generally, multiple racks are configured in an OTM. The one
configured with the NCP or NCPF board is the main rack. The others
are extended racks. Multiple subracks are mounted in each cabinet.
The main rack consists of a power alarm subrack, multiple OTU/TMUX
subracks and an OA subrack (with NCP or NCPF board in).
The extended rack consists of a power alarm subrack and multiple
OTU/TMUX subracks.
OLA
Generally, only one rack is configured in an OLA. It consists of a
power alarm subrack and an OA subrack.
OADM
Generally, only one rack is configured in an OADM. It consists of a
power alarm subrack, one or two OTU/TMUX subracks and an OA
subrack.
Take a cabinet with the height of 2200 mm for example. Figure 4 illustrates
the position of components in the cabinet as typical OTM equipment.


FI GURE 4 COMPONENTS POSI TI ON I N CABI NET

User equipment can be mounted at the position where the ODF/DCM plug-in
box is located. However, the prerequisite is that the outline and dimension of
user equipment should meet the mounting requirements of ZTE cabinet.
It is recommended to reserve the distance of 2U between OA subrack and
OTU subrack 2 for the mounting of an ODF plug-in box or two DCM/SWE
plug-in boxes as needed.
At least 1U space at the bottom of the cabinet should be reserved, so as to
ensure enough space for the installation of cabinet on ground. Otherwise the
rear door can not be mounted and the connection of grounding wires would
be affected.
No Components
DCM
Dustproof Net
Optical Cable Area
Boards
Fan Fan Fan
Common Interface Area
ODF
Dustproof Net
Optical Cable Area
Boards
Fan Fan Fan
Dustproof Net
Optical Cable Area
Boards
Fan Fan Fan
Power Alarm Subrack
OTU Subrack 1
OA Subrack
OTU Subrack 2
or DCM/SWE
or SWE


Ch a p t e r 2
Components

This chapter describes the structure and functions of the OA/OTU/TMUX
subrack, power alarm subrack, and ODF/DCM plug-in box of the ZXWM
M900.
OA Subrack
The frame of OA subrack is simple with aluminium front/rear beams,
left/right side panels and guide rails. The dimensions are 577 mm (height)
482.6 mm (width) 269.5 mm (depth). Figure 5 illustrates the structure of
OA subrack.
FI GURE 5 STRUCTURE OF OA SUBRACK

1. Backplane 2. Lug 3. Fiber Cable Reel-in Box
4. Dustproof Net 5. Chute 6. Board Area
7. Fan Area 8. Orderwire Phone Bracket


Backplane
The backplane supports connections between boards in the subrack. It
also provides interfaces through which external signals can be input to
the ZXWM M900 equipment.
The backplane can be divided into three area, common interface area,
fan interface area and board interface area.
Common interface area: it is located at the upside of the backplane,
providing the subrack power socket, and signal interfaces such as
network interface, transparent user channel interface, and alarm
input/output interface. For the detailed information of the common
interface area, please refer to the section Common Interface Area
in this chapter.
Fan interface area: it is located at the middle of the backplane,
providing power socket and signal sockets for three independent fan
units.
Board interface area: it is located at the lower side of the backplane,
providing power sockets and signal sockets for boards. The
transceiving data bus for signal sockets is differential data bus.
Signals are transferred to the backplane at the same time through
parallel operation, where the signals are input or output.
Board area
14 board slots with guide rails are provided in this area. The space
between board slots is 30 mm. For the detailed information of the board
slots, please refer to the section Board Slots in this chapter.
Fan area
Located above the board area, the fan area provides space for three
independent fan units. The fan units are connected to the backplane
through connectors. For the detailed information, please refer to the
section Independent Fan Unit in this chapter.
Orderwire phone bracket
Located at the front of the common interface area, the bracket is used to
support the orderwire phone. For the detailed information, please refer
to the section Orderwire Phone Bracket in this chapter.
Note: Only the OA subrack is configured with the orderwire phone bracket.
Chute
Located at the lower part of the subrack, it is used for the layout of optical
cables connected to boards.
Lug
The left and right lugs are provided. The subrack is fixed in the cabinet
through captive fasteners across the lugs.
Dustproof net
Located at the underside of the subrack, it is combined with the fan units
to form an air circulation system in the subrack. Figure 6 illustrates the
outline of the dustproof net.


An additional plaque is installed to shield the dustproof net after
mounting it, as shown in Figure 5
FI GURE 6 OUTLI NE OF DUSTPROOF NET

Fiber cable reel-in box
Located on the left and right side panels in the subrack, they are used to
reel in overlong pigtails. The reel-in box can be pulled out along the guide
rail on the top and bottom of it.
Generally, overlong pigtails between subracks are reeled in the left box,
while pigtails for internal connections of the subrack are reeled in the
right box.
For example, the structure and pulling-out direction of the left fiber cable
reel-in box are illustrated in Figure 7.
FI GURE 7 LEFT FI BER CABLE REEL- I N BOX

1. Fixing Plate for Reel-in Box 2. Wheel 3. Guide Rail
4. Left Panel of Subrack



Board Slots
The boards in OA subrack can be arranged in three modes depending on the
rate of supervisory system and functions to be performed.
For the introduction of supervisory system, please refer to Appendix B
Configurations of Optical Supervisory System.
Boards arrangement for 2 M supervisory system (without APSF)
The arrangement of boards in the OA subrack is illustrated in Figure 8,
where the numerals indicate the serial number of slots.
FI GURE 8 BOARDS ARRANGEMENT I N OA SUBRACK ( FOR 2 M SUPERVI SORY SYSTEM
WI THOUT APSF)
5
O
H
P
6
O
S
C
7
N
C
P
8 9 10
FanArea FanArea FanArea
CommonInterfaceArea
1 4 11 14 2 3 12 13
OpticalCableArea

Table 7 shows the relationship between the slots and corresponding
pluggable boards in the OA subrack.
TABLE 7 RELATI ONS BETWEEN BOARDS AND SLOTS ( FOR 2 M SUPERVI SORY SYSTEM
WI THOUT APSF)
Slot Pluggable Board Remark
6 OHP Each OHP board occupies one slot.
5, 7 OSC
Each OSC board occupies one slot.
If two OSC boards are required, they should
be plugged in the slot 5 and 7 respectively.
If only one OSC board is required, it should be
plugged in the slot 7.
8 NCP Each NCP board occupies one slot. The NCPF board
can also be plugged in instead of NCP board here.
1-4
9-14
Optical transponder
boards
Convergence boards
Mux/DeMux boards
Optical amplifier
boards
Power management
boards
No restriction for slots.

Protection boards

Boards arrangement for 2 M supervisory system (with APSF)
In the 2 M supervisory system, the APSF board must be configured in the
subrack when the interworking function of automatic protection
switching (APS) bus is required in the ZXWM M900 equipment. The
interworking of APS bus is mainly used in the following two situations:
The ZXWM M900 would manage APS buses of multiple racks through
the APSF board, for example, to perform the automatic power
reduction (APR) function in multiple directions. The APSF board is
used to transfer APS bus information between the main rack and
extended racks in this case.
The ZXWM M900 would implement the access of external clock and
perform the function of unified clock distribute through the CA board
configured in the TMUX subrack. In this case, the APSF board is used
to transfer clock information.
FI GURE 9 BOARDS ARRANGEMENT I N OA SUBRACK ( FOR 2 M SUPERVI SORY SYSTEM
WI TH APSF)
5
O
H
P
6
O
S
C
7
N
C
P
8
A
P
S
F
9 10
CommonInterfaceArea
1 4 11 14 2 3 12 13
OpticalCableArea

TABLE 8 RELATI ONS BETWEEN BOARDS AND SLOTS ( FOR 2 M SUPERVI SORY SYSTEM WI TH
APSF)
6 OHP Each OHP board occupies one slot.
5, 7 OSC
Each OSC board occupies one slot.
If two OSC boards are required, they should be
plugged in the slot 5 and 7 respectively.
If only one OSC board is required, it should be
plugged in the slot 7.
8 NCP Each NCP board occupies one slot. The NCPF board
can also be plugged in instead of NCP board here.


9 APSF Each APSF board occupies one slot.
1-4, 10-14
Optical
transponder boards
Convergence
boards
Mux/DeMux boards
Optical amplifier
boards
Power
management
boards
Protection boards

Boards arrangement for 100 M supervisory system
FI GURE 10 BOARDS ARRANGEMENT I N OA SUBRACK ( FOR 100 M SUPERVI SORY
SYSTEM)
5
O
H
P
F
6
O
S
C
F
7
N
C
P
F
8
A
P
S
F
9 10
CommonInterfaceArea
1 4 11 14 2 3 12 13
OpticalCableArea

TABLE 9 RELATI ONSHI P BETWEEN BOARDS AND SLOTS ( FOR 100 M SUPERVI SORY SYSTEM)
Slot
Pluggable
Board
Remark
6 OHPF
Each OHPF board occupies one slot. Only the main rack is
configured with it.
7 OSCF
Each OSCF board occupies one slot. Only the main rack is
configured with it.
For one or two optical directions, one OSCF should
be plugged in slot 7.
For three optical directions or above, multiple OSCF
boards can be plugged in, and each board can only
provide two optical directions at most. One of OSCF

Slot
Pluggable
Board
Remark
boards should be plugged in the slot 7. The others
can be plugged in any spare slots.
8 NCPF
Each NCPF board occupies one slot. Only the main rack is
configured with it.
9 APSF
Each APSF board occupies one slot. Only the main rack is
configured with it.
1-5
10-14
Optical
transponder
boards
Convergence
boards
Mux/DeMux
boards
Optical amplifier
boards
Power
management
boards
Protection boards

16 interfaces, one DIP switch and two slots are provided in the common
interface area of the OA subrack, as illustrated in Figure 11. The silkscreen
(Jx, x=1-9, 11-17) on the panel indicates the corresponding interface. The
J10 is the DIP switch.
FI GURE 11 COMMON I NTERFACE AREA ON BACKPLANE OF OA SUBRACK

1. Slots for Subrack PBX (Power Box Board)

Note: This manaul only describes the basic definition of interfaces. For further
information about the optical connection of interfaces, refer to Unitrans ZXWM M900
(V2.20) Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing Optical Transmission System
Installation Manual.



DIP Switch and Serial Number of Rack/Subrack
An 8-pin DIP switch (J10) is used to set the serial number of racks and
subracks when multiple racks/subracks are configured in a NE.
Figure 12 illustrates the pins order of the DIP switch. It indicates 0 when
the pin is toggled up to the position ON. On the contrary, it indicates 1.
The serial number is calculated from the position of pins with the binary
system.
FI GURE 12 PI NS ORDER OF DI P SWI TCH ( J10)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DIP

Note: The pin 5 of the DIP switch is reserved.

Serial number of cabinet
Pin 1-4 of the DIP switch are used to set the serial number of racks.
At present, one NCP or NCPF board can manage four racks. The serial
number of rack is from 0 to 3. The rack 0 is the main rack, while the
others are extended racks.
Table 10 lists the position of pin 1-4 and corresponding serial number of
rack.
TABLE 10 SERI AL NUMBER OF RACKS
1 2 3 4
DI P Pin
Cabinet
Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0
Cabinet 0 0 0 0 0
Cabinet 1 0 0 0 1
Cabinet 2 0 0 1 0
Cabinet 3 0 0 1 1
Note: Cabinet 0 means the main cabinet; Cabinet 1 means extended cabinet 1, and
so on.
Serial number of subrack
Pin 6-8 of the DIP switch are used to set the serial number of subracks.
At present, four subracks can be mounted in a rack at most. The serial
number of subrack is from 1 to 4.
Table 11 lists the position of pin 6-8 and corresponding serial number of
subrack.

TABLE 11 SERI AL NUMBER OF SUBRACKS
6 7 8
DI P Pin
Subrack
Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0
Subrack 1 0 0 1
Subrack 2 0 1 0
Subrack 3 0 1 1
Subrack 4 1 0 0

Note: The serial number of subrack is arranged based on the position of subrack from
the top down. For example, the uppermost subrack mounted in the rack is defined as
subrack 1.

Slots for PBX Boards
Two slots for PBX boards are located in the middle of the common interface
area. Insert two PBX boards to provide power supply to each board in the OA
subrack.
By default, the PBX board of master power supply is plugged in the lower slot
with the identifier -48V_In1, while the PBX board of slave power supply is
plugged in the upper slot with identifier -48V_In2.

Interfaces on Backplane
The types and functions of these interfaces are listed in Table 12.
TABLE 12 TYPE AND FUNCTI ON OF I NTERFACES ON OA BACKPLANE
Silkscreen Name Type Function
J 1/ J 17 -48 V power interface
3-pin power
socket
The master and slave
power supply for the OA
subrack is input through
the interface.
J 2 RS232 interface
DB9 socket
(male)
It is used to connect with
client equipments.
J 3 Alarm output interface
DB9 socket
(female)
The equipment alarms
from NCP boards are
output to the Warn
interface on the power
supervision board (PWSB)
through the interface. The
PWSB board locates in the
DCM plug-in box of power
alarm subrack.
J 4/ J 5 Orderwire interface RJ11 socket
The orderwire phone of the
ZXWM M900 is connected
to any of these two



interfaces.
J 6/ J 7 External clock interface
CC4 coaxial
socket
The external clock 2 Mbit/s
and 2 MHz is input through
any of two interfaces.
J 8 RS422 interface
DB9 socket
(male)
It is used to connect with
the client equipments.
J 9
Electrical Ethernet
interface
RJ45 socket
The network management
system is accessed through
the interface when the
supervision rate is 2 Mbit/s
and the NCP board is the
main control board.
J 11 System test interface
DB9 socket
(male)
It is reserved for testing.
J 12 Power alarm interface
DB9 socket
(female)
The
over-voltage/under-voltage
alarms of subrack
master/slave power supply
and in-position signal of
PBX are output to the
PWSB board through the
interface.
J 13/ J 14/ J 15
Extended data
interface
PCB solder
36-pin D-type
straight socket
(female blade)
When multiple racks are
configured in the NE, the
subrack can be connected
to subracks in other racks
with data cables through
the interface.
The data cable of
extended rack 1 is
connected to the J14
interface on the OA
subrack of cabinet.
The data cable of
extended rack 2 is
interface on the OA
subrack of cabinet.
The data cable of
extended rack 3 is
interface on the OA
subrack of cabinet.
J 16 Local data interface
PCB solder
36-pin D-type
straight socket
(female blade)
When multiple subracks
are configured in the
ZXWM M900 equipment,
the subrack can be
connected to another
subrack in the rack with
data cable.


The signal definitions of pins in some sockets are described as follows.
3-pin power socket (J1/J17)

Figure 13 illustrates the pins of the socket.
FI GURE 13 PI NS OF J1/ J17 POWER SOCKET
A2 A3 A1

The signal definitions of pins in J1/J17 socket are listed in Table 13.
TABLE 13 SI GNAL DEFI NI TI ON OF PI NS I N J1/ J17 SOCKET
Pin Signal Definition
A1 -48 V ground
A2 Protection ground
A3 -48 V

DB9 socket (male) (J2/J8/J11)
Figure 14 illustrates the pins in the DB9 socket (male).
FI GURE 14 DB9 SOCKET ( MALE)
5 4 3 2 1
6 7 8 9

The signal definitions of J2 socket are listed in Table 14.
TABLE 14 SI GNAL DEFI NI TI ONS OF PI NS I N J2 SOCKET
Pin Signal Definition Description
2 USER_232_RXD Input, RS232 data signals received
3 USER_232_TXD Output, RS232 data signals transmitted
5 GND Ground



TABLE 15 SI GNAL DEFI NI TI ON OF PI NS I N J8 SOCKET
1 USER_422_TXD+ Output, RS422 transmitting (positive)
6 USER_422_TXD- Output, RS422 transmitting (negative)
2 USER_422_RXD+ Output, RS422 receiving (positive)
7 USER_422_RXD- Output, RS422 receiving (negative)

1 TEST_TX+ Output, data transmitted (positive)
6 TEST_TX- Output, data transmitted (negative)
2 TEST_RX+ Input, data received (positive)
7 TEST_RX- Input, data received (negative)

DB9 socket (female) (J3/J12)
Figure 15 illustrates the pins in the DB9 socket (female).
FI GURE 15 DB9 SOCKET ( FEMALE)
1 2 3 4 5
9 8 7 6

1 RING_C1

Output, alarm bell signal (positive)
6 RING_C0 Output, alarm bell signal (negative)
2 YELLOW_C1

Output, yellow alarm indicator signal (positive)
7 YELLOW_C0 Output, yellow alarm indicator signal (negative)
3 RED_C1 Output, red alarm indicator signal (positive)
8 RED_C0 Output, red alarm indicator signal (negative)

4 ALM_PWR_1+ Input, PWSB alarm signal (positive)
9 ALM_PWR_1- Input, PWSB alarm signal (negative)
5 GND Ground
Note: The above table lists four pairs of on-off signal isolated by optical coupler or
relay.

TABLE 18 SI GNAL DEFI NI TI ONS OF PI NS I N J12 SOCKET
1 Vinu1
Under-voltage alarm signal of subrack input power
supply 1
6 Vino1
Over-voltage alarm signal of subrack input power
supply 1
2 ONLINE1 In-position signal of PBX1 board in subrack
7 Voutu
Under-voltage alarm signal of subrack output
power supply
3 ALMCOM Common end of alarm
8 Vouto
Over-voltage alarm signal of subrack output power
supply
4 ONLINE2 In-position signal of PBX2 board in subrack
9 Vino2
Over-voltage alarm signal of subrack input power
supply 2
5 Vinu2
Under-voltage alarm signal of subrack input power
supply 2

OTU Subrack
The frame of OTU subrack is similar as that of OA subrack with aluminium
front/rear beams, left/right side panels and guide rails. The dimensions are
577 mm (height) 482.6 mm (width) 269.5 mm (depth).
Figure 16 illustrates the structure of OTU subrack.


FI GURE 16 STRUCTURE OF OTU SUBRACK

1. Backplane 2. Lug 3. Fiber Cable Reel-in Box
4. Dustproof Net 5. Chute 6. Board Area
7. Fan Area 8. Plaque

The components and their functions are described in Table 19.
TABLE 19 FUNCTI ONS OF COMPONENTS I N OTU SUBRACK
Component Function
Backplane
At the upside of the backplane, the common interface area
provides the subrack power socket and signal interfaces
such as network interface, transparent user channel
interface, and alarm input/output interface. For detailed
information of the common interface area, please refer to the
section common interface area in this chapter.
At the middle of the backplane, the fan interface area
provides power socket and signal sockets for three
independent fan units.
At the lower side of the backplane, the board interface
area provides power sockets and signal sockets for
boards.
Board Area
14 board slots with guide rails are provided in this area. The space
between board slots is 30 mm. For the detailed information of
the board slots, please refer to the section Board Slots in
this chapter.
Fan Area
Located above the board area, the fan area provides space for three
independent fan units. For the detailed information of
independent fan unit, please refer to the section
Independent Fan unit in this chapter.
Dustproof Net
Located at the underside of the subrack, the dustproof net is
combined with the fan units to form an air circulation system in the

Component Function
subrack.
Fiber Cable Reel-in
Box
Located on the left and right side panels in the subrack, they are used
to reel in overlong pigtails. The reel-in box can be pulled out along
the guide rail on the top and bottom of it.
Chute
Located at the lower part of the subrack, the chute is used for the
layout of optical cables connected to boards.
Plaque
Located at the front of dustproof net, the plaque is used to shield the
interface area and dustproof net.
Lug
The left and right lugs are provided. The subrack is fixed in the
cabinet through captive fasteners across the lugs.
Captive Fastener
Captive fasteners are used to fix the plaque on the OTU subrack.
They are also used to mount the subrack in the cabinet.

Note: The structure and componets of OTU subrack are similar to that of the OA
subrack. Refer to OA Subrack for detailed introduction to the components.

Board Slots
The board slots in OTU subrack are illustrated in Figure 17, where the
numeral indicates the serial number of slots.
FI GURE 17 BOARD SLOTS I N OTU SUBRACK
5 6 7 8 9 10
CommonInterfaceArea
1 4 11 14 2 3 12 13
OpticalCableArea

Service boards can be plugged in any slots of the OTU subrack, such as main
optical channel board, service convergence boards and optical transponder
boards.



interface area of the OTU subrack, as illustrated in Figure 18.
FI GURE 18 COMMON I NTERFACE AREA ON BACKPLANE OF OTU SUBRACK



Type and Functions of Interfaces
Table 20 lists the types and functions of interfaces in the common
interface area.
TABLE 20 TYPE AND FUNCTI ON OF I NTERFACES ON OTU BACKPLANE
J 1/ J 7 -48 V power interface 3-pin power socket
The master and slave power
supply for the OTU subrack is
input through the interface.
J 2 System test interface DB9 socket (male) It is reserved for testing.
J 4 Power alarm interface DB9 socket (female)
The
over-voltage/under-voltage
alarms of subrack
master/slave power supply
and in-position signal of PBX
are output to the DCMU
plug-in box on the power
alarm subrack through any
interface from SP_ALM to
SP_ALM4.
J 5/ J 6 Local data interface
PCB solder 36-pin
D-type straight
When multiple subracks are
configured in the ZXWM


socket (female
blade)
M900 equipment, the
subrack can be connected to
another subrack in the rack
with data cable.
Note: The signal definitions of pins in the J1/J7, J2 and J4 sockets are the same as
that of corresponding sockets in the common interface area of OA subrack. Please
refer to corresponding contents in the section OA Subrack for signal definitions of
J1/J7, J2 and J4 sockets.
J1/J7 (OTU subrack) -> J1/J17 (OA subrack, Table 13)
J2 (OTU subrack) -> J11 (OA subrack, Table 16)
J4 (OTU subrack) -> J12 (OA subrack, Table 18)

DIP Switch (J3)
The 8-pin DIP switch (J3) is used to set the serial number of racks and
The definitions of pins order of the DIP switch and corresponding
rack/subrack number are same as those of the DIP switch (J10) in the
common interface area of OA subrack.

Two slots for PBX boards are located in the middle of the common
interface area. Two PBX boards can be plugged in to provide power
supply to each board in the OTU subrack. By default, the PBX board of
master power supply is plugged in the lower slot with the identifier
-48V_In1, while the PBX board of slave power supply is plugged in the
upper slot with identifier -48V_In2.

TMUX Subrack
The structure, dimensions and components of TMUX subrack is same as
those of the OTU subrack.
Board Slots
The board slots in TMUX subrack are illustrated in Figure 19, where the
numeral indicates the slot No.



FI GURE 19 BOARD SLOTS I N TMUX SUBRACK
5 6
C
A
7
C
A
8 9 10
CommonInterfaceArea
1 4 11 14 2 3 12 13
OpticalCableArea

pluggable boards in the TMUX subrack.
TABLE 21 RELATI ONSHI P BETWEEN BOARDS AND SLOTS I N TMUX SUBRACK
7, 8 CA
By default, the slot 7 is for the master CA board,
while the slot 8 is for the standby CA board.
DSAE,
SMU
Cooperate with CSU
board.
1-6, 9-14
Boards of
convergence
type are
recommended.
SRM41,
SRM42
Cooperate with CSU
board.
Other boards can also
be plugged in. The
board can be plugged
in any one of these
slots.


interface area of the TMUX subrack, as illustrated in Figure 20. The
silkscreen (Jx, x=1-10, 12-14) on the panel indicates the corresponding
interface. The J11 is the DIP switch.
FI GURE 20 COMMON I NTERFACE AREA ON TMUX BACKPLANE



Type and Functions of Interfaces
Table 22 lists the types and functions of interfaces in the common
interface area.
TABLE 22 TYPES AND FUNCTI ONS OF I NTERFACE ON TMUX BACKPLANE
J 1/ J 15
-48 V power
interface
3-pin power
socket
The master and slave power supply for the
TMUX subrack is input through the interface.
J 2
System test
interface
DB9 socket
(male)
It is reserved for testing.
J 3/ J 4
2 MHz clock
input
interface
CC4 coaxial
socket
The external clock 2 MHz is input through the
interface.
J 5/ J 6
2 Mbit/s
clock input
interface
CC4 coaxial
socket
The external clock 2 Mbit/s is input through
the interface.
J 7/ J 8
2 MHz clock
output
interface
CC4 coaxial
socket
The clock 2 MHz is output through this
interface



J 9/ J 10
2 Mbit/s
clock output
interface
CC4 coaxial
socket
The clock 2 Mbit/s is output through this
interface.
J 12
Power alarm
interface
DB9 socket
(female)
The over-voltage/under-voltage alarms of
subrack master/slave power supply and
in-position signal of PBX board are output to
the DCM plug-in box on the power alarm
subrack through any interface from SP_ALM1
to SP_ALM4.
J 13/ J 14
Local data
interface
PCB solder
36-pin
D-type
straight
socket
(female
blade)
When multiple subracks are configured in the
ZXWM M900 equipment, the subrack can be
connected to another subrack in the rack
with data cable.
Note: The signal definitions of pins in the J1/J15, J2 and J12 sockets are the same as
that of corresponding sockets in the common interface area of OA subrack. Please
refer to corresponding contents in the section OA Subrack for signal definitions of
J1/J15, J2 and J12 sockets.
J1/J15 (TMUX subrack) -> J1/J17 (OA subrack, Table 13)
J2 (TMUX subrack) -> J11 (OA subrack, Table 16)
J12 (TMUX subrack) -> J12 (OA subrack, Table 18)

DIP Switch (J11)
The 8-pin DIP switch (J11) is used to set the serial number of racks and
The definitions of pins order of the DIP switch and corresponding
rack/subrack number are same as those of the DIP switch (J10) in the
common interface area of OA subrack.
Two slots for PBX boards are located in the middle of the common
interface area. Two PBX boards can be plugged in to provide power
supply to each board in the TMUX subrack.
By default, the PBX board of master power supply is plugged in the lower
slot with the identifier -48V_In1, while the PBX board of slave power
supply is plugged in the upper slot with identifier -48V_In2.


Orderwire Phone Bracket
The orderwire phone bracket is used to support the orderwire phone set. It
dimensions are 132.5 mm (height) 482.6 mm (width) 269.5 mm
(depth).
Figure 21 illustrates the structure of the bracket.
FI GURE 21 STRUCTURE OF ORDERWI RE PHONE BRACKET

1. Captive Fastener 2. Line Hole 3. Bracket

The function of the orderwire phone brackets components are described in
Table 23.
TABLE 23 COMPONENTS FUNCTI ONS OF ORDERWI RE PHONE BRACKET
Component Function
Captive Fastener Fixes the bracket on the subrack.
Line Hole Lays the line of orderwire phone through it.
Bracket Supports the orderwire phone set.
Independent Fan Unit
Three independent fan units are provided to the OA/OTU/TMUX subrack in
the ZXWM M900. They are plugged in the fan area of the subrack.
The dimensions of each fan unit are 43.6 mm (height) 145 mm (width)
247.5 mm (depth).
Figure 22 illustrates the structure of the independent fan unit.


FI GURE 22 STRUCTURE OF I NDEPENDENT FAN UNI T

1. Fan Control Board (FCB) 2. Fan
3. Locking Switch 4. Indicator 5. Handle
The functions of the fan units components are described in Table 24.
TABLE 24 FUNCTI ONS OF COMPONENTS I N I NDEPENDENT FAN UNI T
Component Function
FCB
Provides power interface and signal interface for the connection to
the backplane.
Indicator Indicates the working status of FCB.
Fan
One independent fan is configured in each fan unit. Exhaust mode is
adopted.
Handle
Helps to pull in or out the fan unit, and thus facilitate the mounting
and maintenance of the fan unit.
Locking Switch
Used to lock the fan unit after pulling it in, or unlock the fan
unit before pulling it out.

These three independent fan unit are controlled respectively. Thus when one
of them is in fault, the other two can still work normally. In this case, the
faulty fan unit can be pulled out along the direction illustrated in Figure 23 for
maintenance after being unlocked.

FI GURE 23 MAI NTENANCE OF I NDEPENDENT FAN UNI T

1. Subrack 2. Independent Fan Unit

Power Alarm Subrack
The power alarm subrack consists of the power distribution subrack and the
monitoring plug-in box. It is mounted at the uppermost shelf of the cabinet,
as illustrated in Figure 4. The structure of the power alarm subrack is as
shown in Figure 24.
FI GURE 24 STRUCTURE OF POWER ALARM SUBRACK

1. Power Distribution Subrack 2. Monitoring Plug-in Box



Power Distribution Subrack
The power distribution subrack is used to distribute power supply to other
subracks in the cabinet.
The external master/slave power supply is input to the power distribution
subrack. After the processes of wave filtering and lightning protection, the
subrack distributes the master/slave power supply to the other subracks in
the ZXWM M900 equipment.
The dimensions of the power distribution subrack are 177 mm (height)
482.6 (width) 269.5 mm (depth).
Figure 25 illustrates the structure of the power distribution subrack.
FI GURE 25 STRUCTURE OF POWER DI STRI BUTI ON SUBRACK

1. Lug 2. Grounding Terminal
3. Grounding Sign 4. Master Power Supply Area
5. Connection Terminal for External Power Supply Input
6. Slave Power Supply Area 7. Alarm Indicator Board (LED)
8. Front Panel 9. Captive Fastener
10. Cable Hole

The functions of components in the power distribution subrack are described
in Table 25


TABLE 25 FUNCTI ONS OF COMPONENTS I N POWER DI STRI BUTI ON SUBRACK
Component Function
Connection Terminal for
External Power Supply
Input
Providing two group of connection terminals for the input of
external -48 V power supply. Each group includes three terminals,
-48 V, -48 V GND and PGND.
By default, the left group is for the input of master power supply,
while the right one is for the slave power supply.
Master Power Supply
Area
Slave Power Supply Area
For standard configuration, four pairs of master/slave power
supply are provided. For full configuration, six pairs of
master/slave power supply are provided.
Each group includes three terminals, -48 V, -48 V GND and PGND,
which is controlled through the air switch. It provides power
supply 1+1 protection for the subrack.
Grounding Terminal
Grounding Sign
Located at both the left and right panel of the power distribution
subrack. The power distribution subrack would be grounded
through connecting the grounding terminals to the grounding
copper busbar of the cabinet.
Alarm Indicator Board
(LED)
Indicators on this board indicate the status of the cabinet
simultaneously with indicators of the alarm board on the front
door of the cabinet.
The green, yellow, and red indicator indicates the status of
normal, warning, and critical alarm respectively.
Front Panel
The front panel is a plaque with identifiers for air switches and
warning signs.
Positions on both the left and right of the front panel are reserved
for air switches of master/slave power supply. The silkscreen
identifiers of power supply, serial number and on/off status are
printed at corresponding position. With standard configuration,
the air switches with the identifier -48V_I n1 1~4 is for master
power supply, while those with -48V_I n2 1~4 is for slave power
supply.
The position reserved for indicators on the alarm indicator board is
in the middle of the front panel.
The warning sign on the left bottom corner of the front panel to
alert that it can only be operated by professional persons.
The electric shock sign on the right bottom corner warns there is a
risk of electric shock.
Lug
Fasten the screws on the left and right lugs to fix the power
distribution plug-in subrack in the cabinet.
Captive Fastener
Used to fix the front panel of power distribution subrack and the
subrack itself.
Cable Hole
Located at the left and right panel of the power distribution
subrack. Power cables connected to the subrack are laid through
them.

Monitoring Plug-in Box
The monitoring plug-in box is used to support and shield the power
supervision board (PWSB), which monitors the power supply. The PWSB
board also provides interfaces such as subrack power alarm interface, alarm


output interface, ring strip interface, external alarm input interface, 36-pin
data bus socket.
The dimensions of the monitoring plug-in box are 43.6 mm (height) 482.6
mm (width) 257 mm (depth). Figure 26 illustrates the structure of the
monitoring plug-in box.
FI GURE 26 STRUCTURE OF MONI TORI NG PLUG- I N BOX

1. Captive Fastener 2. Lug 3.PWSB
4. Cabling Beam 5. Plaque
The functions of components in the monitoring plug-in box are described in
Table 26.
TABLE 26 FUNCTI ONS OF COMPONENTS I N MONI TORI NG PLUG- I N BOX
Component Function
PWSB
As the core of the monitoring plug-in box, it monitors the power
supply and provides various interfaces for external signals.
Cabling Beam
Cables connected to the monitoring plug-in box can be tied on the
beams at both sides of the plug-in box.
Plaque
Turn the plaque horizontal before laying and tying cables. And after
that close the plaque to shield the interfaces in the plug-in box.
Lug
Captive Fastener
Fix the captive fasteners on the lugs to secure the monitoring
plug-in box in the cabinet.

ODF Plug-in Box
The ODF plug-in box is optional for reserved optical fiber cables and their
connections and assignments. 52 fiber cables can be reeled in it at most.
Generally, the ODF plug-in box is placed on the under layer of the subrack,
as shown in Figure 4.
Dimensions: 88 mm (height) 482.6 mm (width) 269.5 mm (depth)
Figure 27 and Figure 28 illustrates the outline and inner structure of the ODF
plug-in box respectively.

FI GURE 27 OUTLI NE OF ODF PLUG- I N BOX

1. Captive Fastener 2. Lug 3. Cable Outlet 4. Front Panel
FI GURE 28 I NNER STRUCTURE OF ODF PLUG- I N BOX

1. Cable Outlet 2. Guide Rail 3. Front Panel
4. Adapter Board 5. ODF Board
FI GURE 29 POSI TI ON AND NUMBER OF OPTI CAL CONNECTORS ON ODF BOARD

The functions of components in ODF plug-in box are described in Table 27.


TABLE 27 STRUCTURES OF COMPONENTS I N ODF PLUG- I N BOX
Component Function
Cable outlet Entrance or outlet of the optical fiber cables.
Front panel
Loose the captive fastener on the front panel and open it to
facilitate the layout of cables. After that, close the front panel and
screw the captive fastener to seal the ODF plug-in box, as
illustrated in Figure 27.
Lug
The left lug and right lug at the rear of plug-in box, combining with
captive fasteners on them, are used to fix the box in cabinet.
Captive fastener
Used to fix the front panel of the ODF plug-in box;
Used to fix the ODF plug-in box in the cabinet.
Guide rail
The ODF board can be pulled out along the guide rail before laying
optical fiber cables.
Adapter board The ODF board is fixed on it.
ODF board
52 optical connectors can be installed on each ODF board at most
for 52 optical fiber cables. The positions and numbers of optical
connectors are as illustrated in Figure 29.
DCM Plug-in Box
The dispersion compensation should be considered for the line when the
signal rate is above 10 Gbit/s. The dispersion compensation module (DCM)
with four input/output interfaces can be installed in the DCM plug-in box. The
DCM plug-in box is optional, and users can use it according to actual
requirements. It is generally placed at the under layer of the subrack, and
the location is as shown in Figure 4.
Dimensions: 43.6 mm (height) 482.6 mm (width) 269.5 mm (depth)
Figure 30 illustrates the structure of the DCM plug-in box.
FI GURE 30 STRUCTURE OF DCM PLUG- I N BOX

1. Dispersion Compensation Module 2. Lug 3. Captive Fastener
Components

4. Cable Outlet 5. Optical Connector 6. Front Panel

The functions of components in DCM plug-in box are described in Table 28.
TABLE 28 FUNCTI ONS OF COMPONENTS OF DCM PLUG- I N BOX
Component Function
Dispersion compensation
module (DCM)
It is the core of DCM plug-in box. The compensation value of the
module should be configured according to actual case.
Optical connector
Optical fiber cables are connected to the module with optical
connectors in the plug-in box.
Cable outlet
Located at the side panel of the plug-in box, it is a passage for
optical cables in or out of the box.
Front panel
It is detachable, and should be detached before connecting
optical cables.
Lug
The left lug and right lug, combining with captive fasteners on
them, are used to fix the plug-in box in the cabinet.
Captive fastener
Used to fix the front panel of the DCM plug-in box;
Used to fix the DCM plug-in box in the cabinet.



This page is intentionally blank


Ch a p t e r 3
Boards

This chapter describes the functions, principles, structures and basic
operations of all available boards provided for the ZXWM M900 equipment.
Overview
Table 29 lists all available boards provided for the ZXWM M900 equipment in
terms of type and corresponding components or positions they can be
plugged in.
TABLE 29 AVAI LABLE BOARDS FOR ZXWM M900
Board ID Full Name Applicable Position
Control and supervision boards
NCP NE Control Processor
OSC Optical Supervision Channel
OHP Overhead Processing Board
NCPF NE Control Processor for Fast Ethernet
OSCF Optical Supervision Channel for Fast Ethernet
OHPF Overhead Processing Board for Fast Ethernet
APSF Automatic Protection Switching for Fast Ethernet
OA subrack
PBX Power Box Board Interface area of subrack
PWSB Power Supervision Board Monitoring plug-in box
FCB Fan-Control Board Independent fan unit
Optical transponder boards
OTU Optical Transponder Unit
OTUF Optical Transponder Unit with FEC
OTU10G Optical Transponder Unit for 10 Gb/s
OA/OTU subrack
EOTU10G Enhanced Optical Transponder Unit for 10 Gb/s
Convergence boards


SRM42 Four 622 M/155 M SubRate Mux Board
SRM41 Four 2.5 G SubRate Mux Board
GEM2 Two Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board
GEMF Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board with FEC
GEM8 Eight Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board
DSA Data Service Aggregation Board
DSAE Data Service Aggregation Electrical Interface Board
DSAF Data Service Aggregation with FEC
SMU SDH Multiplex Unit
OA/OTU/TMUX subrack
Multiplex/ demultiplex boards
OCI Optical Channel Interleaver
OBM Optical Broadband Multiplexer
OMU Optical Multiplexing Unit
VMUX Variable insertion loss Multiplexer
ODU Optical De-Multiplexing Unit
OAD Optical Add/Drop Board
WBU Wavelength Blocking Unit
WSU Wavelength Selective Unit
WBM Wavelength Blocking Multiplexing
SDM Supervisory Division Multiplexing Board
OA/OTU subrack
Optical amplification boards
DRA Distributed Raman Amplifier
EOA Enhanced Optical Amplifier
OA/OTU subrack
Power management boards
LAC Line Attenuation Compensator
OWM Optical Wavelength Monitor
OPM Optical Performance Monitor
MCPD Multi Channel Power Detector
OA/OTU subrack
Protection boards
OP Optical Protect Board
OMCP Optical Multi-Channel Protection
OPMS Optical Protect for Mux Section
OPCS Optical Protect for Channel Section
OA/OTU subrack
Clock board
CA Clock Assignment
CSU Cross_switch and Synchronous_clock Unit
TMUX subrack

Chapter 3 Boards

Structure of Boards
The structure of boards for ZXWM M900 can be divided into four types
according to the positions they can be placed in.
Structure of Boards in OA/OTU/TMUX
Subrack
Figure 31 illustrates the structure of an OTU board.
FI GURE 31 STRUCTURE OF OTU BOARD

1. Front Panel 2. Spanner 3. PCB

Boards with this type of structure consist of front panel, spanners and PCB.
Front panel: The front panel is made up of aluminium alloy. Indicators
and necessary interfaces are located on it with corresponding silkscreen
identifiers. The board name is also printed on the front panel.
Spanner: The spanner is made of zinc alloy. The spanner can be
self-locked with the spring plate on it. The main functions of the spanner
are as follows.
Facilitate pulling in/out the board due to the leverage of spanners;
Lock the board in the subrack, and guarantee the reliability of
connection between the board and backplane, and the
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of the equipment.
Contributing to the contact between the spanner and the subrack,
electrostatic can be discharged while pulling out the board.


PCB
The PCB is the principle part of board with the dimensions of 320 mm
210 mm. Its front is connected to the front panel. Connectors on its rear
correspond to sockets on the backplane, through which the connection
between the board and backplane is achieved.
The metal shielding plate on the solder side of PCB guarantees the good
EMC performance of the equipment. On the components side of the PCB,
there is the version silkscreen with the format of the letter B followed
by six Arabic numerals. The first two numerals indicate the release year,
the second two indicate the release month, and the last two indicate the
modification flag.
Board label
Board label includes board indication label and board bar code label,
which is not shown in Figure 31.
Board indication label: It is pasted 2 mm below the silkscreen of
board name on the board panel. Board indication label content
includes line side (aggregate side) working frequencies for OTU
boards/convergence boards.
Board bar code label: Each board needs a board bar code label to
indicate its bar code and type. Board bar code label is pasted close to
the lower lever on the board panel. Board bar code label content
includes the bar, bar code and GBOM material list number.

Structure of PBX Board
The PBX board is plugged in the slot in the common interface area of
OA/OTU/TMUX subrack. It consists of the front panel, enclosure and PCB.
Figure 32 illustrates the structure of the PBX board.
FI GURE 32 STRUCTURE OF PBX BOARD

Front Rear
1. Front Panel 2. Enclosure 3. PCB 4. Installation Hole

Front panel: On the front panel, the indicators with silkscreen identifiers
indicate the running status of the board. The board name is also printed
on the front panel.
Chapter 3 Boards

Enclosure: It is used to enclose the PCB of the board. The PBX board can
be fixed in the slot with the installation holes at both sides of the
enclosure
PCB: The PCB is the principle part of the PBX board with the dimensions
of 90 mm 69 mm. Its front is connected to the front panel, while the
rear is installed with the power interface and signal interface.

Structure of PWSB Board
The PWSB board is installed in the monitoring plug-in box. Figure 33
illustrates the structure of it.
FI GURE 33 STRUCTURE OF PWSB BOARD

1. Monitoring Plug-in Box (without top cover) 2. PCB 3. Front Panel
Monitoring plug-in box
It is used to enclose the PCB of PWSB board. Refer to the section
Monitoring Plug-in Box for detailed description.
PCB
The PCB is the principle part of PWSB board with the dimensions of 134
mm 160 mm. It connected to the front panel.
Front panel
Various interfaces and indicators are located on the front panel of PWSB
board with corresponding silkscreen identifiers.

Structure of FCB Board
The FCB board is installed in the independent fan unit as shown in Figure 22.
It is a PCB with the dimensions of 115 mm 45 mm.
Figure 34 illustrates the structure of the FCB board.


FI GURE 34 STRUCTURE OF FCB BOARD

Optical Transponder Boards
OTU Optical Transponder Unit
OTUF Optical Transponder Unit with FEC
OTU10G Optical Transponder Unit for 10 Gb/s
ENOTU10G Enhanced Optical Transponder Unit for 10 Gb/s
OA/OTU subrack

OTU Board
Functions
The optical/electrical/optical conversion mode is adopted to implement the
wavelength conversion and data regeneration in the optical transponder unit
(OTU) board. It can be divided into two types, terminal OTU and regenerator
OTU (OTUG).
OTU (Terminal)
It converts wavelengths of double-channel multi-service signals at the
rate of STM-16 (2.5Gbit/s) or below. The terminal OTU can be divided
into transmitter OTU (OTUT), receiver OTU (OTUR) and single-channel
bidirectional OTU.
Optical interfaces of the OTU board locate at the line side and client side.
The line side, carrying G.692 signals with wavelength information,
supports fixed wavelength lasers and tunable wavelength lasers.
The wavelength tunable function covers the low-cost 4/8-channel
continuous wavelengths in C-band as well as the whole C-band.
The channel spacing is 100 GHz for 4-channel, while it is 50 GHz for
8-channel.
The carries client signals, including STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/GE
optical signals or continuous-rate services signals.
Chapter 3 Boards

OTU (Regenerator, OTUG)
It implements the reshaping, timing extraction and data regeneration for
double-channel line optical signals. All optical interfaces of OTUG locate
at the line side.
Both the receiving and transmitting optical signals at the line side meet
the requirements of ITU-T G.692. And the optical signals can be
STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/GE optical signals or continuous-rate service
signals.
OTUG board also supports fixed lasers and tunable lasers. Moreover, it
can be used as regeneration board for terminal OTU board.
The terminal OTU and regenerator OTU feature the following
characteristics when continuous-rate services are accessed.
Any optical signals in compliance with ITU-T G.957 can be accessed at
the client side within the rate range 12.3 Mbit/s-2.7 Gbit/s, such as
STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/GE optical signals, enterprise system connection
(ESCON) optical signals, fiber distributed data interface (FDDI) optical
signals, fiber channel (FC) signals, digital video broadcasting (DVB)
optical signals and high definition TV (HDTV) optical signals.The type of
access service is configured through the network management system
ZXONM E300, which provides the following three service configuration
methods.
Automatic Lock of Service Type: OTU board itself detects the rate of
accessed service signal automatically and try to lock the service
signal.
Manual Lock of Service Type: Lock the rate of service signal accessed
to the port by specifying the service type in the EMS. Each kind of
service corresponds to a service rate.
Manual Lock of Service Rate: Lock the service signal by specifying
the rate of accessed service in the EMS. The precision of rate
specified in the EMS is 100 ppm. That means at least four effective
digits of the rate input in the EMS should match the actual rate; or
else the service signal can not be locked.
Terminal OTU and OTUG board will report LOL (Loss of Lock) alarm
message if the accessed service signal is out of lock.
The OTU has the function of checking B1 and J0 byte in STM-4/STM-16
signals, and error packets in GE signals.
The OTU supports integrated wavelength supervision sub-systems with
the channel spacing 50 GHz. For detailed description of integrated
wavelength supervision sub-system, please refer to Appendix C.
The OTU supports client side loopback and line side loopback to facilitate
the fault localization.

Operating Principle
Figure 35 illustrates the operating principle of terminal OTU board
(single-channel bidirectional OTU board for example).


FI GURE 35 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF TERMI NAL OTU BOARD
Optical Receiving
(O/E)
Non-Specific Wavelength
Optical Transmitting
(E/O)
Specific Wavelength
(E/O)
Optical Receiving
(O/E)
Control and Communication Unit
Performance and Overhead
Supervision Unit
G.692
G.692
G.957
GbE
G.957
GbE

Figure 36 illustrates the operating principle of regenerator OTU board.
FI GURE 36 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF REGENERATOR OTU BOARD
Optical Receiving
(O/E)
Specific Wavelength
(E/O)
Specific Wavelength
(E/O)
Optical Receiving
(O/E)
Performance and Overhead
Supervision Unit
G.692
G.692
G.692
G.692

The OTU board consists of optical receiving modules, optical transmitting
modules, performance and overhead supervision unit, and control and
communication unit.
Optical receiving module
Chapter 3 Boards

It transfers the received optical signals into electrical signals through
optical/electrical (O/E) conversion.
Optical transmitting module
There are two kinds of optical transmitting modules:
Specific wavelength optical transmitting module: it converts
electrical signals into optical signals in compliance with ITU-T G.692.
Non-specific wavelength optical transmitting module: it converts
electrical signals into optical signals without special requirements for
wavelength.

Note: Only the regenerator OTU (OTUR) and single-channel bidirectional OTU board
has the non-specific wavelength optical transmitting module.

Performance and overhead supervision unit
It processes performance and overhead supervision information from
optical receiving modules and transmitting modules, and then transmits
them to the control and communication unit.
Control and communication unit
It receives monitoring information from each modules and supervision
information from the performance and overhead supervision unit, and
then forwards them to the EMS. At the same time, it receives the
commands from the EMS to control output wavelengths, power and
overheads.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators
The front panel of OTU board is illustrated in Figure 37.



FI GURE 37 FRONT PANEL OF OTU BOARD

Table 30 describes the front panel and related information for basic
operations.
TABLE 30 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF OTU BOARD AND RELATED OPERATI ON
I NFORMATI ON
Board Type
I tem
OTU
Transmitter
OTU
Receiver
Single-Path
Bidirectional
OTU
OTU
Regenerator
Board ID OTU
Board Type Label T R - G
Working
Frequency Label
Frequency label is pasted below the board ID, which indicates board
working frequency.
Bar Code Label
Board bar code label is pasted close to the lower spanner on the board
panel. It consists of bar code information and GBOM information,
which indicate board bar code and board type respectively.
NO
M
Running indicator, green
Indicator
ALM Alarm indicator, red
Laser Warning
Sign
Do not look at optical interfaces directly while
plugging/unplugging fiber pigtails to avoid burning eyes.
1. Running and alarm indicators
2. Optical interface
3. Laser warning sign
4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

Board Type
I tem
OTU
Transmitter
OTU
Receiver
Single-Path
Bidirectional
OTU
OTU
Regenerator
IN1
Client input
interface 1
Line input
interface 1
Client input
interface
Line 1 input
interface
OUT
1
Line output
interface 1
Client
output
interface 1
Line output
interface
Line 1 output
interface
IN2
Client input
interface
Line input
interface 2
Line input
interface
Line 2 input
interface
Optical
Interface
(LC/ PC)
OUT
2
Line output
interface 2
Client
output
interface 2
Client output
interface
Line 2 output
interface
Number of
Occupied Slots
1 1 1 1
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OTU board is CLASS 1
Slots for OTU
Board
All slots in OTU subrack
Slots in OA subrack except slot 5-9
Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8
Operation
Precautions
Avoid damaging the fiber pigtail interface while
plugging/unplugging the board.
Always keep the optical connectors clean. Put on the dust
caps for the unused optical connectors in time.
Note: The label is pasted at the side of the board identification.

Table 31 lists the OTU board status and corresponding status of indicators.
TABLE 31 RELATI ONS BETWEEN OTU BOARD AND I NDI CATOR STATUS
Indicator Status
Working Status
NOM (Green) ALM (Red)
The board is waiting for
configuration.
The red indicator and the green indicator flash slowly and
alternately.
The board is running normally,
and no alarm occurs.
Flashing slowly and regularly Off
The board is running normally,
and some alarm occurs.
Flashing slowly and regularly On
The board is in the status of
initialization.
ON
Flashing slowly and
regularly
The board is waiting for download.
The red indicator and the green indicator flash quickly at
the same time.
The board is in download status.
The red indicator and the green indicator flash slowly at
the same time.



Performance and Alarm Messages
The performance, alarm and event messages of the OTU board are listed in
Table 32.
TABLE 32 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF OTU BOARD
Type I tem Remark
Output optical power -
Input optical power -
Laser bias current -
Laser TEC current -
Laser temperature offset -
15-min B1 bit error count Only for SDH service
15-min ES Only for SDH service
15-min SES Only for SDH service
15-min UAS Only for SDH service
15-min BER Only for SDH service
15-min received packets count Only for GE service
Total received byte count Only for GE service
15-min received error packet count Only for GE service
15-min received error packet ratio Only for GE service
15-min 8B/10B coding violation (CV) count Only for GE service
15-min 8B/10B CV ES Only for GE service
15-min 8B/10B CV SES Only for GE service
15-min 8B/10B CV UAS Only for GE service
Performances
Board environment temperature -
Environment temperature alarm -
High input power alarm
Low input power alarm
No input power alarm
-
Lost of frame alarm (LOF) Only for SDH service
Signal degradation alarm (SD) Only for SDH service
Received error packet ratio over-threshold alarm Only for GE service
J0 trace mismatch alarm Only for SDH service
High output power alarm
Low output power alarm
No output power alarm
-
Laser over-current alarm -
Alarms
Laser temperature offset over-threshold alarm -
Chapter 3 Boards

Type I tem Remark
Unavailable signal alarm Only for SDH service
Lost of signal alarm (LOS) -
Lost of lock alarm (LOL)
Only fro
continuous-rate
service
Receiving signal MS_AIS Only for SDH service
15-min/24-hour B1 bit error over-threshold alarm Only for SDH service
15-min/24-hour ES over-threshold alarm Only for SDH service
15-min/24-hour SES over-threshold alarm Only for SDH service
15-min/24-hour UAS over-threshold alarm Only for SDH service
15-min/24-hour 8B/10B CV count over-threshold
alarm
Only for GE service
15-min/24-hour 8B/10B CV second over-threshold
alarm
Only for GE service
15-min/24-hour 8B/10B severely CV second
over-threshold alarm
Only for GE service
15-min/24-hour 8B/10B CV UAS over-threshold
alarm
Only for GE service
Laser end-of-life alarm -
Laser fault alarm -
Cooler over-current alarm -
Laser shut-down automatically -
Laser start up automatically -
Laser APS shut-down forcibly -
Events
Laser APS start up forcibly -

OTUF Board
Functions
OTUF (Optical Transponder Unit with FEC) is a kind of OTU board provided
with the FEC (Forward Error Correction) specified in ITU-T G.709 as well as
the overhead processing function. It uses the O/E/O conversion mode to
realize the wavelength conversion and data regeneration. In terms of actual
application, OTUF board is classified into terminal OTUF board and
regenerator OTUF board (OTUFG).
Terminal OTUF
Terminal OTUF board implements the wavelength conversion for
single-channel bidirectional service signals at the rate of STM-16
(2.5Gbit/s) or below.


Terminal OTUF board supports the access of STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 or
GE signals at client side. Its line-side optical signals meet the wavelength
requirement of ITU-T G.692. In addition, terminal OTUF board provides
the overhead processing and FEC functions on the line side.
Similar to terminal OTU board, either fixed lasers or tunable lasers can be
used at the line side of terminal OTUF board. Tunable lasers applied in
OTUF board supports the tuning of 4/8 channels of continuous
wavelengths in C band. The channel spacing is 100 GHz when 4 channels
of wavelengths are tuned; while the spacing is 50 GHz when 8 channels
are tuned. The terminal OTUF board also supports the tuning of
80-channel of wavelength in the whole C-band.
Regenerator OTUF (OTUFG)
OTUFG implements the reshaping, timing extraction, data regeneration,
and FEC encoding/decoding for single-channel bidirectional or
unidirectional line optical signals.
Single-channel unidirectional OTUFG board
Both received and transmitted optical signals of the single-channel
unidirectional OTUFG board meet the requirement of ITU-T G.692
and G.709.
Single-channel bidirectional OTUFG board
In one optical direction, the single-channel bidirectional OTUFG
board performs the FEC encoding for the input ITU-T G.692 optical
signal, and outputs the encoded optical signal meeting the
requirement of ITU-T G.692 and G.709.
In the other optical direction, the board performs the FEC decoding
for the input optical signal complying with ITU-T G.692 and G.709,
and outputs the decoded optical signal meeting the requirement of
ITU-T G.692.
OTUFG board also supports fixed lasers and tunable lasers. The tune
range of tunable laser is the same as that of terminal OTUF board.
In addition, OTUFG board can be used as the regenerator board of
terminal OTUF board and GEMF board.
Both the terminal OTUF board and the OTUFG board provide the following
additional functions:
Check B1, B2 and J0 bytes for SDH signals, and checks error packets for
GE signals.
Supports section monitoring (SM) and path monitoring (PM) for OTN
signals.
Supports the function of error correction and report.
Supports Auto Power SwitchDown (APSD) and tunable wavelength.
Supports the application in a centralized wavelength supervision
subsystem. For detailed information about the centralized wavelength
supervision subsystem, please refer to Appendix C in this manual.
Chapter 3 Boards

Supports both client-side loopback and line-side loopback for the fault
localization.

Operating Principle
Taking the single-channel bidirectional terminal OTUF board as example,
Figure 38 illustrates its operating principle.
FI GURE 38 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF TERMI NAL OTUF BOARD
Optical Receiving
(O/E)
(E/O)
Specific Wavelength
(E/O)
G.692
G.709
G.957
GbE
G.957
GbE
Optical Receiving
(O/E)
FEC Framer
G.692
G.709

Figure 39 illustrates the operating principle of OTUFG board, including
single-channel bidirectional OTUF board and single-channel unidirectional
OTUF board.
FI GURE 39 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF REGENERATOR OTUF BOARD
Optical Receiving
(O/E)
Specific Wavelength
(E/O)
G.692
G.709
G.692
G.709
FEC Framer

Single-Channel Bidirectional OTUF Board


Optical Receiving
(O/E)
Specific Wavelength
(E/O)
Specific Wavelength
(E/O)
G.692
G.709 G.692
G.692
Optical Receiving
(O/E)
FEC Framer
G.692
G.709

Single-Channel Unidirectional OTUFG Board

The OTUF board consists of optical receiving modules, optical transmitting
modules, FEC framer, and the control and communication unit.
Optical receiving module
It transfers the received optical signals into electrical signals through O/E
conversion.
Optical transmitting module
There are two kinds of optical transmitting modules:
Specific wavelength optical transmitting module: It converts the
ITU-T G.709 electrical signal received from the FEC framer into the
optical signal complying with both ITU-T G.692 and G.709.
Non-specific wavelength optical transmitting module: It converts the
electrical signal received from the FEC framer into optical signal
without special requirement for wavelength, and then outputs the
optical signal to user equipment.
FEC framer
It implements the FEC coding and decoding of signals. The FEC function
can be configured online in the EMS. In addition, the FEC framer can
process performance and overhead supervision information, and
transmit supervision data and overheads to the control and
communication unit.
It receives monitoring information from each module and supervision
information from the performance and overhead supervision unit, and
then reports them to the EMS. On the other hand, it receives the
commands from the EMS for controlling output wavelengths, power and
overheads.

Chapter 3 Boards

The front panel of single-channel bidirectional terminal OTUF board is same
as that of the single-channel bidirectional OTUFG board, as illustrated in
Figure 40.
FI GURE 40 FRONT PANEL OF OTUF BOARD

There is only one pair of optical interface (IN/OUT) on the front panel of the
OTUFG board.
operations of the OTUF board.
TABLE 33 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ON OF OTUF BOARD AND RELATED OPERATI ON
I NFORMATI ON
Board Type
Item
OTUF
Single-Channel
Bidirectional
OTUFG
Single-Channel
Unidirectional
OTUFG
Board ID OTU
Label [Note 1] F
FG
FG
Indicator NOM Running indicator, green
4. Laser class sign


Board Type
Item
OTUF
Single-Channel
Bidirectional
OTUFG
Single-Channel
Unidirectional
OTUFG
IN1 Client input 1
Line 1 input
(without FEC)
-
OUT1 Line output 1
Line 1 output (with
FEC)
-
IN2 Line input 2
Line 2 input (with
FEC)
-
OUT2 Client output 2
Line 2 output
(without FEC)
-
IN - - Line input (with FEC)
Optical
interface
(LC/PC
connector)
OUT - -
Line output (with
FEC)
Laser warning
sign
plugging/unplugging fiber pigtails to avoid burning
eyes.
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OTUF board is CLASS 1
Number of
occupied slots
1
Slots for OTUF
board
Operation
precautions
Avoid damaging fiber pigtail connectors while
Always keep the optical connectors clean. Put on the
dust caps for the unused optical connectors in time.

Note:
1. If optical signals at both sides of the line have the FEC function, the
single-channel unidirectional OTUFG board should be used as the regenerator
board. If only optical signals at one side of the line have the FEC function, the
double-channel OTUFG board should be used as the regenerator board.
2. The rates of butting optical interfaces should be matching, or else the service
transmission will be interrupted.

The relations between the OTUF board status and corresponding indicators
status are same as that of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for
detailed description.

Chapter 3 Boards

The performance, alarm and event information of the OTUF board are listed
in Table 34.
TABLE 34 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF OTUF BOARD
Type I tem Remark
Laser bias current
Detection requirement
depends on the board
configuration
Laser TEC current
configuration
MZ modulation bias power
configuration
B1 bit error Only for SDH traffic
B2 bit error Only for SDH traffic
Errored second Only for SDH traffic
Severely errored second Only for SDH traffic
Down time Only for SDH traffic
Bit error rate Only for SDH traffic
Received packet Only for GE traffic
Received error packet Only for GE traffic
Received error packet ratio Only for GE traffic
8B/10B coding violation Only for GE traffic
8B/10B error second Only for GE traffic
8B/10B severely error second Only for GE traffic
8B/10B down time Only for GE traffic
FEC uncorrective frame -
FEC corrective bit error -
FEC corrective 0 bit error -
FEC corrective 1 bit error -
Bit error ratio before FEC -
Bit error ratio after FEC -
OTUk-SM-BIP8 bit error k=1
ODUk-SM-BIP8 bit error k=1
Performance


Type I tem Remark
Environment temperature alarm -
-
Lost of frame alarm (LOF) Only for SDH traffic
Signal degradation alarm (SD) Only for SDH traffic
Signal unavailability alarm Only for SDH traffic
J0 TIM alarm Only for SDH traffic
LOS alarm Only for SDH traffic
15-min/24-hour B1 bit error over-threshold alarm Only for SDH traffic
15-min/24-hour B2 bit error over-threshold alarm Only for SDH traffic
15-min/24-hour ES over-threshold alarm Only for SDH traffic
15-min/24-hour SES over-threshold alarm Only for SDH traffic
15-min/24-hour UAS over-threshold alarm Only for SDH traffic
Receiving signal MS_AIS alarm Only for SDH traffic
Alignment loss alarm Only for GE traffic
15-min/24-hour received error packet Only for GE traffic
15-min/24-hour 8B/10B coding violation Only for GE traffic
15-min/24-hour 8B/10B error second Only for GE traffic
15-min/24-hour 8B/10B severely error second Only for GE traffic
OTUk J0 TIM alarm k=1
15-min/24-hour OTUk BIP8 error over-threshold
alarm
k=1
OTUk LOF alarm k=1
OTUk loss of multi-frame alarm k=1
OTUk layer SM section backward defect indication
(BDI)
k=1
OTUk layer SM section backward error indication
(BEI)
k=1
OTUk layer SM section backward incoming
alignment error (BIAE)
k=1
OTUk layer SM section incoming alignment error
(IAE)
k=1
ODUk layer PM section TIM alarm k=1
ODUk layer PM section backward defect indication
(BDI)
k=1
ODUk layer PM section backward error indication
(BEI)
k=1
ODUk AIS alarm k=1
Alarm

ODUk LCK alarm k=1
Chapter 3 Boards

Type I tem Remark
ODUk OCI alarm k=1
OTUk PT TIM alarm k=1
-
Laser over-current alarm -
Cooler over-current alarm -
MZ modulated laser power over-threshold alarm
configuration
Laser failure alarm -
MCU reset -
Laser startup automatically -
Laser APS startup forcibly -
Event
Board configuration is faulty -

OTU10G Board
Functions
OTU10G (Optical Transponder Unit for 10 Gbit/s) uses the O/E/O conversion
mode to realize the wavelength conversion and data regeneration. In
addition, the OTU10G board supports the FEC or advanced FEC (AFEC)
coding/decoding, and the G.709 overhead processing.
OTU10G board is classified into two types in terms of actual application:
single-channel bidirectional OTU10G (i.e. terminal OTU10G board),
single-channel unidirectional regenerator OTU10G (OTU10G G).
Single-channel bidirectional terminal OTU10G
It implements wavelength conversion for single-channel bidirectional
optical signals at the rate of STM-64 (10 Gbit/s) or 10 GE (10.3125
Gbit/s).
The client side supports the access of optical signals at the rate of
STM-64 or 10 GE.
Optical signals at the line side meet the requirements of ITU-T G.692. In
addition, the line side supports the FEC or AFEC function, which is
configured on the EMS.


FEC: The use of FEC in compliance with ITU-T G.975/G.709 improves
the OSNR (Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio) by about 5 dB to 6 dB
equivalently.
AFEC: AFEC is an improved FEC algorithm which can improve the
OSNR by about 7 dB to 9 dB equivalently.
For STM-64 services, the rate after coding is 10.709 Gbit/s. For 10 GE
services, the rate after coding is 11.1 Gbit/s.
Single-channel Unidirectional Regenerator OTU10G (OTU10G G)
OTU10G G board implements the reshaping, timing extraction and data
regeneration for single-channel line optical signals. Both the line-side
optical received and transmitted signals comply with ITU-T G.692. The
FEC or AFEC function (G.975/G.709) is also provided. The rate of line
optical signals is 10.709 Gbit/s (STM-64) or 11.1 Gbit/s (10GE).
OTU10G G board with FEC function can be used as the regenerator
board for SRM41 board, GEM8 board or terminal OTU10G board.
OTU10G G board with AFEC function can be used as the regenerator
board for GEM8 board or terminal OTU10G board with the same
AFEC technology.
The OTU10G board has the function of checking B1, B2 and J0 byte for
SDH signals, and error packets for 10GE signals.
The overhead checking and processing function in compliance with ITU-T
G.709 is provided.
For single-channel unidirectional OTU10G G, the electrical return-to-zero
(ERZ) technology is adopted to improve the tolerance of system to the
OSNR, and thus extend longer transmission distance.
The line side supports fixed wavelength lasers and tunable wavelength
lasers. Tunable lasers supports the tuning of 40/80 channels of
wavelengths in C band. The channel spacing is 100 GHz when 40
channels of wavelengths are tuned; while the spacing is 50 GHz when 80
channels are tuned.
The OTU10G board supports integrated wavelength supervision
sub-systems with channel spacing at 50 GHz.
The OTU10G board supports client side loopback and line side loopback
to facilitate the fault locating.

Operating Principle
The operating principles of terminal OTU10G and regenerator OTU10G
boards are illustrated in Figure 41 and Figure 42 respectively. For the
description of each module, please refer to the section OTUF board. The
signal definitions are illustrated as shown in
Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 41 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF SI NGLE- PATH BI DI RECTI ONAL OTU10G
Optical Receiving
(O/E)
(E/O)
Specific Wavelength
(E/O)
G.692
G.709 or AFEC
G.957
10GbE
G.957
10GbE
Optical Receiving
(O/E)
FEC Framer
G.692
G.709 or AFEC

FI GURE 42 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF SI NGLE- CHANNEL UNI DI RECTI ONAL OTU10G G



Take single-channel bidirectional terminal OTU10G board as example. Figure
43 illustrates the front panel of it.
FI GURE 43 FRONT PANEL OF SI NGLE- PATH BI DI RECTI ONAL OTU10G BOARD

For single-channel unidirectional OTU10G G board, there is only one pair of
optical interface (IN/OUT) on the front panel (not illustrated).
4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

operations of the OTU10G board.
TABLE 35 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF OTU10G BOARD AND RELATED OPERATI ON
I NFORMATI ON
Board Type
I tem
Single-Channel
Bidirectional Terminal
OTU10G
Single-Channel Unidirectional
Regenerator OTU10G
Board ID OTU10G OTU10G
Label [Note 1] - G
NOM Running indicator, green
Indicator
[Note 2]
IN1 Client input interface -
OUT1 Line output interface -
IN2 Line input interface -
OUT2 Client output interface -
IN - Line input interface
Optical
Interface
(LC/ PC)
OUT - Line output interface
Number of
Occupied Slots
1 1 1
Slots for OTU10G
Board
Laser Warning
Sign
eyes.
Laser Class Sign Indicates the classification of OTU10G is CLASS 1
Operation
Precautions

Note:
1. The label is pasted at the side of the board identification.
2. The relations between the OTU10G board status and corresponding indicators
status are same as that of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for detailed
description.



The performance, alarm and event information of the OTU10G board are
listed in Table 36.
TABLE 36 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF OTU10G BOARD
Type I tem Remark
15-min B1 bit error Only for SDH traffic
15-min B2 bit error Only for SDH traffic
15-min ES Only for SDH traffic
15-min SES Only for SDH traffic
15-min UAS Only for SDH traffic
15-min BER Only for SDH traffic
15-min received packet count Only for 10 GE traffic
15-min received error packet count Only for 10 GE traffic
15-min received error packet ratio Only for 10 GE traffic
15-min OTUk BIP8 error count k=2
FEC corrected BE count -
FEC corrected 0 error count -
After-FEC BER -
Performance
FEC uncorrectable frame count -
Board environment temperature alarm -
No input optical power alarm
Low input optical power alarm
High input optical power alarm
-
LOF alarm Only for SDH traffic
SD alarm Only for SDH traffic
UAS alarm Only for SDH traffic
J0 TIM alarm Only for SDH traffic
LOS alarm -
15-min/24-hour B1 error over-threshold alarm Only for SDH traffic
Alarm
15-min/24-hour B2 error over-threshold alarm Only for SDH traffic
Chapter 3 Boards

Type I tem Remark
Receiving signal MS_AIS Only for SDH traffic
15-min received error packet over-threshold
alarm
Only for 10 GE traffic
15-min/24-hour OTUk BIP8 error over-threshold
alarm
k=2
OTUk LOF alarm k=2
15-min/24-hour after-FEC ER over-threshold
alarm
k=2
15-min/24-hour before-FEC ER over-threshold
alarm
k=2
15-min/24-hour OTUk-SM BIP8 UAS
k=2
No output optical power alarm
Low output optical power alarm
High output optical power alarm
-
Laser current over-threshold alarm -
Alarm
Laser fault alarm -
Event

EOTU10G Board
Functions
EOTU10G (Enhanced Optical Transponder Unit for 10 Gbit/s) board uses the
O/E/O conversion mode to realize the wavelength conversion and data
regeneration. In addition, OTU10G board, complying with ITU-T G.709,
supports FEC or AFEC (Advanced FEC) encoding/decoding and the
processing of overhead.


EOTU10G board is classified into two types in terms of actual application:
single-channel bidirectional EOTU10G (i.e. terminal EOTU10G board) and
regenerator EOTU10G (EOTU10G G) including single-channel bidirectional
EOTU10G G and single-channel unidirectional EOTU10G G.
Single-channel bidirectional terminal EOTU10G
It implements the wavelength conversion for single-channel bidirectional
STM-64 optical signal (9.953 Gbit/s), OTU2 (10.709 Gbit/s) or 10GE
optical signal (10.3125 Gbit/s).
Single-channel bidirectional OTU10G board supports the access of
STM-64 and 10GE optical signal at its client side. The optical signals at its
line side meet the requirement of ITU-T G.692. In addition, the line side
supports the FEC or AFEC function, which is configured on the EMS.
FEC: The use of FEC in compliance with ITU-T G.975/G.709 improves
the OSNR (Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio) by about 5 dB to 6 dB
equivalently.
AFEC: AFEC is an improved FEC algorithm which can improve the
OSNR by about 7 dB to 9 dB equivalently.
For STM-64 signal accessed at client side, the signal rate after AFEC
encoding is 10.709 Gbit/s. For 10GE signal accessed at client side, the
signal rate after AFEC encoding is 11.1 Gbit/s.
Regenerator EOTU10G (EOTU10G G)
EOTU10G G board implements the reshaping, timing extraction and data
regeneration for single-channel line optical signal. Both the line-side
optical received and optical launched signals comply with ITU-T G.692.
The rate of line optical signals is 10.709 Gbit/s (STM-64) or 11.1 Gbit/s
(10G).
Single-channel bidirectional EOTU10G G: The line-side input
interface 1 only supports FEC function, while line-side input interface
2 supports both FEC and AFEC function. EOTU10G G board with FEC
or AFEC function can be used as the regenerator board for
SRM41/OTN board or terminal EOTU10G board with the same FEC or
AFEC technology.
Single-channel unidirectional EOTU10G G: EOTU10G G board with
FEC or AFEC function can be used as the regenerator board for
SRM41/OTN board or terminal EOTU10G board with the same FEC or
AFEC technology.
Both the terminal OTU10G board and the OTU10G G board provide the
following additional functions:
Checks B1, B2 and J0 bytes for SDH signals, and checks error packets for
10GE signals.
Supports the overhead checking and processing function in compliance
with ITU-T G.709.
Adopts the Electrical Returen-to-Zero (ERZ) technology to improve the
system tolerance to OSNR, and thus entend the transmission distance.
Chapter 3 Boards

Supports the application of either fixed lasers or tunable lasers. Tunable
lasers applied at the line side of EOTU10G board supports the tuning of
40/80 channels of wavelengths in C band. The channel spacing is 100
GHz when 40 channels of wavelengths are tuned. while the spacing is 50
GHz when 80 channels are tuned.
subsystem with channel spacing at 50 GHz. For detailed information
about the centralized wavelength supervision subsystem, please refer to
Appendix C in this manual.
Supports client-side loopback and line-side loopback for the fault
localization.

Operating Principle
The operating principles of terminal EOTU10G and regenerator EOTU10G
boards are illustrated in Figure 44 and Figure 45. The signal definitions are
illustrated as shown in Table 37.
FIGURE 44 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF SINGLE-CHANNEL BIDIRECTIONAL
EOTU10G
OpticalReceiving
(O/E)
Non-SpecificWavelength
OpticalTransmitting
(E/O)
SpecificWavelength
OpticalTransmitting
(E/O)
ControlandCommunicationUnit
OTU2
OTU2(AFEC)
10GEOTU2
10GEOTU2
(AFEC)
STM-64
10GE
OTU2
STM-
64
10GE
OTU2
OpticalReceiving
(O/E)
FECFramer
OTU2
OTU2(AFEC)
10GEOTU2
10GEOTU2
(AFEC)



FIGURE 45 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF REGENERATOR EOTU10G
Optical
Receiving
O/E
SpecificWavelength
OpticalTransmitting
E/O
SpecificWavelength
OpticalTransmitting
E/O
Optical
Receiving
O/E
FECFramer
OTU2
OTU2 AFEC
OTU2
OTU2 AFEC
OTU2
10GEOTU2
OTU2
OTU2(AFEC)
10GEOTU2
10GEOTU2
(AFEC)
10GEOTU2
10GEOTU2 AFEC)
10GEOTU2
10GEOTU2 AFEC)

Single-channel bidirectional EOTU10G G

Single-channel bidirectional EOTU10G G

TABLE 37 SI GNAL DEFI NI TI ON OF EOUT10G BOARD

EOTU10G board consists of optical receiving modules, optical transmitting
modules, FEC framer and the control and communication unit.

Signal RateGbit/ s Signal Frame
FEC
Algorithm
Optical
Interface
Standard
STM-64 9.95328 G.707 - G.957/G.691
10GE 10.3125
10GE LAN with
64/66B coding
-
IEEE
802.3ae
OTU2 10.709 G.709 FEC G.691/G.692
OTU2AFEC 10.709 G.709 AFEC G.692
10GE OTU2 11.1 G.709 FEC G.692
10GE OTU2AFEC 11.1 G.709 AFEC G.692
Chapter 3 Boards

Optical Receiving Module
It converts received optical signals into electrical signals through O/E
conversion.
Optical Transmitting Module
It can be classified into specific wavelength transmitting optical module
and non-specific wavelength transmitting optical module.
Specific Wavelength Optical Transmitting Module: It converts
electrical signal in compliance with ITU-T G.709 from FEC framer into
optical signal that meets the requirement of ITU-T G.692 and ITU-T
G.709.
Non-Specific Wavelength Optical Transmitting Module: It converts
electrical signal from FEC framer into optical signal that has no special
requirements for wavelength and then outputs the optical signal to
user equipment.
FEC Framer
It supports FEC or AFEC coding/decoding/coding and decoding. FEC
function can be configured on EMS. In addition, it also supports
performance monitoring and overhead processing function, and then
input performance monitoring data and overhead bytes to the control
and communication unit.
For single-channel bidirectional terminal EOTU10G and single-channel
unidirectional EOTU10G G, line-side interface supports FEC or AFEC
function. The line-side interface 1 of single-channel bidirectional OTU10G
G only supports FEC, while interface 2 supports FEC or AFEC.
It receives the monitoring information from each module and the
performance and overhead monitoring unit, and then reports them to the
EMS. On the other hand, it receives the commands from the EMS for
controlling the output wavelengths, optical power and overheads in the
board.

Figure 43 shows the front panel of the single-channel bidirectional EOTU10G
board.


FIGURE 46 FRONT PANEL OF SINGLE-CHANNEL BIDIRECTIONAL EOTU10G
BOARD

The front panel of EOTU10G G board is similar to that shown in Figure 43
except that EOTU10G G board has only one pair of optical interfaces (IN/OUT)
on its front panel.
operations of EOTU10G board.
TABLE 38 DESCRIPTION OF EOTU10G BOARD S FRONT PANEL AND RELATED
OPERATION INFORMATION
Single-Channel Regenerator
EOTU10G
Board Type
I tem
Single-Channel
Bidirectional EOTU10G
Single-channel
bidirectional
EOTU10G G
Single-channel
unidirectional
EOTU10G G
Board ID EOTU10G
Label [Note 1] T/R G
Indicator
[Note 2]
Optical
Interface
IN1 Client input interface
Line input
interface
-
4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

OUT1 Line output interface
Line output
interface
-
IN2 Line input interface
Line input
interface
-
OUT2 Client output interface
Line output
interface
-
IN - -
Line input
interface
(LC/ PC)
OUT - -
Line output
interface
Number of
Occupied Slots
1 1 1
Slots for OTU10G
Board
Laser Warning
Sign
eyes.
Laser Class Sign Indicates the classification of EOTU10G is CLASS 1
Operation
Precautions
Note: The label is sticked at the side of the board identification.
The relations between the working status and corresponding indicator status
of EOTU10G board are same as those of OTU board. Please refer to Table 31
for detailed description.

The performance, alarm and event messages of the OTU10G board are listed
in Table 39.
TABLE 39 PERFORMANCE, ALARM AND EVENT MESSAGES OF OTU10G BOARD
Type Item Remark
Performance


Type Item Remark
Laser temperature offset
Detection
requirement depends
on the board
configuration
Detection
requirement depends
on the board
configuration
High input optical power over-threshold
15-min B1 error count
15-min ES
15-min SES
15-min UAS
15-min BER
Only detected for
SDH signals
15-min received packet count
15-min received error packet count
15-min received error packet ratio
15-min received PAUSE frame
15-min received byte
Only detected for
10GE signals
15-min OTUk SM BIP8 error count k=2
15-min ODUk PM BIP8 error count k=2
15-min OTUk SM BIP8 ES k=2
15-min OTUk SM BIP8 SES k=2
FEC corrected BE count -
After-FEC BER -
Before-FEC BER -
FEC uncorrectable frame count -
-
LOF alarm
SD alarm
UAS alarm
J0 TIM alarm
Only detected for
SDH signals
Alarm
LOS alarm -
Chapter 3 Boards

Type Item Remark
15-min B1 error out of limit alarm
24-hour B1 error out of limit alarm
Only detected for
SDH signals
15-min B2 error out of limit alarm
24-hour B2 error out of limit alarm
15-min ES out of limit alarm
24-hour ES out of limit alarm
15-min SES out of limit alarm
24-hour SES out of limit alarm
15-min UAS out of limit alarm
24-hour UAS out of limit alarm
Receiving signal MS_AIS
Only detected for
SDH signals
15-min received error packet out of limit
alarm
Alignment loss alarm
Only detected for
10GE signals
15-min OTUk BIP8 error out of limit alarm
24-hour OTUk BIP8 error out of limit alarm
k=2
OTUk LOF alarm k=2
OTUk layer SM section BDI k=2
OTUk layer SM section BEI k=2
OTUk layer SM section BIAE k=2
OTUk layer SM section IAE k=2
15-min/24-hour OTUk-SM BIP8 CV over-threshold
alarm
k=2
15-min/24-hour OTUk-SM BIP8 SES
k=2
15-min/24-hour OTUk-SM BIP8 UAS
k=2
ODUk layer PM section J0 TIM alarm k=2
ODUk layer PM section BDI k=2
ODUk layer PM section BEI k=2
ODUk AIS alarm k=2
ODUk LCK alarm k=2
ODUk OCI alarm k=2
ODUk PT TIM alarm k=2
-
Laser current out of limit alarm -


Type Item Remark
Laser temperature offset out of limit alarm -
Laser fault alarm -
MZ modulation laser bias power over-threshold
alarm
Detection
requirement depends
on the board
configuration
Laser shutdown automatically -
MCU reset -
Laser APS shutdown forcibly -
Event
Board configuration is faulty -

Chapter 3 Boards

Convergence Boards
SRM42 Four 622 M/155 M SubRate Mux Board
SRM41 Four 2.5 G SubRate Mux Board
GEM2 Two Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board
GEMF Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board with FEC
GEM8 Eight Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board
DSA Data Service Aggregation Board
DSAF Data Service Aggregation with FEC
DSAE
Data Service Aggregation Electrical interface
Board
SMU SDH Multiplex Unit
OA/OTU/TMUX subrack

SRM41/SRM42 Board
The functions of SRM41 and SRM42 are described in Table 40.
TABLE 40 FUNCTI ONS OF SRM41/ SRM42 BOARD
Board
Function
SRM42 SRM41
Main Function
The data multiplexing
technology is adopted to
implement the
Mux/DeMux between
four-channel
STM-1/STM-4 and
STM-16 signal.
The data multiplexing technology is adopted
to implement the Mux/DeMux between
four-channel STM-16 and OTU2 signal.
Tributary
interface
function
STM-1/STM-4 optical
signals meeting the
requirements of G.957
can be accessed.
STM-16 optical signals meeting the
requirements of G.957 can be accessed.


Board
Function
SRM42 SRM41
Aggregate
interface
function
The rate of
aggregate signals
is STM-16, and the
wavelength meets
the requirements
of ITU-T G.692.
Supporting fixed
wavelength lasers
and tunable
wavelength lasers.
The wavelength of aggregate signal
meets the requirements of ITU-T G.692.
And the interfaces comply with optical
interface standards S-64.2b in G.691.
Supporting SDH synchronous
convergence and OTN asynchronous
convergence.
Supporting FEC/AFEC coding/decoding
and complying with ITU-T G.709. The
signal rate after coding is 10.709 Gbit/s.
The format of FEC/AFEC should be
configured in the EMS.
Supporting fixed wavelength lasers and
tunable wavelength lasers.
Wavelength
tunable
function
The aggregate output
supports tunable
wavelength lasers. The
function is same as that
of OTU board. Refer to
the section OTU Board
for detailed description.
The aggregate output supports the tuning of
48/96-channel wavelengths in the whole
C-band.
For 48-channel wavelengths, the channel
spacing is 100 GHz. For 96-channel
wavelengths, the spacing is 50 GHz.
ERZ
modulation
Not available
The ERZ modulation can improve the system
tolerance to OSNR, and thus the transmission
distance can be extended.
I ntegrated
wavelength
supervision
Supporting the integrated wavelength supervision with the channel
spacing 50 GHz.
For detailed information about the supervision sub-system, please refer
to Appendix C.
Clock
management
Cooperating with the clock assignment (CA) board, the SRM41/SRM42
boards can perform powerful clock management function. The board can
select the best clock automatically according to the synchronization
status message (SSM) from the external clock source (2 Mbit/s or 2
MHz), internal clock of board, and the tributary/aggregate clock of other
SRM41/SRM42 board in the TMUX subrack.
In addition, the clock can be transmitted through aggregate services of
the SRM41/SRM42 board.
Performance
supervision
Supervising the B1, B2 and J0 performance in tributary and aggregate
signals.
Transparent
transmission
of overheads
Transmitting SDH section overheads (SOH) transparently. The
transmitted overhead bytes can be configured in the EMS.
Loopback
function
Supporting client side loopback and line side loopback to facilitate faults
locating.

Operating Principle
The operating principle of SRM41/SRM42 board is illustrated in Figure 47.
Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 47 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF SRM41/ SRM42 BOARD
TributaryOptical
Module
Convergence
Unit
AggregateOptical
Module
ClockProcessing
Unit
G.692
(SRM42)
G.957
G.692/G.709
(SRM41)

The SRM41/SRM42 board consists of the tributary optical module, aggregate
optical module, convergence unit, clock processing unit and the control and
communication unit.
Tributary optical module
Small form factor pluggable (SFP) modules are adopted in the tributary
optical module to input or output client SDH optical signals.
SRM42: four-channel STM-1/STM-4 optical signals in compliance with
ITU-T G.957 can be accessed.
SRM41: four-channel STM-16 optical signals in compliance with
ITU-T G.957 can be accessed.
Aggregate optical module
Line optical signals are input to or output from the aggregate optical
module. It supports the tunable wavelength function.
SRM42: signals at the rate STM-16 meet the requirements of ITU-T
G.692.
SRM41: supporting FEC/AFEC coding/decoding. The signal rate after
coding is 10.709 Gbit/s. Line optical signals meet the requirements
of ITU-T G.692 and G.709, and supports G.709 overhead processing.

Convergence unit
As the principle part of SRM41/SRM42 board, the convergence unit
performs the multiplexing and demultiplexing function.
In the converging direction, tributary signals are converged as the
aggregate signal. And then the aggregate signal is sent to the
aggregate optical module.
In the de-converging direction, the aggregate signal is de-converged
to tributary signals which will be output from the tributary optical
module.
SRM42 board supports the SDH synchronous convergence format, while
SRM41 supports SDH synchronous convergence format and OTN
asynchronous convergence format.


In addition, it implements the transparent transmission of SOH and the
multiplexing/demultiplexing of data.
Clock processing unit
This unit can either process clocks alone, or perform more powerful clock
processing function cooperating with the CA board, thus guarantying the
clock precision of SDH signals. The configuration and management of
clock sources comply with ITU-T G.781.
The unit can select the best clock as the aggregate transmitting clock
according to the SSM from the tributary clock, aggregate clock and
the clock provided by the CA board. This clock can be transmitted to
the far end together with services, and then be used as the clock
source of far-end equipment.
The unit can select the best clock from the tributary and aggregate
clock, and provide it to the CA board.
When all clock sources are in failure, the internal clock of the board
will be used as the aggregate transmitting clock (the frequency
deviation is less than 4.6 ppm).
This unit monitors the power supply of the board. And it performs the
board and EMS supervision function.

Taking the SRM41 board as example, Figure 48 illustrates the front panel of
the board.
Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 48 FRONT PANEL OF SRM41 BOARD

operations of the SRM42/SRM41 board.
TABLE 41 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF SRM42/ SRM41 BOARD AND RELATED
OPERATI ON I NFORMATI ON
Board Type
I tem
SRM42 SRM41
Board ID SRM42 SRM41
Working Frequency
Label
Indicates board working frequency which is pasted under the
board ID
Indicator
Tributary
optical
interface
indicator
Located at the right side of each tributary optical interface, as
The indicator is green. It indicates the working status of
corresponding tributary interface.
2. Aggregate interface optical interface
3. Tributary interface
4. Tributary interface indicators
6. Laser class sign


Board Type
I tem
SRM42 SRM41
IN Line input interface, connected with flange, LC/PC connector
OUT Line output interface, connected with flange, LC/PC connector
DROP1-DR
OP4
Output optical interface of tributary 1-4, LC/PC connector
Tributary signals are accessed through SFP modules.
Optical
Interface
ADD1-ADD4
Input optical interface of tributary 1-4, LC/PC connector
Tributary signals are accessed through SFP modules.
Number of Occupied
Slots
1 1
Laser warning sign
eyes.
Laser class sign
Indicates that the laser class of OTU10G board is CLASS
1
Slots for SRM Board
Always keep the optical connectors clean. Put on the
dust caps for the unused optical connectors in time.
Operation
Precautions
The OTUG board
should be used as
the regenerating
board for SRM42
boards.
When the FEC technology
is adopted, the
regenerating OTU10G
board with the same FEC
technology should be
used as the regenerating
board for SRM41 boards.

Table 42 lists the SRM42/SRM41 board status and corresponding status of
indicators.

TABLE 42 CORRESPONDENCE RELATI ONS BETWEEN THE WORKI NG STATUS AND I NDI CATOR
STATUS OF THE SRM41/ SRM42 BOARD
Indicator Status
Working Status
Tributary Optical
Interface
Indicator (Green)
Chapter 3 Boards

Indicator Status
Working Status
Tributary Optical
Interface
Indicator (Green)
The Bootrom program
is downloaded.
Off Off -
The board is waiting
for configuration.
The green indicator and the red indicators
flash alternately.
-
The board is running
normally, and no alarm
occurs.
Flashing slowly and
regularly
Off -
normally, and some
alarm occurs.
Flash slowly and
regularly
Normally on -
The board is
performing self-test
upon power on.
The red indicator and the green indicator
flashes quickly for three times.
-
The board is in the
downloading status
flashes slowly at the same times.
-
The tributary optical
interface is working
normally.
- - On
The tributary optical
interface is working
abnormally.
- - Off

THE PERFORMANCE, ALARM AND EVENT I NFORMATI ON OF THE SRM42/ SRM41 BOARD ARE
LI STED I N TABLE 43,


Table 44 and Table 45 respectively.
TABLE 43 PERFORMANCE MESSAGES OF SRM42/ SRM41 BOARD
Detection Point Performance Items Remark
Board Environment temperature Only for SRM41 board
Inner-module temperature Only for SRM42 board
configuration
Aggregate transmitter
Laser TEC current -
15-min ES
15-min SES
15-min UAS
15-min BER
Only for SRM42 board
FEC corrected BE count
Before-FEC BER
FEC uncorrectable frame
FEC corrected 0 error count
FEC corrected 1 error count
After-FEC BER
15-min OTU2 SM BIP8 error count
These performances are
detected only when the
SRM41 board is configured
with bit decoding or
decoding/coding function.
15-min ODU2 PM BIP8 error count
15-min TCMi BIP8 error count
15-min TCMi BEI error count
15-min TCMi UAS error count
15-min TCMi SES error count
15-min TCMi BIP8 BE over-threshold
Aggregate receiver
24-hour TCMi BIP8 BE over-threshold
i=1-6. these performances
are detected only when
SRM41 is configured as FEC
decoding/coding, and TCM
is configured in the mode
of running or monitoring.
15-min B1 error count -
15-min ES -
15-min SES -
15-min UAS -
Tributary receiver
15-min BER -
Chapter 3 Boards

Input optical power
It depends on the board
configuration whether to
detect this item.
Inner-module temperature
Laser bias current Tributary transmitter
Output optical power



TABLE 44 ALARM MESSAGES OF SRM42/ SRM41 BOARD
Detection Point Alarms Remark
Board Board environment temperature alarm Only for SRM41 board
No output optical power
Low output optical power
High output optical power
-
Laser temperature offset over-threshold
alarm
-
TEC current over-threshold alarm
It depends on the
board configuration
whether to detect this
item.
Inner-module temperature over-threshold
alarm
MZ modulation bias power over-threshold
alarm
It depends on the
board configuration
item.
Aggregate
transmitter
Laser end-of-life alarm Only for SRM42 board
-
LOF alarm
UAS alarm
SD alarm
LOS alarm
J0 TIM alarm
15-min/24-hour B1 error count
15-min/24-hour ES over-threshold alarm
15-min/24-hour SES over-threshold alarm
15-min/24-hour UAS over-threshold alarm
15-min/24-hour before-FEC BE
15-min/24-hour after-FEC BE over-threshold
alarm
OTU2 LOF alarm
OTU2 loss of multi-frame alarm
Aggregate receiver
OTU2 J0 TIM alarm
Chapter 3 Boards

15-min/24-hour OTU2 BIP8 error
OTU2 layer SM section BDI
OTU2 layer SM section BEI
OTU2 layer SM section BIAE
OTU2 layer SM section IAE
ODU2 layer PM section BDI
ODU2 layer PM section BEI
ODU2 layer PM section IAE
ODU2 AIS alarm
ODU2 OCI alarm
ODU2 PT TIM alarm
TCMi J0 TIM alarm
TCMi layer BDI
TCMi layer BIAE
TCMi layer IAE
TCMi AIS alarm
TCMi LCK alarm
TCMi LTC alarm
TCMi OCI alarm
i=1-6, Only for SRM41
board
LOF alarm -
LOS alarm -
UAS alarm -
SD alarm
J0 TIM alarm -
Only for SDH traffic
Only for SDH traffic
Receiving signal MS_AIS Only for SDH traffic
Tributary receiver
It depends on the
board configuration
item.


It depends on the
board configuration
item.
Laser current over-threshold alarm
Tributary
transmitter
Inner-module temperature over-threshold
alarm
TABLE 45 EVENT MESSAGES OF SRM42/ SRM41 BOARD
Detection Point I tem
Tributary light shut-down (laser shut-down)
Tributary transmitter
Tributary light start up (laser startup)
Tributary light shut-down (laser shut-down)
Tributary light startup (laser startup)
Board Clock switching succeeds/fails

GEM2 Board
Functions
GEM2 (Two Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board) board receives optical GE signals
complying with IEEE802.3 from SDH equipment, carries out O/E/O
conversion for them and finally combines them into an optical signal with
special wavelength complying with ITU-T G.692. It also implements the
opposite procedure of combination, that is, converts ITU-T G.692 optical
signal into two GE optical signals.
Tributary side
Two optical GE signals, complying with IEEE802.3, are accessed at the
tributary side of the GEM2 board.
Aggregate side
Optical signal on the aggregate side of GEM2 board meets the
specification of ITU-T G.692 with the rate up to 2.5 Gbit/s.
Check B1, B2 and J0 bytes for SDH signals.
Support both fixed lasers and tunable lasers at the aggregate side. In
case of tunable lasers, 4 or 8 continuous wavelengths in C band can
be tuned. The channel spacing is 100 GHz for 4 channels, while it is 50
GHz for 8 channels.

Chapter 3 Boards

Operating Principle
Figure 49 illustrates the operating principle of GEM2 board.
FIGURE 49 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF GEM2 BOARD
GE
Optical
Module
C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
U
n
i
t
G.692
S
D
H

O
v
e
r
h
e
a
d
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

U
n
i
t
GE
Optical
Module
GE optical
signals
M
A
C
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

U
n
i
t
Aggregate
optical
module
GE Convergence Unit
STM-16

In the multiplexing direction (GE STM -16), the GE optical signals are
accessed by two GE optical modules respectively. They are processed in the
GE convergence unit and multiplexed into an electrical STM-16 signal. Then
the electrical STM-16 signal is input to the aggregate optical module and
converted into an optical signal complying with ITU-T G.692.
In the demultiplexing direction (STM-16 GE), an aggregate optical signal
(complying with ITU-T G.692) is accessed through the aggregate optical
module. The aggregate signal is processed in the GE convergence unit and
separated into two electrical GE signals. Then these two electrical signals are
converted into two optical signals and output by two GE optical modules
respectively.
GEM2 board consists of two GE optical modules, a GE convergence unit, an
aggregate optical module, and the control and communication unit.
GE Optical Module
GEM2 board has two GE optical modules.
Each module accesses an optical GE signal (IEEE802.3) and converts it
into an electrical signal in the multiplexing direction, while receives an
electrical GE signal from the GE convergence unit and converts it into an
optical signal (IEEE802.3) in the demultiplexing direction.
GE Convergence Unit
The GE convergence unit implements the multiplexing/demultiplexing
between two electrical GE signals and an electrical STM-16 signal. It
consists of an MAC controller unit, a convergence unit and an SDH
overhead processing unit.


In the multiplexing direction
The MAC controller unit receives two electrical GE signals and
identifies MAC addresses in the Ethernet frames.
The convergence unit combines two GE signals into one signal and
sends it to the SDH overhead processing unit.
The SDH overhead processing unit mapps the Ethernet frames into
an SDH frame and processes SDH overheads and generates B1/B2/J0
bytes etc. Finally, it outputs an electrical STM-16 signal to the
aggregate optical module.
In the demultiplexing direction
The SDH overhead processing unit receives an electrical STM-16
signal from the aggregate optical module. It processes the signals
overheads, checks the B1/B2/J0 bytes and demaps the SDH frame to
GE frame.
The convergence unit demultiplexes the electrical GE signal received
from the SDH overhead processing unit into two GE signals and sends
them to the MAC controller unit.
The MAC controller unit determines the Ehternet transmit ports for
the two electrical GE signals and outputs them to corresponding GE
optical modules.
Aggregate Optical Module
GEM2 board has only one aggregate optical module.
In the multiplexing direction, the aggregate optical module receives an
electrical STM-16 signal from the GE convergence unit, converts it into
an optical signal (ITU-T G.692) and then output the optical signal.
In the demultiplexing direction, it converts the optical signal (ITU-T
G.692) received from user equipment into an electrical STM-16 signal
and then sends it to the GE convergence unit.
It monitors the power supply of the board and the running of the board
and performs the supervision function of the EMS.

The front panel of the GEM2 board is shown in Figure 50.
Chapter 3 Boards

FIGURE 50 FRONT PANEL OF GEM2 BOARD

operations of GEM2 board.
TABLE 46 DESCRIPTION OF GEM2 BOARD S FRONT PANEL AND RELATED
Board
Item
GEM2
Board ID GEM2
NOM Running indicator, green Indicator
2. Aggregate optical interface
3. Tributary optical Ethernet interface
4. Indicator of tributary optical Ethernet interface
6. Laser class sign


Board
Item
GEM2
Indicator of
optical
Ethernet
interface
Located at the right side of each optical Ethernet
interface, as shown in Figure 50. It is a green
indicator used to indicate the running status of
corresponding optical Ethernet interface.
IN
Line input interface, connected through a fiber optic
adaptor, LC/PC connector
OUT
Line output interface, connected through a fiber optic
adaptor, LC/PC connector
DROP1
Optical output Ethernet interface of tributary 1,
LC/PC connector
ADD1
Optical input Ethernet interface of tributary 1,
LC/PC connector
DROP2
Optical output Ethernet interface of tributary 2,
LC/PC connector
Optical
interface
ADD2
Optical input Ethernet interface of tributary 2,
LC/PC connector
Laser warning sign
plugging/unplugging fiber pigtails to avoid
burning eyes.
Laser class sign
Indicates that the laser class of GEM2 board is CLASS
1
Number of occupied
slot
1
Slots for GEM2 board
Operation precautions
Avoid damaging optical connectors while
Always keep optical connectors clean. Put on the dust
caps for unused optical connectors in time.
OTUG board should be used as the regeneration board
for GEM2 board.
Table 47 lists the relations between the working status and corresponding
indicator status of GEM2 board.

Chapter 3 Boards

TABLE 47 RELATIONS BETWEEN THE WORKING STATUS AND INDICATOR STATUS
OF GEM2 BOARD
Indicator Status
Working Status
Ethernet
Optical
Interface
Indicator
(Green)
Waiting for
configuration
The green indicator and the red indicator
flash alternately and slowly.
-
Running normally
Flashing slowly and
regularly
OFF -
Alarming
Flashing slowly and
regularly
ON -
Initializing ON
Flashing slowly
and regularly
-
Waiting for download
flash quickly at the same time
-
Downloading status
flash slowly at the same time
-
Tributary interface
works normally
Flashing slowly and
regularly
- ON
Tributary interface
works abnormally
- - OFF
Note: The - symbol means that the indicator status is indefinite.

The performance messages of the GEM2 board are listed in Table 48.
TABLE 48 PERFORMANCE MESSAGES OF GEM2 BOARD
Detection Point Item Remark
Laser temperature -
Inner-module temperature -
TEC current -
Aggregate receiver
15-min ES -


15-min SES -
15-min UAS -
15-min BER -
Total received packet count -
Total received byte count -
15-min received error packet
ratio
-
count
-
Tributary GE receiver
Input optical power
It depends on the
board configuration
item.
Total sent packet count -
Total sent packet count -
Laser bias current
Tributary GE
transmitter
It depends on the
board configuration
whether to detect
these items.
The alarm messages of the GEM2 board are listed in Table 49.
TABLE 49 ALARM MESSAGES OF GEM2 BOARD
High output power alarm -
Low output power alarm -
No output power alarm -
High laser bias current alarm -
High TEC current alarm -
Laser temperature offset out of
limit alarm
-
Inner-modulation temperature
out of limit alarm
-
Laser end of lifetime alarm -
High input power alarm -
Low input power alarm -
No input power alarm -
Aggregate receiver
LOF alarm -
Chapter 3 Boards

UAS alarm -
SD alarm -
LOS alarm -
J0 Track Identifier Mismatch
(TIM) alarm
-
15-min B1 BE out of limit alarm -
15-min ES out of limit alarm -
15-min SES out of limit alarm -
15-min UAS out of limit alarm -
24-hour B1 BE out of limit alarm -
24-hour ES out of limit alarm -
24-hour SES out of limit alarm -
24-hour UAS out of limit alarm -
Receiving signal MS_AIS alarm -
LOS alarm -
count out of limit alarm
-
24-hour received error packet
-
Link fail alarm -
It depends on the
board configuration
whether to detect
these items.
High laser bias current alarm
Tributary GE
transmitter
Inner-module temperature out
of limit alarm
It depends on the
board configuration
whether to detect
these items.


GEMF Board
Functions
GEMF (Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board with FEC) implements the
multiplexing/demultiplexing between two-channel GE signals and STM-16
signals through the O/E/O conversion.
Tributary side
Two optical GE signals, complying with IEEE802.3 are accessed at the
tributary side of GEMF board.
Aggregate side
The optical signal at the aggregate side complies with ITU-T G.692
and G.709. The highest rate of the signal is 2.667 Gbit/s.
Checks the byte B1, B2 and J0 in the STM-16 signal.
Supports both fixed wavelength lasers and tunable wavelength
lasers. In case of tunable lasers, 4 or 8 continuous wavelengths in C
band can be tuned. The channel spacing is 100 GHz for 4 channels,
while it is 50 GHz for 8 channels.

Operating Principle
The operating principle of the GEMF board is illustrated in Figure 51.
FI GURE 51 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF GEMF BOARD
GE
Optical
Module
Convergence
Unit
G.692/
G.709
SDH
Overhead
Processing
Unit
GE
Optical
Module
GbE optical
signals
MAC
Controller
Unit
OTN
Processing
Unit
GbE Convergence Unit
STM-16
OTN
Optical
Module

Multiplexing direction (GE STM-16)
Two-channel GE signals in compliance with IEEE802.3 are accessed
through the GE optical modules. They are processed in the GE
Chapter 3 Boards

convergence unit and then in the OTN processing unit. Finally they are
output an aggregate signal (STM-16) in compliance with ITU-T G.692
and G.709.
Demultiplexing direction (STM-16 GE)
The aggregate signal (STM-16) complying with ITU-T G.692 and G.709 is
accessed through the OTN optical module. It is processed in the OTN
processing unit and then in the GE convergence unit. Finally it is
demultiplexed into two-channel GE signals which are output after being
transferred to corresponding optical signals in two GE optical modules
respectively.

The GEMF board consists of two GE optical modules, the GE convergence unit,
OTN processing unit, an OTN optical module, and the control and
communication unit.
GE optical module
In the multiplexing direction, the GE optical signal in compliance with
IEEE802.3 (2002) is accessed to the module and converted to
corresponding electrical signal through O/E conversion.
In the demultiplexing direction, the GE signal in compliance with
IEEE802.3 (2002) is output after E/O conversion.
GE convergence unit
The GE convergence unit is composed of the MAC controller unit, the
convergence unit and the SDH overhead processing unit. In this unit, two
GE signals are multiplexed, while an STM-16 signal is demultiplexed.
In the multiplexing direction, the MAC controller unit identifies the
MAC address in the Ethernet frames of two GE electrical signals
output from the GE optical modules. In the convergence unit, two GE
signals are multiplexed into one signal which will be forwarded to the
SDH overhead processing unit. After the mapping from Ethernet
frames to STM-16 frame, overhead processing and the generation of
the bytes B1/B2/J0, the signal is transferred to the OTN processing
unit as an STM-16 electrical signal.
In the demultiplexing direction, the STM-16 electrical signal output
from the OTN processing unit is transmitted to the SDH overhead
processing unit, which will process overheads and check the bytes
B1/B2/J0 in the STM-16 signal. Then the signal is demultiplexed into
two GE signals. These two signals are transferred to the MAC
controller unit through the convergence unit. The MAC controller unit
selects the transmitting ports for the electrical signals and forwards
them to corresponding GE optical modules.
OTN processing unit
It implements the FEC coding/decoding for STM-16 signals, the insertion
and check of ODU1 Trail Track Identifier (TTI) in the SM byte, and the
checkout of ODU1 BIP-8.
In the multiplexing direction: It receives the STM-16 signal from the
GE convergence unit. After completing the FEC coding of the signal


and inserting the TTI and multi-frame byte, it outputs the STM-16
signal (complying with G.709) to the OTN optical module.
In the demultiplexing direction: The OTN processing unit receives
the aggregate signal from the OTN optical module. Through
completing the FEC decoding, counting the corrected bit error,
extracting the TTI and counting the BIP-8, it converts the aggregate
signal to the STM-16 electrical signal and then forwards it to the GE
convergence unit.
OTN optical module
GEMF board provides an OTN optical module:
In the multiplexing direction: It receives the G.709 STM-16 electrical
signal, converts it to the STM-16 optical signal complying with both
G.692 and G.709 through E/O conversion.
In the demultiplexing direction: It converts the STM-16 optical signal
complying with G.692 and G.709 to the electrical signal and forwards
it to the OTN processing unit.
supervision function for board and EMS.

The front panel of the GEMF board is shown in Figure 52.
Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 52 FRONT PANEL OF GEMF BOARD

operations of the GEMF board.
TABLE 50 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF GEMF BOARD AND RELATED OPERATI ON
I NFORMATI ON
Board
I tem
GEMF
Board ID GEMF
Operating frequency
label
Indicates board operating frequency which is pasted under
board ID
Indicator
Optical
Ethernet
interface
indicator
Two green indicators for two tributary optical Ethernet interface
respectively, as shown in Figure 52.
Optical
interface
IN
Aggregate input interface, connected with a flange, LC/PC
connector
2. Aggregate interface optical interface
3. Tributary interface
4. Tributary interface indicators
6. Laser class sign


Board
I tem
GEMF
OUT
Aggregate output interface, connected with a flange, LC/PC
connector
DROP1
Optical output Ethernet interface of tributary 1, LC/PC
connector
ADD1 Optical input Ethernet interface of tributary 1, LC/PC connector
DROP2
Optical output Ethernet interface of tributary 2, LC/PC
connector
ADD2 Optical input Ethernet interface of tributary 2, LC/PC connector
Number of occupied
slot
1
Laser warning sign
eyes.
Laser class sign
Indicates that the laser class of OTU10G board is CLASS
1
Slots for GEMF board
The OTUFG board should be used as the regenerating
board for the GEMF board.
The rate of abutting interfaces should be same. Otherwise,
the traffic will be obstructed.

Table 51 lists the relationship between the board status and corresponding
status of indicators.
TABLE 51 CORRESPONDENCE RELATI ONS BETWEEN THE WORKI NG STATUS AND I NDI CATOR
STATUS OF GEMF BOARD
Indicators
Working Status
Ethernet
Optical
Interface
Indicator
(Green)
The Bootrom program
is downloaded.
Off Off -
The FPGA program is
downloaded.
The red indicator and the green indicator flash
slowly for 30 seconds.
-
for configuration.
alternately.
-
Chapter 3 Boards

Indicators
Working Status
Ethernet
Optical
Interface
Indicator
(Green)
normally, and no
alarm occurs.
Flashing slowly and
regularly
Off -
normally, and some
alarm occurs.
Flashing slowly and
regularly
On -
Board initialing On
Flashing slowly and
regularly
-
for download
quickly at the same time.
-
Downloading status
slowly at the same time.
-
The tributary
interface has no LOS
alarm.
- - On
Bootrom program Off Off -
The tributary
interface has LOS
alarm.
- - Off

The performance messages of the GEMF board to be detected and monitored
are listed in Table 52.
TABLE 52 PERFORMANCE MESSAGES OF GEMF BOARD
Laser temperature -
Aggregate
transmitter
TEC current -
15-min B1 error -
15-min B2 error -
15-min ES -
15-min SES -
15-min UAS -
Aggregate receiver
15-min BER -


Bit error corrected by FEC -
BER before FEC -
Frame unable to be corrected by FEC -
0 bit error corrected by FEC -
1 bit error corrected by FEC -
BER after FEC -
15-min OTUk BIP8 error -
Total received packets -
Total received bytes -
15-min received packet error ratio -
15-min received packet error -
Tributary GE
receiver
Input optical power
detect this item.
Total sent packets -
Total sent bytes -
detect this parameter.
Laser bias current
Tributary GE
transmitter

Table 53 lists the main alarms of GEMF board.
TABLE 53 ALARM MESSAGES OF GEMF BOARD
Module temperature out of limit alarm of
inner module
-
Aggregate
transmitter
High cooler current alarm -
High input power - Aggregate receiver
Low input power -
Chapter 3 Boards

No input power -
LOF alarm -
Unavailable Signal (UAS) alarm -
SD alarm -
LOS alarm -
J0 Track Identifier Mismatch (TIM) alarm -
OTUk J0 TIM alarm -
15-min BIP8 error out of limit alarm -
OTUk LOF alarm -
OTUk Loss of Multi-frame (LOM) alarm -
15-min before-FEC BE out of limit
threshold alarm
-
15-min uncorrectable frame
-
24-hour before-FEC BE out of limit alarm -
24-hour uncorrectable frame
-
24-hour B1 error out of limit alarm -
LOS alarm -
Received error packet ratio
-
Link fail alarm -
detect these items.
Tributary GE
transmitter
detect these items.


Module temperature out of limit alarm of
inner module

GEM8 Board
Functions
GEM8 (Eight Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board) board implements the
multiplexing/demultiplexing between eight optical GE signals and an OTU2
signal through O/E/O conversion.
Tributary side
Eight optical GE signals, complying with IEEE802.3, are accessed at the
tributary side of the GEM8 board.
Supports related performance detection of GFP.
Aggregate side
Outputs optical signal, complying with ITU-T G.694.1, with the OTU2
signal structure specified in ITU-T G.709.
Support the OTU2 interface and related performance detection specifed
in ITU-T G.709. FEC can be configured as standard FEC or AFEC.
Support the encapsulation of GFP-T data packets, complying with ITU-T
G.704.1.
Support both fixed lasers and tunable lasers. The tuning function of
tunable lasers covers the wavelengths in the whole C band.

Operating Principle
Figure 53 illustrates the operating principle of GEM8 board.
Chapter 3 Boards

FIGURE 53 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF GEM8 BOARD
GE
Optical
Module
Convergence
Unit
G.694.1/
G.709
OTN
Processing
Unit
GE
Optical
Module
8 GE
optical
signals
10G
optical
module
.
.
.
.
.
.

In the multiplexing direction (GE OTU2), eight optical GE signals are
accessed through eight GE optical modules respectively. Then they are
processed by the convergence unit and the OTN processing unit. Finally,
they are converted into an aggregate signal (OTU2 signal) meeting the
specifications in ITU-T G.694.1 and G.709.
In the demultiplexing direction (OTU2 GE), an aggregate signal complying
with ITU-T G.694.1 and G.709 is accessed to the 10 G optical module. After
being processed by the OTN processing unit and the convergence unit, the
signal is demultiplexed into eight electrical GE signals. Finally, eight GE
optical modules convert these electrical signals into optical signals and
output them.
GEM8 board consists of eight GE optical modules, a convergence unit, an
OTN processing unit, a 10 G optical module and the control and
communication unit.
GE Optical Module
GEM8 board has eight GE optical modules. Each of them uses SFP optical
module to input or output optical GE signal in compliance with
IEEE802.3.
Convergence Unit
It checks the perfomance of client service signals, performs the GFP-T
mapping/demapping, and implements the convergence and divergence
of GFP-T frames.
OTN Processing Unit
The OTN processing unit realizes the framing/deframing of OTU2 signal,
which complies with ITU-T G.709. In addition, it supports the detection of
FEC-related performances.
10 G Optical Module


This module receives electrical 10G OTN signal from the OTN processing
unit, converts it into OTU2 optical signal and outputs it. On the opposite
direction, it receives OTU2 optical signal from the line, converts it into an
electrical 10G OTN signal and then sends it to the OTN processing unitl.
This unit monitors the power supply of the board and the running status
of the board, and performs the supervision function of the EMS.

The front panel of GEM8 board is shown in Figure 54.
FIGURE 54 FRONT PANEL OF GEM8 BOARD

3. Tributary optical Ethernet interface
4. Indicator of tributary optical Ethernet interface
6. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

operations of GEM8 board.
TABLE 54 DESCRIPTION OF GEM8 S FRONT PANEL AND RELATED OPERATION
INFORMATION
Board
Item
GEM8
Board ID GEM8
Indicator
Optical
Ethernet
interface
indicator
Eight green indicators are available on the lower
part of the front panel, as shown in Figure 54. Each
of them corresponds to a tributary optical Ethernet
interface.
IN Line input optical interface, LC/PC connector
OUT Line output optical interface, LC/PC connector
ADDn
Tributary input optical Ethernet interface n,
n=1-8, LC/PC connector
Optical
interface
DROPn
Tributary output optical Ethernet interface n,
Laser warning sign
burning eyes.
Laser class sign
Indicates that the laser class of GEM8 board is
CLASS 1
Number of occupied slot 2
Slots for GEM8 board
Always keep optical connectors clean. Put on the dust caps
for unused optical connectors in time.

indicator status of GEM8 board.


OF GEM8 BOARD
Indicator Status
Working Status
Ethernet
Optical
Interface
Indicator
(Green)
Downloading
BootROM program
OFF OFF -
Downloading FPGA
program
Flashing quickly ON -
Waiting for
configuration
-
Running normally
Flashing slowly
and regularly
OFF -
Alarming
Flashing slowly
and regularly
ON -
Initializing
The green indicator and red indicator
flash quickly three times.
-
flash quickly at the same time.
-
Downloading status
flash slowly at the same time.
-
Tributary interface
has no LOS alarm
- - ON
Tributary interface
has LOS alarm
- - OFF

The performance messages of GEM8 board are listed in Table 56.
TABLE 56 PERFORMANCE MESSAGES OF GEM8 BOARD
Module temperature offset -
Aggregate
transmitter
MZ modulator bias voltage
Only detected when M-Z
modulated laser is used.
FEC uncorrectable frame -
Aggregate receiver
FEC corrected bit error -
Chapter 3 Boards

FEC corrected 0 bit error -
FEC corrected 1 bit error -
After-FEC BER -
Before-FEC BER -
15-min OTU2 SM_BIP8 error -
15-min ODU2 PM_BIP8 error -
15-min OTU2 SM ES -
15-min OTU2 SM SES -
15-min OTU2 SM UAS -
15-min ODU2 PM ES -
15-min ODU2 PM SES -
15-min ODU2 PM UAS -
15-min OTU2 SM BEI error -
15-min ODU2 PM BEI error -
15-min TCMi BIP8 error
15-min TCMi BEI
15-min TCMi UAS
15-min TCMi ES
15-min TCMi SES
i=1-6. Configured as FEC
decoding. And TCM is
configured as running
mode or monitoring
mode.
Total received package -
Total received bytes -
Input optical power
detect this item.
Sent GFP client data frame -
Tributary GE
receiver
Sent GFP client management
frame
-
Total sent packets -
Total sent bytes -
Laser bias current
detect these items.
Transmitted GFP client data
frame
-
Tributary GE
transmitter
Transmitted GFP client
management frame
-



The alarm messages of GEM8 board are listed in Table 57.
TABLE 57 ALARM MESSAGES OF GEM8 BOARD
limit alarm
-
MZ modulator bias voltage out
of limit alarm
modulated laser is used.
Aggregate
transmitter
TCMi layer TIM
TCMi layer BDI
TCMi layer BIAE
TCMi layer IAE
TCMi AIS alarm
TCMi LCK alarm
TCMi LTC alarm
TCMi OCI alarm
i=1-6
15-min OTU2 BIP8 error out of
limit alarm
-
15-min before-FEC bit error out
of limit alarm
-
15-min after-FEC bit error out
of limit alarm
-
15-min ODU2 PM_BIP8 error
out of limit alarm
-
15-min SM ES out of limit alarm -
24-hour SM ES out of limit
alarm
-
Aggregate receiver

Chapter 3 Boards

24-hour OTU2 SM_BIP8 error
out of limit alarm
-
24-hour ODU2 PM_BIP8 error
out of limit alarm
-
24-hour before-FEC bit error
out of limit alarm
-
24-hour after-FEC bit error out
of limit alarm
-
15-min TCMi BIP8 error out of
limit alarm
i=1-6
24-hour TCMi BIP8 error out of
limit alarm
i=1-6
LOS alarm -
OTU2 AIS alarm -
OTU2 LOF alarm -
OTU2 loss of multiframe alarm -
OTU2 TIM alarm -
ODU2 PM field TIM alarm -
OTU2 SM field BDI (Backward
Defect Indication)
-
OTU2 SM field BEI (Backward
Error Indication)
-
OTU2 SM field BIAE (Backward
Incoming Alignment Error)
-
OTU2 SM field IAE (Incoming
Alignment Error)
-
ODU2 PM field BDI (Backward
Defect Indication)
-
ODU2 AIS alarm -
ODU2 LCK alarm -
ODU2 OCI alarm -
OPU signal PT mismatch -
LOS alarm -
Loss of synchronization alarm -
Received CRC error packet out
of limit alarm
-
15-min 8B/10B CV out of limit
alarm
-
15-min 8B/10B CV ES out of
limit alarm
-
Tributary GE
receiver
15-min 8B/10B CV SES out of
limit alarm
-


15-min 8B/10B CV UAS out of
limit alarm
-
24-hour 8B/10B CV out of limit
alarm
-
24-hour 8B/10B CV ES out of
limit alarm
-
24-hour 8B/10B CV SES out of
limit alarm
-
24-hour 8B/10B CV UAS out of
limit alarm
-
24-hour received package out
of limit alarm
-
High laser current alarm
Module temperature out of limit
alarm of inner module
detect these items.
Laser end of life alarm -
GFP client signal failure alarm -
GFP loss of synchronization
alarm
-
alarm
-
15-min 8B/10B CV ES out of
limit alarm
-
15-min 8B/10B CV SES out of
limit alarm
-
15-min 8B/10B CV UAS out of
limit alarm
-
alarm
-
24-hour 8B/10B CV ES out of
limit alarm
-
24-hour 8B/10B CV SES out of
limit alarm
-
Tributary GE
transmitter
24-hour 8B/10B CV UAS out of
limit alarm
-
Chapter 3 Boards

The event messages of GEM8 board are listed in Table 58.
TABLE 58 EVENT MESSAGES OF GEM8 BOARD
SFP module unplugged
Tributary
transmitter
SFP module plugged
detect this item.
Aggregate
transmitter
Clock switching successfully -
Clock switching failed -
MCU reset -
Board
EEPROM data error -

DSA Board
Functions
DSA (Data Service Aggregation) board implements the multiplexing/
demultiplexing between eight data service signals, such as GE, FC, ESCON,
FICON and DVB signals, and STM-16 signals through O/E/O conversion.
Tributary side
DSA board supports the access of eight data service signals at its
tributary side. Each tributary interface allows the access of any kind of
data service signal, GE, FC, ESCON, FICON or DVB.
Aggregate side
Two bidirectional optical interfaces with the rate of 2.5 Gbit/s are
available at the aggregate side of DSA board. They comply with the
specification of ITU-T G.692.
DSA board also provides the function of checking of checking B1, B2 and
J0 bytes for SDH signals.



Operating Principle
Figure 55 illustrates the operating principle of DSA board.
FIGURE 55 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF DSA BOARD
Tributary
Optical
Module
M
a
p
p
i
n
g

U
n
i
t
G.692
S
D
H

O
v
e
r
h
e
a
d
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

U
n
i
t
Tributary
Optical
Module
Data
service
signals
C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
U
n
i
t
Aggregate
Optical
Module
Multiservice Convergence Unit
Dual optical
interfaces
(2.5 Gbits/s)
STM-16 .
.
.
.
.
.

In the multiplexing direction (data service signals STM-16), eight data
service signals who can be of the same kind of data service or different kinds
(GE, FC, ESCON, FICON or DVB), are accessed via eigth tributary optical
modules. Then the DSA board mapps these data service signals into SDH
frames, performs the flow control function, detects the performance of
signals and finally outputs the aggregate signals throught the aggregate
optical module.
In the demultiplexing direction (STM-16 data service signals), the DSA
board receives two aggregate optical signals. It detects the performance of
the signals, demultiplexes them into client data (i.e. data service signals),
and then output these data service signals to user equipment through
corresponding tributary optical modules after E/O conversion.
DSA board consists of eight tributary optical modules, a multiservice
convergence unit, an aggregate optical module, and the control and
communication unit, as introduced below.
Tributary Optical Module
DSA board has eight tributary optical modules. SFP module is used in
each tributary optical module.
In the multiplexing direcetion
Each tributary optical module receives an optical data service signal
(GE, FC, ESCON, FICON or DVB), converts it into an electrical signal
and forwards the electrical signal to the multiservice convergence
unit.
Chapter 3 Boards

Each tributary optical module converts the electrical data signal
received from the multiservice convergence unit into an optical signal
and outputs it.
Multiservice Convergence Unit
It implements the multiplexing/demultiplexing between eight electrical
data signals and two STM-16 signals.
The multiservice convergence unit consists of a convergence unit, a
mapping unit and an SDH overhead processing unit.
The convergence unit combines the eight electrical data signals
received from eight tributary optical modules. Then the combined
signals are framed into GFP (Generic Framing Procedure) and then
mapped into VC by the mapping unit.
The SDH overhead processing unit maps the data frames received
from the mapping unit into STM-16 frames, processes related
overheads and checks B1, B2 and J0 bytes. After that, it sends the
electrical STM-16 signals to the aggregate optical molude.

Note:
GFP (Generic Framing Procedure) frames are classified into two types: GFP-T
(Transparent GFP) and GFP-F (Framed GFP).
GFP-T: GFP-T frames have fixed length. It is unnecessary to start processing a frame
until the full frame is received. Therefore, GFP-T frames can be processed timely.
GFP-F: GFP-F frames have variable length. Only when the full frame is received, will
the frame be processed.
GE data service signals can be mapped into either GFP-T frames or
GFP-T frames. However, the other data service signals, such as FC,
ESCON, FICON and DVB, can only be mapped into GFP-T frames,
since they have higher requirements for real-time processing.
After receiving electrical STM-16 signals from the aggregate optical
module, the SDH overhead processing unit processes the overheads,
checks B1, B2 and J0 bytes in the signals and then forwards the
signals to the mapping unit.
The mapping unit demaps the STM-16 frames into data frames and
then forwards these data frames to the convergence unit. The
convergence unit demultiplexes the data frames into eight electrical
data signals and outputs them to corresponding tributary optical
modules.
Aggregate Optical Module
DSA board has only one aggregate optical moudule, which allows the
access of optical STM-16 signals (ITU-T G.692).



The aggregate optical module receives the electrical STM-16 signals
from the multiservice convergence unit, converts them into optical
signals and finally output corresponding optical STM-16 signals in
compliance with ITU-T G.692.
The aggregate optical module receives optical STM-16 signals (ITU-T
G.692) from the optical line, converts them into electrical signals and
then forwards them to the multiservice convergence unit.

The front panel of DSA board is shown in Figure 56.
FIGURE 56 FRONT PANEL OF DSA BOARD

operations of DSA board.
3. Data service tributary optical interface
4. Indicator of tributary optical interface
6. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

TABLE 59 DESCRIPTIONS OF DSA BOARD S FRONT PANEL AND RELATED
Board
Item
DSA
Board ID DSA
Indicator
Indicator of
data service
tributary
optical
interface
The green indicators correspond to the data service
tributary optical interfaces, as shown in Figure 56.
INn
Line input optical interface, n=1, 2,
LC/PC connector
OUTn
Line output optical interface, n=1, 2,
LC/PC connector
DROPn
Data service tributary optical output interface, n=1
to 8, LC/PC connector
Optical
interface
ADDn
Data service tributary optical input interface,
n=1 to 8, LC/PC connector
Laser warning sign
burning eyes.
Laser class sign
Indicates that the laser class of DSA board is CLASS
1
Slots for DSA board
Always keep optical connectors clean. Put on
the dust caps for unused optical connectors in
time.
OTUG board should be used as the regeneration
board for DSA board.



indicator status of DSA board.
OF DSA BOARD
Indicator Status
Working Status
Indicator
of
Tributary
Optical
Interface
(Green)
Waiting for
configuration
-
Running normally
Flashing slowly and
regularly
OFF -
Alarming
Flashing slowly and
regularly
ON -
Initializing ON
Flashing slowly and
regularly
-
Waiting for
download
flash quickly at the same time
-
Downloading status
flash slowly at the same time
-
Tributary interface
has no LOS alarm
Flashing slowly and
regularly
- ON
Tributary interface
has LOS alarm
- - OFF

Configuration of DSA Board
DSA board can work in either TM (Terminal Multiplexer) mode or OAD
(Optical Add/Drop) mode.
TM working mode
In this working mode, DSA board works as a terminal multiplexer.
As shown in Figure 57, bidirectional service signals are transmitted
between Node A and Node B. The line optical interface 1 (STM-16_1) of
node A is connected to the line optical interface 2 (STM-16_2) of node B
with an optical cable.
Chapter 3 Boards

FIGURE 57 TM WORKING MODE OF DSA BOARD
1 8
1 8
Node A Node B
STM-16_1 STM-16_2 STM-16_2 STM-16_1

The transmission procedure of data service from Node A to Node B is as
follows:
The data service signal is input through the tributary optical interface
1 of Node A and then mapped into an STM-16 signal.
The STM-16 signal is output from the line optical interface 1
(STM-16_1) of Node A and then transmitted over the optical cable.
After reaching the line optical interface 2 (STM-16_2) of Node B, the
data service signal is demapped from the STM-16 signal and output
through the tributary optical interface 1 of Node B.
The transmission of data service from Node B to Node A is similar to the
procedure described above.
OAD working mode
In this working mode, DSA board works as an optical add/drop
multiplexer.
As shown in Figure 58, bidirectional services are transmitted between
Node A and Node C. Both Node A and Node C work in the TM mode while
Node B works in the OAD mode.
FIGURE 58 OAD WORKING MODE OF DSA BOARD
1 8
1 8
STM-16_1 STM-16_2
1 8
STM-16_1 STM-16_1 STM-16_2 STM-16_2

Node A
(TM)
Node C
(TM)
Node B
(OAD)

The transmission procedure of data service from Node A to Node C is as
follows:
1 of Node A and then mapped into an STM-16 signal.


The STM-16 signal is output from the line optical interface 1 of Node
A and then transmitted to the line optical interface 2 of Node B over
an optical cable.
At Node B, the STM-16 signal is demapped to the tributary optical
interface 1. Instead of being dropped at Node B, the demapped data
service signal is mapped to the line optical interface 1 again through
VC configuration and transmitted to the line optical interface 2 of
Node C.
Finally, the data service signal is demapped from STM-16 signal and
output from the tributary optical interface 1 of Node C.
The transmission of data service from Node C to Node A is similar to the
procedure described above.
1 of Node C and then mapped into an STM-16 signal.
The STM-16 signal is output from the line optical interface 1 of Node
A and then transmitted to the line optical interface 2 of Node B over
an optical cable.
At Node B, the STM-16 signal is demapped to the tributary optical
interface 1. Instead of being dropped at Node B, the demapped data
service signal is mapped to the line optical interface 1 again through
VC configuration and transmitted to the line optical interface 2 of
Node A.
Finally, the data service signal is demapped from STM-16 signal and
output from the tributary optical interface 1 of Node A.
Configuration Notes:
During the configuration of DSA board, the following items should be paid
attention to:
The total bandwidth of tributaries that are mapped to the same
aggregate should be less than 2.5 Gbit/s.
DSA board can use up to 32 VC4s or 96 VC3s.
DSA board can multiplexes eight tributary signals into two STM-16
signals. The first STM-16 siganl contains VC4_1 to VC4_16 or VC3_1_1
to VC3_16_3, while the second one contains VC4_17 to VC4_32 or
VC3_17_1 to VC3_32_3. Be cautious not to allocate the same data
service to different STM-16 signals.
For the same kind of data services, either VC4 virtual concatenation or
VC3 virtual concatenation mode can be used, that is, the same kind of
data services can only use the same virtual concatenation mode.
However, different kinds of data services can use different virtual
concatenation modes at the same time.
If a DSA board acts as a TM node, one or two line optical interfaces of it
can be used. But if it acts as an OAD node, both line optical interfaces
must be used and in this case, a pass-through service signal needs to use
two tributary optical interfaces.
Chapter 3 Boards

The configuration of DSA board should not be limited to wavelengths. It
is recommended to analyze the configuration based on data services to
be accessed as a whole.
The characteristic of data services is that they do not provide
unidirectional services. Therefore, the transmit/receive interfaces at the
client side of DSA board must be configured with the receive/transmit
interfaces of user equipment in pairs.

The performance messages of DSA board are listed in Table 61.
TABLE 61 PERFORMANCE MESSAGES OF DSA BOARD
Laser temperature -
TEC current -
Aggregate
transmitter
Only detected when
M-Z laser is used
15-min ES -
15-min SES -
15-min UAS -
Aggregate receiver
15-min BER -
Total received packet count
Total received byte count
Only detected for GE
and GFP-F
15-min 8B/10B CV -
Total sent GFP control frame -
Total sent GFP client data frame -
Total sent GFP client management
frame
-
Total sent GFP idle frame -
15-min 8B/10B UAS -
Tributary receiver
15-min received PAUSE frame Only detected for GE


Input optical power
It depends on the
board configuration
whether to detect
these items.
B1 bit error ratio -
B2 bit error ratio -
Laser bias current
It depends on the
board configuration
whether to detect
these items.
Total sent packets
Total sent bytes
and GFP-F
15-min sent PAUSE frame count
signals
15-min 8B/10B CV
Detected for all the
signals
15-min 8B/10B UAS -
Total received GFP frame -
Total received GFP control frame -
Total received GFP client data frame -
Total received GFP client
management frame
-
Total received GFP idle frame -
Abandoned GFP frame -
Core frame header detects GFP
frame with multiple byte error
-
Core frame header detects single
byte error
-
tHEC detects GFP frame with
multiple byte error
-
tHEC detects single byte error -
eHEC detects GFP frame with
multiple byte error
-
eHEC detects single byte error -
pHEC detects GFP frame with
multiple byte error
-
GFP frame of mismatch user
payload identifier
-
Tributary
transmitter
GFP frame of mismatch user
extensive frame header
-

Chapter 3 Boards

The alarm messages of DSA board are listed in Table 62.
TABLE 62 ALARM MESSAGES OF DSA BOARD
High TEC current alarm -
limit alarm
-
-
Aggregate
transmitter
MZ modulator bias voltage out of
limit alarm
Only detected when
M-Z modulated laser
is used
LOF alarm -
UAS alarm -
SD alarm -
LOS alarm -
J0 Track Identifier Mismatch (TIM)
alarm
-
Aggregate receiver
LOS alarm -
Loss of clock alarm -



15-min received error packet out of
limit alarm
-
alarm
-
24-hour received error packet out
of limit alarm
-
alarm
-
Tributary receiver
High laser current alarm
It depends on the
board configuration
whether to detect
these items.
alarm
-
alarm
-
Loss of GFP synchronization alarm -
Tributary
transmitter
Failure of GFP client signal alarm -
Received aggregate
clock 1
Clock unavailable alarm -
Received aggregate
clock 2
Received clock
from clock board in
slot 8 of TMUX
subrack
Received clock
from clock board in
slot 7 of TMUX
subrack
Sent clock Clock unavailable alarm -

Chapter 3 Boards

The event messages of DSA board are listed in Table 63.
TABLE 63 EVENT MESSAGES OF DSA BOARD
Tributary laser shutdown
automatically
-
Tributary laser startup
automatically
-
Tributary laser APS shutdown
forcibly
-
Tributary laser APS startup forcibly -
Tributary
transmitter
SFP module plugged
It depends on the
board configuration
whether to detect
these items.
Aggregate laser shutdown
automatically
-
Aggregate laser startup
automatically
-
Aggregate laser APS shutdown
forcibly
-
Aggregate
transmitter
Aggregate laser APS startup
forcibly
-
Clock switching succeeded -
Clock circuit port

DSAF Board
Functions
DSAF (Data Service Aggregation with FEC) board applies the
Optical/Electrical/Optical (O/E/O) conversion mode to implement the
multiplexing/demultiplexing between two or four channels of data service
signals, such as GE, FC, ESCON, FICON and DVB-AIS, and one channel of
OTU1 signal with FEC function. DSAF board acts as a board for accessing
multi-services. Its aggregate optical interface is connected to an optical
multiplexing/demultplexing board directly.
Tributary side
Provides two or four SFP optical interfaces; each of them supports
the access of various client signals, such as GE, FE, ESCON, FICON
and DVB-AIS etc.


Provides the capability of transmitting long GE frames with length up
to 9600 bytes (not including four-byte CRC)
Provides Generic Framing Procedures (GFP) function, supports both
GFP-T and GFP-F mapping modes, and supports the detection of
corresponding alarm/performance
Supports the enabling control of tributary ports
SFP module used in each tributary optical interface supports Digital
Diagnosis (DD) function.
Aggregate side
Implements the convergence of two/four tributary service signals,
outputs OTU1 signal with the format meeting the specification in
ITU-T G.709 and supports the detection of corresponding
alarm/performance
Supports FEC function; the frame format after FEC encoding meet
the specification in ITU-T G.709
GE ports support the auto-negotiation function
Supports Automatic Power ShutDown (APSD) function
Supports VC-4 virtual concatenation
Supports the application of fixed lasers and tunable lasers
Tunable lasers applied in DSAF board supports the tuning of 40/80
channels of wavelengths in the whole C band. The channel spacing is
100 GHz when 40 channels of wavelengths are tuned; while the
spacing is 50 GHz when 80 channels are tuned.
DSAF board can be applied in a centralized wavelength supervision
subsystem with the channel spacing at 50 GHz.
For detailed information about the centralized wavelength
supervision subsystem, please refer to Appendix C in this manual.
Clock function
The aggregate side of DSAF board can provide reference clock
Provides external clock
Provides tributary reference clock
Supports the transparent transmission at physical layer for client
equipment
Supports tributary near/far-end loopback, backplane near/far-end
loopback, aggregate near/far-end loopback for convenient fault location
According to the quantity of tributary ports and the type of allowable access
services, DSAF board is divided into four types, as introduced in Table 64.

Chapter 3 Boards

TABLE 64 TYPES OF DSAF BOARD
Board Type
Tributary
Quantity
Access
Service
Type
Encapsulation
Mode
Tributary Clock
DSAF2 (GE) 2 GE GFP-T/F
One tributary
reference clock
DSAF2
(multi-service)
2
GE, ESCON,
DVB-AIS
GFP-T/F
The number of
tributary
reference clock is
the same as the
number of
accessed service
type.
DSAF4 (GE) 4 GE GFP-T/F
One tributary
reference clock
DSAF4
(multi-service)
4
GE, ESCON,
DVB-AIS
GFP-T
The number of
tributary
reference clock is
the same as the
number of
accessed service
type.

Operating Principle
Figure 59 illustrates the operating principle of DSAF board.
FI GURE 59 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF DSAF BOARD
Tributary
Optical
Module 1
Tributary
Optical
Module 4
G
F
P
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

U
n
i
t
C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
/
D
i
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e

U
n
i
t
F
r
a
m
i
n
g
/
L
C
A
S
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

U
n
i
t
OTN
Optical
Module
Convergence & Framing Unit
Data
service
signals
Tributary Side
Aggregate Side
Control and
Communication Unit
Clock Processing
Unit
Local clock
Clock from CSU in slot 7
O
T
N
/
F
E
C
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

U
n
i
t
G.692/
G.709/
G.705

In the multiplexing direction (data service signals OTU1 signal): Two or
four client data service signals (such as GE, FC, ESCON, FICON and DVB etc.)
are accessed by two or four tributary optical modules. The convergence &


framing unit multiplexes these signals into an OTU1 signal with FEC, which is
output by the OTN optical module after E/O conversion.
In the demultiplexing direction (OTU1 signal data service signals): The
OTN optical module receives an OTU1 signal, converts it into an electrical
signal and then sends it to the convergence & framing unit. The convergence
& framing unit demultplexes the signal into two or four data service signals
and sends them to corresponding tributary optical modules. Each tributary
optical module converts the received electrical data service signal into an
optical signal and outputs it.
DSAF board consists of 2/4 tributary optical modules, a convergence &
framing unit, an OTN optical module, a clock processing unit and control and
communication unit, as described below.
DSAF board provides two or four tributary optical modules. Each of them
uses SFP module.
Each tributary optical module receives a data service signal (GE, FC,
ESCON, FICON or DVB-ASI etc.), converts it into an electrical signal
and then forwards it to the convergence & framing unit.
Each tributary optical module converts the electrical signal received
from the convergence & framing unit into an optical client signal (GE,
FC, ESCON, FICON or DVB-ASI etc.) and then outputs it.
The convergence & framing unit consists of a GFP processing unit, a
convergence/divergence unit, a framing/LCAS processing unit and an
OTN/FEC processing unit. It completes the multiplexing/demultiplexing
between 2/4 channels of data service signals and 1/2 channels of 2.5
Gbit/s signals.
The convergence & framing unit implements the procedures of GFP
mapping, SDH virtual concatenation mapping, OTN mapping and FEC
processing for 2/4 channels of electrical data service signals (such as
GE, FC, ESCON, FICON and DVB-ASI etc.) and then outputs the
multiplexed signal to the OTN optical module.
Note: DSAF board supports the virtual concatenation (VC) modes
VC4-xV and STS-3c-xV.

Note:

Chapter 3 Boards


The convergence & framing unit receives the 2.5 Gbit/s electrical
signal from the OTN optical module and then implements the
procedures of FEC processing, OTN demapping, SDH virtual
concatenation demapping and GFP demapping. After the series of
procedures, the 2.5 Gbit/s signal is demultiplexed into multiple client
data signals. Finally, these client signals are sent to corresponding
tributary optical modules after 8B/10B encoding.
OTN Optical Module
The OTN optical module converts the 2.5 Gbit/s signal received from
the convergence & framing unit into OTU1 optical signal and outputs
it.
The OTN optical module receives OTU1 optical signal, converts it into
2.5 Gbit/s electrical signal, and then sends it to the convergence &
framing unit.
Clock Processing Unit
The clock processing unit can perform the following functions.
Selects an optimal clock as the board clock from the local clock, line
received clock, the clock coming from CSU board in slot 7 and the
clock coming from CSU board in slot 8 of the TMUX subrack
Provides the line received clock as external clock
Provides tributary reference clock


Figure 60 shows the front panel of DSAF board.
FI GURE 60 FRONT PANEL OF DSAF BOARD

operations of DSAF board.

6. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

TABLE 65 DESCRI PTI ON OF DSAF BOARD S FRONT PANEL AND RELATED OPERATI ON
I NFORMATI ON
Board
Item
DSAF
Board ID DSAF2 DSAF4
Indicator
Indicator of
tributary
optical
interface
Located beside tributary optical interface, each green
indicator is used to indicate the working status of
corresponding data service tributary optical interface,
as shown in Figure 60
IN Aggregate input optical interface Aggregate
optical
interface
OUT Aggregate output optical interface
Data service tributary input optical interface
LC/PC connector
ADDn
n=1, 2 n=1-4
Data service tributary output optical interface
LC/PC connector
Tributary
optical
interface
DROPn
n=1, 2 n=1-4
Laser warning sign
burning eyes.
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of DSAF board is CLASS 1
Number of occupied
slot
1
Slots for DSAF board
Always keep optical connectors clean. Put on the
dust caps for unused optical connectors in time.

indicator status of DSAF board.



TABLE 66 RELATI ONS BETWEEN WORKI NG STATUS AND I NDI CATOR STATUS OF DSAF
BOARD
Indicator Status
Working Status
Indicator of
Tributary
Optical
Interface
(Green)
Waiting for
configuration
The green indicator and the red
indicator flash alternately.
-
Running normally
Flashing slowly and
regularly
OFF -
Alarming
Flashing slowly and
regularly
ON -
Initializing ON
Flashing slowly
and regularly
-
indicator flash quickly at the same time
-
Downloading status
indicator flash slowly at the same time
-
Tributary interface has
no LOS alarm
Flashing slowly and
regularly
- ON
LOS alarm
- - OFF

The performance messages of DSAF board are listed in Table 67.
TABLE 67 PERFORMANCE MESSAGES OF DSAF BOARD
Detection
Point
Item Remark
Related to performance
benchmark
Laser TEC current
Aggregate
transmitter
Only detected when
laser TEC is used
Input optical power
configuration whether
to detect this item.
15-min B1 bit error count -
Aggregate
receiver
15-min B2 bit error count -
Chapter 3 Boards

Detection
Point
Item Remark
15-min B1 BER -
15-min B2 BER -
15-min ES -
15-min SES -
15-min UAS -
FEC uncorrected frame count -
FEC corrected bit error count -
FEC corrected 0 bit error count -
FEC corrected 1 bit error count -
After-FEC BER -
Before-FEC BER -
15-min OTU1 SM_BIP8 bit error count -
15-min ODU1 PM_BIP8 bit error count -
15-min SM_BIP8 ES -
15-min SM_BIP8 SES -
15-min SM_BIP8 UAS -
Input optical power
Only detected when SFP
module is used
(GFP-F) signals
15-min received packet error count
15-min received packet error ratio count
Tributary
receiver
15-min 8B/10B CV count
Not detected for GE
(GFP-T) signals
Total transmitted packet count
Total transmitted byte count
(GFP-F) signals
Not detected fro GE
(GFP-T) signals yet
Laser bias current
to detect these items.
15-min 8B/10B CV count
Only detected for GFP-T
signals
15-min transmitted PAUSE frame count -
Tributary
transmitter
Received GFP client management frame
count
Frames with PTI=4
The alarm messages of DSAF board are listed in Table 68.


TABLE 68 ALARM MESSAGES OF DSAF BOARD
Detection
Point
Item Remark
Laser temperature offset over-threshold
alarm
-
modulated laser is used
Output power over upper threshold
alarm
-
Output power below lower threshold
alarm

Aggregate
transmitter
Input power over upper threshold alarm -
Input power below lower threshold
alarm
-
LOF alarm -
Received signal MS-AIS -
UAS alarm -
SD alarm
15-min OTU1 SM BIP8 bit error
-
15-min before-correction bit error count
-
15-min after-correction bit error count
-
15-min ODU1 PM_BIP8 bit error
-
15-min OTU1 SM ES over-threshold
alarm
-
15-min OTU1 SM SES over-threshold
alarm
-
15-min OTU1 SM UAS over-threshold
alarm
-
Aggregate
receiver
24-hour OTU1 SM ES over-threshold
alarm
-
Chapter 3 Boards

Detection
Point
Item Remark
24-hour OTU1 SM SES over-threshold
alarm
-
24-hour OTU1 SM UAS over-threshold
alarm
-
24-hour OTU1 SM BIP8 bit error
-
24-hour ODU1 PM BIP8 bit error
-
24-hour before-correction bit error
-
24-hour after-correction bit error
-
15-min TCMi BIP8 bit error
i=1-6
24-hour TCMi BIP8 bit error
i=1-6
LOS alarm -
Loss of OTU1 frame alarm -
Loss of OTU1 multiframe alarm -
OTU1 TIM alarm -
ODU1 layer PM section TIM alarm -
OTU1 layer SM section BDI -
OTU1 layer SM section BEI -
OTU1 layer SM section BIAE -
OTU1 layer SM section IAE -
ODU1 layer PM section BDI -
ODU1 layer PM section BEI -
ODU1 AIS -
ODU1 LCK -
ODU1 OCI -
OPU1 PT mismatch alarm -
LOS alarm -
Connection failure alarm -
15-min received CRC error packet count
-
Tributary
receiver
15-min 8B/10B CV count over-threshold
alarm
-


Detection
Point
Item Remark
15-min 8B/10B CV second count
-
24-hour 8B/10B CV count
-
24-hour received error packet count
-
Laser current over-threshold alarm
GFP client signal failure alarm -
GFP loss of synchronization alarm -
15-min 8B/10B CV count over-threshold
alarm
-
24-hour 8B/10B CV count
-
Tributary
transmitter
Pluggable module dismount alarm -
Board
Board self-test failure alarm

The event messages of DSAF board are listed in Table 69.
TABLE 69 EVENT MESSAGES OF DSAF BOARD
Detection Point Item
Tributary laser shutdown
Tributary transmitter
Tributary laser startup
Aggregate laser shutdown Aggregate transmitter
Aggregate laser startup
Chapter 3 Boards

Detection Point Item
Laser APS shutdown forcibly
Laser APS startup forcibly
Clock switching succeeded
Clock switching failed
MCU reset
EEPROM data error
Data service configuration failure
Port
Loopback configuration failure

Configuration of DSAF Board
During the configuration of DSAF board, pay attention to the following items:
During the configuration of tributary services for DSAF board, it is
necessary to specify the GFP data encapsulation format, the quantity and
position of Virtual Container (VC) to be used.
When the tributary interfaces of DSAF board are used to add/drop
service signals, their properties should be set as Up/down Link
(add/drop) in the EMS. When the tributary interfaces are set as Direct
link (straight-through), the function performed by these interfaces is
equivalent to that of far-end loopback.
DSAF board can use up to 16 VC4s or 48 VC3s.
For the same kind of data services, either VC4 virtual concatenation or
VC3 virtual concatenation mode can be used, that is, the same kind of
data services can only use the same virtual concatenation mode.
However, different kinds of data services can use different virtual
concatenation modes at the same time.
The characteristic of data services is that they always exist in pairs.
Therefore, the transmit/receive interfaces at the client side of DSA board
must be configured with the receive/transmit interfaces of user
equipment in pairs.
There are three kinds of reference clocks available on the client side of
DSAF board. The board will select different reference clock automatically
according to the type of service accessed to a port.
Selects 125 MHz reference clock for GE service
Selects 100 MHz reference clock for ESCON service
Selects 135 MHz reference clock for DVB_ASI service



DSAE Board
Functions
DSAE (Data Service Aggregation Electrical interface) board, used as a
tributary board in a TMUX system, combines eight data service signals at its
tributary side into four 2.5 Gbit/s signals on the backplane and implements
the reverse procedure as well.
The aggregate convergence board cooperating with the DSAE board is SMU
board.
The DSAE board provides the following functions:
Tributary side
Provide eight SFP optical interfaces. Each of them supports the
access of various client signals, such as GE, FC, ESCON, FICON and
DVB-ASI etc.
The SFP module used in each tributary optical interface supports
Digital Diagnosis (DD) function.
Backplane side
Provide two channels on the backplane: channel A (corresponding to
CSU board in slot 7 of TMUX subrack) and channel B (corresponding
to CSU board in slot 8 of TMUX subrack). Each channel is able to
carry four bidirectional 2.5 Gbit/s signals.
Support the signal switching between channel A and channel B
Select the optimal signal from two channels for input and divides one
signal into two for output on the backplane.
Support the clock selection function.
Support near/far-end tributary loopback and near/far-end backplane
loopback for convenient fault localization.
Support APS check of electric layer protection:
Service signal APS check for electric layer client service 1+1
protection.
Line APS check for service board redundancy 1+1 protection.
APS check for line OCH 1+1 protection.
Service signal APS check for two-fiber bidirectional OCH shared
protection in ring network.

Chapter 3 Boards

Operating Principle
The operating principle of DSAE board is illustrated in Figure 61.
FIGURE 61 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF DSAE BOARD
Tributary
Optical
Module 1
Tributary
Optical
Module 8
G
F
P
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

U
n
i
t
C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
/
D
i
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e

U
n
i
t
F
r
a
m
i
n
g

U
n
i
t
1-2 Divider/
2-1 Selector
Unit
Data
service
signals
Tributary Side Backplane Side
Channel A
Channel B
Control and
Communication
Unit
Clock Processing
Unit
Local clock
Channel A
Channel B

In the multiplexing direction (data service signals 42.5 Gbit/s signals):
Eight client data service signals (such as GE, FC, ESCON, FICON and
DVB-ASI etc.) are accessed by eight tributary optical modules. The
convergence & framing unit multiplexes these signals into four 2.5 Gbit/s
signals, which are then divided into two groups with the same four 2.5 Gbit/s
signals in each group by the 1-2 divider. These two groups of signals are
output through channel A and channel B respectively on the backplane.
In the demultiplexing direction (42.5 Gbit/s data service signals): The
2-1 selector chooses the better one from the two groups of 2.5 Gbit/s signals
input from channel A and channel B on the backplane. Then the convergence
& framing unit divides the group into eight data service signals, which are
output by corresponding tributary optical modules finally.
DSAE board consists of eight tributary optical modules, a convergence &
framing unit, a 1-2 divider/2-1 selector unit and the control and
communication unit, as described below.
DSAE board has eight tributary optical modules. Each of them uses SFP
optical module.
Each tributary optical module receives a data service signal (GE, FC,
ESCON, FICON or DVB-ASI etc.), converts it into an electrical signal
and then forwards it to the convergence & framing unit.


Each tributary optical module converts the electrical signal received
from the convergence & framing unit into the optical client signal (GE,
FC, ESCON, FICON or DVB-ASI etc.) and then output it to
corresponding user equipment.
The convergence & framing unit consists of a GFP processing unit, a
convergence/divergence unit and a framing unit. It completes the
multiplexing/demultiplexing between eight data service signals and four
2.5 Gbit/s signals.
After 8B/10B decoding, GFP mapping, VC virtual concatenation and
framing, eight data service signals (GE, FC, ESCON, FICON or
DVB-ASI etc.) are mapped into four 2.5 Gbit/s signals, which are then
output to the 1-2 divider/2-1 selector unit.
Note: DSAE board supports the virtual concatenation (VC) modes
VC-4-Xv.

Note:
The unit receives four 2.5 Gbit/s signals from the 1-2 divider/2-1
selector unit and then divides them into eight data service signals.
After 8B/10B encoding, these data signals are sent into
corresponding tributary optical modules.
1-2 Divider/2-1 Selector Unit
The 1-2 divider/2-1 selector unit supports lossless switching between
channel A and channel B on the backplane.
In the multiplexing direction (1-to-2 division)
The 1-2 divider separates four 2.5 Gbit/s signals received from the
convergence & framing unit into two same groups with each
containing four 2.5 Gbit/s signals. These two groups are output
through channel A and channel B on the backplane respectively. Each
channel carries four 2.5 Gbit/s signals.
In the demultiplexing direction (2-to-1 selection)

Chapter 3 Boards

The 2-1 selector receives two groups of four 2.5 Gbit/s signals from
channel A and channel B on the backplane, selects the better one
from them and outputs it to the convergence & framing unit.
This unit selects a clock as the board clock from the local clock, the clock
coming from CSU board in slot 7 and the clock coming from CSU board in
slot 8 of the TMUX subrack.

The front panel of DSAE board is shown in Figure 62.
FIGURE 62 FRONT PANEL OF DSAE BOARD

operations of DSAE board.
5. Laser class sign


TABLE 70 DESCRIPTION OF DSAE BOARD S FRONT PANEL AND RELATED
Board Type
Item
DSAE
Board ID DSAE
Indicator
Optical
interface
indicator
Each optical interface has a green indicator on its
right side used to indicate the working status of the
interface.
ADDn
Data service tributary optical input interface, n=1 to
8, LC/PC connector
Optical
interface
DROPn
Data service tributary optical output interface, n=1
to 8, LC/PC connector
Laser warning sign
burning eyes.
Laser class sign
Indicates that the laser class of DSAE board is
CLASS 1
Slots for DSAE board Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8
Always keep optical connectors clean. Put on the dust caps
for unused optical connectors in time.
Table 71 describes the relations between the working status and
corresponding indicator status of DSAE board.
OF DSAE BOARD
Indicator Status
Working Status
Optical
Interface
Indicator
(Green)
Waiting for
configuration
indicator flash alternately and slowly.
-
Running normally
Flashing slowly and
regularly
OFF -
Alarming
Flashing slowly and
regularly
ON -
Chapter 3 Boards

Indicator Status
Working Status
Optical
Interface
Indicator
(Green)
Initializing ON
Flashing slowly
and regularly
-
indicator flash quickly at the same
time.
-
Download status
indicator flash slowly at the same time.
-
no LOS alarm
Flashing slowly and
regularly
- ON
LOS alarm
- - OFF

Configuration of DSAE Board
DSAE board can work in either TM (Terminal Multiplexer) mode or OAD
(Optical Add/Drop) mode.
TM working mode
As shown in Figure 63, bidirectional services are transmitted between
Node A and Node B. The aggregate optical interface of SMU board in
Node A is connected to the aggregate optical interface of SMU board in
Node B with an optical cable.
FIGURE 63 TM WORKING MODE OF DSAE BOARD
Tributary 1
Node A
Node B
C
S
U
DSAE DSAE

S
M
U
S
M
U
C
S
U
Tributary 8 Tributary 1 Tributary 8

The transmission procedure of data service from Node A to Node B is as
follows:
i. The data service signal is input to the DSAE board in Node A through
the tributary optical interface 1 of Node A. After GFP mapping in DSAE
board, cross-connection in CSU board and convergence in SMU board,


the data service signal of tributary 1 is converged into an OTU2 signal
for transmission over the optical cable.
ii. The SMU board in Node B receives the OTU2 signal from the optical
cable. After the divergence in SMU board, the cross-connection in
CSU board and demultiplexing in DSAE board, the tributary data
service signal is recovered and then output through the tributary
optical interface 1 of Node B.
The processing and transmitting procedure of the other tributaries data
service signals between Node A and B is same as the procedure described
above.
OAD working mode
In this working mode, DSAE board works as an optical add/drop
multiplexer.
Figure 64 illustrates the traffic configuration of DSAE board of a node
working in the OAD mode.
FIGURE 64 OAD WORKING MODE OF DSAE BOARD
Backplane
channel signal
Backplane
channel signal
Tributary 1 Tributary 8
DSAE
CSU CSU

As shown in Figure 64, the backplane channel signal from CSU board is
divided into tributary signals by the DSAE board. These tributary signals
are not dropped but passed through the DSAE board. Then these signals
are combined into a backplane channel signal again by the DSAE board
and output to CSU board.

Note: The working modes of a DSAE boards eight tributary interfaces should be
configured according to actual needs. The working mode of a tributary interface can
be set as either add/drop mode or pass-through mode. Once a tributary interface has
been set as pass-through, this interface can not be used to add/drop traffic any
longer. It is unnecessary to configure tributary optical module for a pass-through
interface.

Chapter 3 Boards

The performance messages of DSAE board are listed in Table 72.
TABLE 72 PERFORMANCE MESSAGES OF DSAE BOARD
15-min B1 error -
15-min B2 error -
15-min ES -
15-min SES -
15-min UAS -
Backplane
interface tributary
1 to 4
15-min BER -
(GFP-F) signals
15-min 8B/10B CV -
15-min 8B/10B ES -
15-min 8B/10B SES -
15-min 8B/10B UAS -
Tributary receiver
Input optical power
Laser bias current
It depends on the
board configuration
whether to detect
these items.
Total sent packet count
Total sent byte count
Tributary
transmitter
15-min sent PAUSE frame count
(GFP-F) signals

The alarm messages of DSAE board are listed in Table 73.
TABLE 73 ALARM MESSAGES OF DSAE BOARD
Board
Board environment temperature
alarm
-
LOF alarm -
UAS alarm -
SD alarm -
Backplane
interface
tributary 1 to 4
LOS alarm -


J0 Track Identifier Mismatch (TIM)
alarm
-
15-min B1 error count out of limit
alarm
-
alarm
-
LOS alarm -
LOC alarm -
Loss of synchronization alarm
signals
Loss of GFP synchronization alarm -
Loss of VC multiframe alarm -
out of limit alarm
signals
15-min 8B/10B CV out of limit alarm -
15-min 8B/10B CV ES out of limit
alarm
-
15-min 8B/10B CV SES out of limit
alarm
-
15-min 8B/10B CV UAS out of limit
alarm
-
24-hour received error packet count
out of limit alarm
-
24-hour 8B/10B CV out of limit alarm -
24-hour 8B/10B CV ES out of limit
alarm
-
24-hour 8B/10B CV SES out of limit
alarm
-
24-hour 8B/10B CV UAS out of limit
alarm
-
Tributary
receiver
Tributary
transmitter
It depends on the
board configuration
whether to detect
these items.
Chapter 3 Boards

Module temperature out of limit alarm
of inner module
The event messages of DSAE board are listed in Table 74.
TABLE 74 EVENT MESSAGES OF DSAE BOARD
Detection
Point
Item Remark
Tributary laser shutdown -
Tributary laser startup -
Tributary laser APS shutdown forcibly -
Tributary laser APS startup forcibly -
Tributary
transmitter
SFP module plugged
It depends on the
board configuration
whether to detect
these items.
MCU reset -
EEPROM data error -
Service switching -
Port

SMU Board
Functions
SMU (SDH Multiplex Unit) board is a kind of aggregate convergence board
that implements the multiplexing/ demultiplexing between STM-16 signals
at backplane side and OTU2 signal at aggregate side. The tributary board
cooperating with the SMU board is DSAE board.
Backplane side
Provides two channels on its backplane side: channel A
(corresponding to CSU board in slot 7) and channel B (corresponding
to CSU board in slot 8). Either of them is able to carry four
bidirectional 2.5 Gbit/s signals.
Supports the signal switching between channel A and channel B


Selects the optimal one from two channels of input signals and
divides one channel of output signals into two same groups on the
backplane.
Aggregate side
Supports single-channel bidirectional colored OTU2 DWDM optical
interface.
Provides a pair of 10.7 Gbit/s optical interfaces (IN/OUT).
The output optical signal at aggregate side meets the requirements of
ITU-T G.692. The input optical interface at aggregate side can receive
optical signal complying with ITU-T G.692 or G.975.
The service traffic carried by this pair of optical interfaces is OTU2
signal.
Supports the FEC encoding/decoding function specified in ITU-T
G.709. This function can be set on the EMS. Three FEC modes are
optional: FEC Codec, AFEC Codec and OTN Format-No FEC.
Supports the lossless switching between master and slave clock
input/output interfaces, and the lossless switching between clocks on the
backplane.
Supports the export of clock.
Either fixed laser or tuneable laser can be used at aggregate side. In case
of tuneable laser, 40/80 wavelengths in the whole C band can be tuned.
The wavelength spacing is 100 GHz for 40 channels while the wavelength
spacing is 50 GHz for 80 channels.
subsystem with the channel spacing at 50 GHz.
For detailed information about the centralized wavelength supervision
subsystem, please refer to Appendix C in this manual.
Supports near-end/far-end loopback at backplane side and
near-end/far-end loopback at aggregate side as well, which makes
troubleshooting easier.
Supports the online download of board software.
Implements APS monitoring for two-fiber bidirectional channel shared
ring protection line at electronic layer.

Chapter 3 Boards

Operating Principle
The operating principle of SMU board is illustrated in Figure 65.
FIGURE 65 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF SMU BOARD
Convergence
/Divergence
Unit
10G
Optical
Module
1-2 Divider/
2-1 Selector
Unit
Aggregate Side
Backplane Side
Channel A
Channel B
Control and
Communication Unit
G.692
Clock Processing
Unit
CSU in slot 7
CSU in slot 8
Channel A
Channel B

In the multiplexing direction (42.5 Gbit/s OTU2), the 2 -1 selector
receives 2.5 Gbit/s signals from channel A and channel B (each of them
carrying four 2.5 Gbit/s signals) on the backplane, selects the better signals
from these two channels and forwards them to the convergence unit. The
convergence unit combines the four 2.5 Gbit/s signals into an electrical OTU2
signal and sends it to the 10G optical module, which converts the electrical
signal into an optical one and outputs it for transmission over the optical line.
In the demultiplexing direction (OTU2 42.5 Gbit/s), the 10G optical
module receives an optical OTU2 signal from the aggregate side, converts it
into an optical signal and outputs it to the divergence unit. The divergence
unit demultiplexes this signal into four 2.5 Gbit/s signals and then the 1-2
divider separates these four 2.5 Gbit/s signals into two same groups with
each of them containing the same four 2.5 Gbit/s signals and finally outputs
the two groups of signals from channel A and channel B respectively at the
backplane side.
SMU board consists of a 1-2 divider/2-1 selector unit, a convergence/
divergence unit, a 10G optical module, a clock processing unit and a control
and communication unit, as described below.
1-2 Divider/2-1 Selector Unit
In the multiplexing direction (2-1 selector): The 2-1 selector receives
two groups of 2.5 Gbit/s signals from channel A and channel B (each
channel carries four 2.5 Gbit/s signals) on the backplane, selects the
better one from these two channels and then sends them to the


convergence/divergence unit. The 1-2 divider/2-1 selector unit
supports lossless switching between channel A and channel B.
In the demultiplexing direction (1-2 divider): The 1-2 divider
separates four 2.5 Gbit/s signals received from the
convergence/divergence unit into two same groups with each
containing the same four 2.5 Gbit/s signals, and then outputs the two
groups of signals from channel A and channel B respectively at the
backplane side.
Convergence/Divergence Unit
This unit implements the multiplexing/demultiplexing between four 2.5
Gbit/s signals and an OTU2 signal.
In the multiplexing direction (convergence): This unit converges four
2.5 Gbit/s signals received from the 2-1 selector into an OTU2 signal
(ITU-T G.709), and then sends the OTU2 signal to the 10G optical
module.
In the demultiplexing direction (divergence): This unit receives an
OTU2 signal (ITU-T G.709) from the 10G optical module,
demulplexes it into four 2.5 Gbit/s signals and then sends these
signals to the 1-2 divider.
10G Optical Module
In the multiplexing direction, this module converts the electrical
OTU2 signal into an optical signal (10.709 Gbit/s) and then sends it
out.
In the demultiplexing direction, this module converts the optical
signal (10.709 Gbit/s) into an electrical OTU2 signal and then sends it
to the convergence/divergence unit.
The clock processing unit supports the selection of reference clock sent at
aggregate side and the export of clocks. It selects the optimal clock from
the following reference clock sources as the reference clock sent at
aggregate side according to the optimal clock selection algorithm.
Clock provided by CSU board in slot 7
Clock provided by CSU board in slot 8
Clock extracted from the input traffic at aggregate side
Clocks extracted from tributaries in the current working channel on
the backplane
Local clock
In addition, this unit exports the clock extracted from the input traffic at
aggregate side to CSU board when the input traffic is normal.
Chapter 3 Boards

The front panel of SMU board is shown in Figure 66.
FIGURE 66 FRONT PANEL OF SMU BOARD

operations of the SMU board.
TABLE 75 DESCRIPTION OF SMU BOARD S FRONT PANEL AND RELATED
Board Type
Item
SMU
Board ID SMU
Indicator
Optical
interface
IN/OUT
Line input/output optical interface,
LC/PC connector
2. Line input/output optical interface
4. Laser class sign


Board Type
Item
SMU
Laser warning sign
eyes.
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of SMU board is CLASS 1
Number of occupied
slot
1
Slots for SMU board Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8
Operation
precautions
Use OTUG board as the regeneration board for SMU
board as needed.
Table 76 describes the relationship between the working status of SMU board
and the status of indicators.
OF SMU BOARD
Indicator Status
Working Status
Waiting for
configuration
The green indicator and the red indicator flash slowly and
alternately.
Running normally Flashing slowly and regularly OFF
Alarming Flashing slowly and regularly ON
Initializing ON
Flashing slowly and
regularly
The green indicator and the red indicator flash quickly at
the same time.
Download status
The green indicator and the red indicator flash slowly at
the same time.
The performance messages of SMU board are listed in Table 77.
TABLE 77 PERFORMANCE MESSAGES OF SMU BOARD
Backplane
interface tributary
1 to 4
15-min ES -
Chapter 3 Boards

15-min SES -
15-min UAS -
15-min BER -
High input power alarm threshold -
15-min FEC uncorrectable frames -
15-min FEC corrected error count -
15-min FEC corrected 0 error count -
15-min FEC corrected 1 error count -
15-min after-FEC BER -
15-min before-FEC BER -
15-min OTU2 BIP8 error count -
Aggregate
receiver
15-min ODU2 PM_BIP8 error count -
Aggregate
transmitter
Board Board environment temperature -
The alarm messages of SMU board are listed in Table 78.
TABLE 78 ALARM MESSAGES OF SMU BOARD
Board
alarm
-
LOF alarm -
UAS alarm -
SD alarm -
LOS alarm -
J0 TIM alarm -
alarm
-
alarm
-
Backplane
interface
tributary 1 to 4


UAS alarm -
SD alarm -
LOS alarm -
LOC alarm -
OTUk signal TIM alarm k=2
15-min OTUk BIP8 error out of limit
alarm
k=2
Loss of OTUk frame alarm k=2
Loss of OTUk multiframe alarm k=2
15-min before-correction bit error
-
15-min after-correction bit error
-
OTUk AIS alarm k=2
OTUk SM field BDI k=2
OTUk SM field BEI k=2
OTUk SM field BIAE k=2
OTUk SM field IAE k=2
ODUk PM field TIM k=2
ODUk PM field BDI k=2
ODUk PM field BEI k=2
ODUk AIS alarm k=2
ODUk LCK alarm k=2
ODUk OCI alarm k=2
OPUk PT mismatch k=2
Aggregate
receiver
J0 TIM alarm
Detected only for
STM-64 signal
limit alarm
-
Laser end of life time alarm -
Aggregate
transmitter
Chapter 3 Boards

MZ modulator bias voltage out of
limit alarm
The event messages of SMU board are listed in Table 79.
TABLE 79 EVENT MESSAGES OF SMU BOARD
Aggregate
transmitter
MCU reset -
EEPROM data error -
Port



Multiplex/Demultiplex Boards
SMU
OCI Optical Channel Interleaver
OBM Optical Broadband Multiplexer
OMU Optical Multiplexing Unit
VMUX Variable insertion loss Multiplexer
ODU Optical De-Multiplexing Unit
OAD Optical Add/Drop Board
WBU Wavelength Blocking Unit
WSU Wavelength Selective Unit
WBM Wavelength Blocking Multiplexing Board
OA/OTU subrack

OCI Board
Functions
OCI (Optical Channel Interleaver) board uses the optical interleaver to
implement the interleaving multiplexing and demultiplexing of wavelength
channels in C or L band. It provides the following functions:
Supports the interleaving multiplexing and demultiplexing of wavelength
channels in C band or C+ band with the spacing at 100 GHz as well as
wavelength channels with the spacing at 50 GHz in C/C+ band.
C band: 192.3 THz-196.0 THz
C+ band: 191.35 THz-196.05 THz
Supports the interleaving multiplexing and demultiplexing of wavelength
channels in L band or L+ band with the spacing at 100 GHz as well as
wavelength channels with the spacing at 50 GHz in L/L+ band.
L band: 187.0 THz-190.9 THz
L+ band: 186.95 THz-190.85 THz
The OCI board also provides the online monitoring interface for the
multiplexed output/input light of 80/96 channels.

Operating Principle
The operating principle of the OCI board is illustrated in Figure 67.
Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 67 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF OCI BOARD
Interleaver
DeMUX
Module
Interleaver
MUXModule
Coupler
OpticalPower
MonitoringModule
Coupler
80/96-channelmultiplexed
opticalinput
80/96-channelmultiplexed
opticaloutput
Inputlightonlinemonitoring
Inputlightonline
monitoring
40/48-channel
multplexedoptical
output1
40/48-channel
multiplexedoptical
output2
40/48-channel
multiplexedoptical
input1
40/48-channel
multiplexedoptical
input2
OpticalPower
MonitoringModule

Interleaver
The interleaver contains two modules: DeMUX module and MUX module.
At the multiplexing end: It uses the interleaver MUX module to
expand the capacity of a 40/48-channel WDM system by
multiplexing two groups of channels. The frequency spacing between
channels in each group is 100 GHz, and the frequency shifting
between two groups is half of the spacing. After the multiplexing, the
channel number is increased to 80/96 and the frequency spacing
becomes 50 GHz.
At the demultiplexing end: It uses the interleaver DeMUX module to
separate the multiplexed signal of 80/96 channels with the spacing
at 50 GHz to two groups. Each group has 40 channels with the
spacing at 100 GHz, and the frequency shifting between two groups
is half of the spacing.

Note: Each OCI board can only implements the multiplexing/demultiplexing of
channels either in C band or in L band.

Coupler
Located at the demultiplexing end and multiplexing end, the couplers
split the multiplexed signal of 80/96 channels, and then send parts of the
signal to the optical power monitoring module.
Optical power monitoring module



Both the multiplexing end and the demultiplexing end are configured
with an optical power monitoring module to monitor the output light and
input light respectively.
It monitors the input/output optical power of the multiplexed signal of
80/96-channel and reports it to the EMS. Moreover, it receives the
control command from the EMS.

The front panel of the OCI board is illustrated in Figure 68.
FI GURE 68 FRONT PANEL OF OCI BOARD

operation of the OCI board.
4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

TABLE 80 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF OCI BOARD AND RELATED BASI C OPERATI ON
Board
I tem
OCI
Board ID OCI
Indicator
[Note]
Laser warning sign
eyes.
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OTU10G board is CLASS 1
R
Input interface for signals with the spacing at 50 GHz in
C50_1/L50_1 sub-band, LC/PC connector
R1
Output interface for signals with the spacing of 100 GHz in
C100_1/L100_1 sub-band, LC/PC connector
R2
C100_2/L100_2 band, LC/PC connector
T
T1
T2
T-MON
Monitoring interface for output signal with the spacing at 50 GHz
in C50_1/L50_1 band, LC/PC connector
Optical
interface
R-MON
Monitoring interface for input signal with the spacing at 50 GHz in
Number of occupied
slot
2
Slots for OCI board
Operation
Precautions

Note: The relationship between the status of OCI board and corresponding status of
indicators are same as that of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 1 for the detailed
description.



Optical Connections of OCI Board
The OCI board is used in OTM equipment with more than 40/48 wavelengths.
Figure 69 illustrates the position of OCI boards and corresponding optical
connections in an 80/96-channel system.
FI GURE 69 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ONS OF OCI BOARDS I N AN 80/ 96- CHANNEL SYSTEM
OMU
C100_1
OTU
.
.
OMU
C100_2
OTU
.
.
OCI
C50_1
O
S
C
DRA
OCI
C50_1
ODU
C100_1
ODU
C100_1
OTU
.
.
OTU
.
.
OTM1
OTM2
EOBA
O
S
C
DCM VGSC
OPM
EOBA EOPA
OLA
...

OTM1
The T1 and T2 interface on the OCI board are respectively connected
to the OUT interface on the OMU (C100_1 subband) board and that
on the OMU (C100_2 subband) board respectively.
The T interface on the OCI board is connected to the IN interface on
the EOBA board.
OTM2
The R1 and R2 interface on the OCI board are respectively connected
to the IN interface on the ODU (C100_1 sub-band) board and that on
the ODU (C100_2 sub-band) board respectively.
After being amplified, the multiplexed signal is accessed to the OCI
board through the R interface.

Figure 70 illustrates the position of OCI boards and corresponding optical
connection in a 160/176-channel system.
Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 70 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ONS OF OCI BOARDS I N A 160/ 176- CHANNEL SYSTEM
OMU
C100_1
.
.
OMU
C100_2
.
.
OMU
L100_1
OTU
.
.
OMU
L100_2
OTU
.
.
OCI
C50_1
OCI
L50_1
OBM
(C/L)
EOBA
EOBA
O
S
C
OBM
(C/L)
O
S
C
EOPA EOBA
DCM VGSC
EOPA EOBA
DCM VGSC
OPM
OPM
DRA
OCI
C50_1
OCI
L50_1
ODU
C100_1
ODU
C100_2
ODU
L100_1
ODU
L100_2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
OTM1
OLA
OTM2
...
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU

OTM1
The T1 interface on the OCI (C100_1) board and OCI (L100_1) board
are respectively connected to the OUT interface on the OMU board.
The T2 interface on the OCI (C100_1) board and OCI (L100_1) board
are respectively connected to the OUT interface on the OMU board.
The T interface on the OCI (C) board and OCI (L) board are
respectively connected to the IN interface on the EOBA (C band)
board and the EOBA (L band) board.
OTM2
The R1 interface on the OCI (C100_1) board and OCI (L100_1) board
are respectively connected to the IN interface on the ODU board.
The R2 interface on the OCI (C100_1) board and OCI (L100_1) board
are respectively connected to the IN interface on the ODU board.
The multiplexed signal of C band and L band is accessed to the OCI
(C) board and OCI (L) board through the R interface on these two
boards respectively.

The performance and alarm messages related to the OCI board are listed in
Table 81.
TABLE 81 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF OCI BOARD
Type I tem
Output optical power of MUX signal
Performance
Input optical power of DeMUX signal
No output power alarm (MUX)
Low output power alarm (MUX)
Alarm
MUX output power out of upper limit alarm


Type I tem
MUX output power out of lower limit alarm
No input power alarm (DeMUX)
Low input power alarm (DeMUX)
DeMUX input power out of upper limit alarm
DeMUX input power out of lower limit alarm
Event MCU reset

OBM Board
Functions
The OBM board implements the multiplexing/demultiplexing of channels in
C/L band and the supervisory channels of 1510 nm and 1625 nm. The 1510
nm supervisory channel is used to monitor signals in C band, while the 1625
nm supervisory channel is used to monitor signals in L band.
The OBM board supports the online monitoring of optical power of signals in
C/L band and the 1510 nm/1625 nm channel.

Operating Principle
The operating principle is illustrated in Figure 71.
FI GURE 71 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF OBM BOARD
Output light online
supervision
C-band multiplexed
optical input
L-band multiplexed
optical input
Broadband
Multiplexer
OSC input
C-band multiplexed
optical output
L-band multiplexed
optical output
OSC output
Optical Power
Monitoring
Module
Multiplexed optical
output
Coupler
Multiplexed optical
input
Optical Power
Monitoring
Module
Input light online
supervision
Coupler

Chapter 3 Boards

Broadband multiplexer
At the multiplexing end: It uses the MUX module of broadband
multiplexer to expand the capacity of an 80/96-channel WDM system
by multiplexing channels in C band and L band with the spacing at 50
GHz. The supervisory signal is also multiplexed at the same time.
After the multiplexing, the channel number is increased to 160/176.
At the demultiplexing end: It uses the DeMUX module of broadband
multiplexer to separate the multiplexed signal of 160/176 channels
to channels in C band and L band with the spacing at 50 GHz. There
are 80/96 channels in each band after demultiplexing. The
supervisory signal is also separated from the multiplex signal.

Coupler
Located at the multiplexing/demultiplexing end, it separates the
multiplexed signal of 160/176 channels and sends part of the optical
signals to the optical power monitoring module.

Both the multiplexing end and the demultiplexing end are configured
with an optical power monitoring module to monitor the power of output
light and input light respectively.
It monitors the input/output optical power of the combined signal and
reports it to the EMS. Moreover, it receives the control command from
the EMS.

The front panel of the OBM board is illustrated in Figure 72.


FI GURE 72 FRONT PANEL OF OBM BOARD

operation of the OCI board.
TABLE 82 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF OBM BOARD AND RELATED BASI C OPERATI ON
Board
I tem
OBM
Board ID OBM
NO
M
Indicator
[Note]
Laser warning
sign
CT
Input interface for signals in C band with the spacing at 50 GHz, LC/PC
connector
Optical
interface
LT
Input interface for signals in L band with the spacing at 50 GHz, LC/PC
connector
4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

Board
I tem
OBM
CST Input interface for 1550 nm supervisory signal, LC/PC connector
LST
Standby input interface for supervisory channel, LC/PC connector, not
used
T
Output interface for signals (C+L+1510 nm+1625 nm), LC/PC
connector
MO
N_T
Monitoring interface for output signals (C+L+1510 nm+1625 nm),
LC/PC connector
CR
Output interface for signals in C band with the spacing at 50 GHz,
LC/PC connector
LR
Output interface for signals in L band with the spacing at 50 GHz,
LC/PC connector
CSR Output interface for supervisory signal, LC/PC connector
LSR
Standby output interface for supervisory channel, LC/PC connector,
not used
R
Input interface for signals (C+L+1510 nm+1625 nm), LC/PC
connector
MO
N_R
Monitoring interface for input signals (C+L+1510 nm+1625 nm),
LC/PC connector
Number of
occupied slot
2
Laser
classification
sign
Indicates that the laser classification of OBM board is CLASS 1
Slots for OBM
board
Operation
precautions
Avoid damaging the fiber pigtail connector while
Always keep the optical connectors clean. Put on the dust caps for
the unused optical connectors in time.

Note: The relationship between the status of OBM board and corresponding status of
description.



Optical Connections of OBM Board
The OBM board is only used in 160-channel DWDM systems. Figure 73
illustrates the position and optical connections of OBM boards in a network.
FI GURE 73 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ONS OF OBM BOARDS
OBM
(C/L)
EOBA
EOBA
O
S
C
OBM
(C/L)
DRA
OBM
(C/L)
O
S
C
EOPA
EOPA
DRA
OTM1 OLA OTM2
Multiplexedsignal
inCband
Multiplexedsignal
inLband
AmplifiedsignalinCband
AmplifiedsignalinLband
Multiplexedsignal
inCband
Multiplexed
signalinLband
OSC

The figure above omits the multiplexing, demultiplexing and amplifying
process of optical signals in C band and L band. Suppose the 1510 nm is
taken as the supervisory channel.
OTM1 (transmitting end)
The CT interface on the OBM board is connected to the OUT interface
on the EOBA board of C band, while the LT interface is connected to
the OUT interface on the EOBA board of L band.
The CST interface on the OBM board is connected to the output
interface on the OSC board.
The T interface on the OBM board is connected with the external
optical cable.
OTM2 (receiving end)
The CR interface on the OBM board is connected to the IN interface
on the EOPA board of C band, while the LR interface is connected to
the IN interface on the EOPA board of L band.
The CSR interface on the OBM board is connected to the input
interface on the OSC board.
The optical signal is accessed to the R interface of the OBM board
through the external optical cable.
OLA
The CR/CT interfaces on the OBM board are connected to the OLA
board of C band.
The LR/LT interfaces of the OBM board are connected to the OLA
board of L band.
Chapter 3 Boards

The CSR interface on the OBM board is connected to the input
interface on the OSC board, while the CST interface is connected to
the output interface on the OSC board.
The R/T interfaces on the OBM board are connected with optical
cables of the main optical channel respectively.

The Performance and Alarm Messages of the OBM board are listed in Table
83.
TABLE 83 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF OBM BOARD
Type I tem Remark
Output power Detection point: output interface T
Input power Detection point: input interface R
CS input power
CS output power
CS: C-band supervisory channel
(1510nm)
LS input power
Performance
LS output power
LS: L-band supervisory channel
(1625nm)
No output power
Low output power
Output power out of upper
limit alarm
Output power out of lower
limit alarm
Detection point: output interface T
No input power
Low input power
Input power out of upper limit
alarm
Alarm
Input power out of lower limit
alarm
Detection point: input interface R
Event MCU reset -



OMU Board
Functions
The OMU board mainly implements the multiplexing function and provides
the interface for the online monitoring of multiplexed signal. Five kinds of
OMU boards are available, OMU8, OMU16, OMU32, OMU40, OMU48 and
OMU80, as described in Table 84.
TABLE 84 TYPE LI ST OF OMU BOARD
Board Type
I tem
OMU8 OMU16 OMU32 OMU40 OMU48 OMU80
Number of
multiplexed
wavelength
8 16 32 40 48 80
Multiplexer type Coupler Coupler
Coupler,
AWG, TFF
AWG,
TFF
AWG AWG
Operating
wavelength
C100_1 C100_1
C100_1
L100_1
C100_1
C100_2
L100_1
L100_2
C100_1
C100_2
C50_1
L50_1
Note: AWG: Array Waveguid Grating
TFF: Thin Film Filter

Operating Principle
Taking OMU80 board as example, the operating principle of the OMU board is
FI GURE 74 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF OMU BOARD
MUX
l
1
l
2
l
8
0
Input optical
channel 1
Input optical
channel 2
Input optical
channel 80
Multiplexed
light ouput
Online monitoring
interface
.
.
.
Optical power
monitoring module
80:1

Chapter 3 Boards

The OMU board combines optical signals of different wavelengths into a
single fiber through the MUX. Before the multiplexed light is output, part of
it is sent to the optical power monitoring module, which provides the online
monitoring interface. The optical power monitoring module reports the total
output optical power to the EMS through the control and communication
unit.
80:1 Multiplier
Combine 80 wavelengths signals into a multiplexed signal.
Coupler
Separate the multiplexed signal of 160/176 channels and sends part of
the optical signals to the optical power monitoring module.
Send the output optical power monitored by the monitoring module to
the control and communication unit.
the EMS.

Taking the OMU80 board as example, Figure 75 illustrates its front panel.


FI GURE 75 FRONT PANEL OF OMU40 BOARD

operation of four types of OMU boards.
TABLE 85 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF OMU BOARD AND RELATED BASI C OPERATI ON
Board Type
Item
Board ID OMU8 OMU16 OMU32 OMU40 OMU48 OMU80
Sub-band
Name
C100_1 C100_1
C100_1
L100_1
C100_1
C100_2
L100_1
L100_2
C100_1
C100_2
C50_1
L50_1
Indicator
[Note]
CHn Optical channel input interface, LC/PC connector
4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

Board Type
Item
n = 1-8
n =
1-16
n =
1-32
n =
1-40
n =
1-48
n =
1-80
LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC
Line optical output interface, LC/PC connector
OUT
Local optical monitoring interface, LC/PC connector
MON
Number of
occupied slot
2 2 2 2 2 4
Laser warning
sign
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OMU board is CLASS 1
Slots for OMU
board
Operation
precautions
The OMU board using AWG as its multiplexer is an active
board. Therefore, unplugging this kind of OMU board will
cause the traffic interruption.

Note: The relationship between the status of OMU board and corresponding status of
description.
C100_1 and C100_2 respectively refer to the first and the second subband in C band
with the spacing at 100 GHz.

Optical Connections of OMU Board
The CHn interfaces on the OMU board are connected to line-side interfaces
on OTU boards or aggregate interfaces on SRM41/SRM42/GEM/DSA boards
so as to access optical signals in compliance with ITU-T G.692.
When the number of wavelengths to be multiplexed in ZXWM M900 system
is no more than 48, connect the OUT interface on the OMU board to the IN
interface on the EOBA board, as shown in Figure 76.



FI GURE 76 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ONS OF OMU BOARD ( WAVELENGTH NUMBER N 40)
OTU1
1
OTU2

2
OTUn

n
OMU
EOBA

When the number of wavelengths to be multiplexed in ZXWM M900 system
is more than 48, use OMU80 board or two OMU32/OMU40/OMU48 boards
and an OCI board to complex the wavelengths.
When an OMU80 board is adopted, the optical connection is illustrated as
shown in Figure 76.
When two OMU32/OMU40/OMU48 boards and an OCI board are adopted,
connect the OUT interface on the OMU board to the IN interface on the OCI
board, as shown in Figure 77.
FI GURE 77 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ONS OF OMU BOARD ( MORE THAN 48- CHANNEL)
OMU
C100_1
OTU
.
.
OMU
C100_2
OTU
.
.
OCI
C50_1
O
S
C
OCI
C50_1
ODU
C100_1
ODU
C100_2
OTU
.
.
OTU
.
.
OTM1
OTM2
EOBA
O
S
C
DCM
OBA EOPA
OLA
...

The Performance and Alarm Messages of the OMU board are listed in Table
86.
TABLE 86 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF OMU BOARD
Type I tem Remark
Output power -
AWG operating temperature Performance
AWG heater consumption
Only for OMU boards with AWG
Alarm
-
Chapter 3 Boards

Type I tem Remark
Output power out of upper limit
alarm
-
Output power out of lower limit
alarm
-
AWG temperature out of limit alarm Only for OMU boards with AWG
Event MCU reset -

VMUX Board
Functions
The VMUX board provides the following functions.
Multiplexing function based on channel power pre-equalization: It adopts
the AWG/TFF and Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) technology to adjust
the attenuation of each channel before multiplexing. It supports the
multiplexing of 40/48 wavelengths in C band and 40 wavelengths in L
band.
Power monitoring function: It monitors the optical power of the output
multiplexed signal.
Channel power control and adjustment function: Cooperating with the
OPM board and the ZXONM E300, the VMUX board can adjust the power
of a single channel or adjust the power of all channels at the same time.
The adjustment precision is 0.1 dB. The adjustable range is from 0 to 10
dB. And the intrinsic insertion loss is no more than 8 dB.
The following three ways can be used to control the adjustment of
channel power:
The OPM board detects the power feedback at the transmitting end
of the board from the MON interface on the VMUX/EOBA board or the
MON_T interface on the OBM board.
Adjust the channel power manually in the ZXONM E300.
The OPM board detects the power feedback at the receiving end of
the board from the MON interface on the ODU/OPA/OBA board or the
MON_R interface on the OBM board.
Adjust the channel power manually in the ZXONM E300.
The OCH layer power management subsystem controls the power
adjustment automatically. It queries the optical channel power at the
receiving end, and then adjusts the VMUX board at the transmitting
end automatically.
The VMUX board adopts AWG/TFF as its multiplexer. In terms of the
wavelength range of channel signals, the VMUX board can be divided into
C100_1 sub-band, C100_2 subband, L100_1 sub-band and L100_2
subband VMUX board.



Operating Principle
The operating principle of the VMUX board is illustrated in Figure 78.
FI GURE 78 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF VMUX BOARD

The VMUX uses the temperature control circuit to drive the VOA of each
channel, which will adjust the attenuation of each channel and then combine
all the channels into a single channel of signal for output. The VOAs, AWG
and the temperature control and drive circuit are all located in the optical
module of the VMUX board.
The control and communication unit sends the VOA adjustment command of
each channel, and queries the performance and alarm information of the
optical module in the board.
The function of each unit shown in Figure 78 is described as follows.
VOA
Each channel is equipped with a VOA, which is controlled by the VOA
control circuit part of the temperature control and drive circuit.
AWG/TFF
It is a kind of multiplexer adopted by the VMUX board, which implements
the multiplexing function for different optical signals.
Temperature control and drive circuit
It includes two parts, the temperature control circuit and the VOA drive
circuit, controlling the VOA of each channel and the AWG respectively.
Coupler
It receives the multiplexed optical signal from the AWG, outputs part of
the optical signal and then sends the rest to the optical power monitoring
module.
Chapter 3 Boards

It provides the online monitoring interface, and reports the detected
output optical power to the control and communication unit.
It monitors the power of the output combined optical signal and reports
it to the EMS, and receives commands from the EMS.

The front panel of the VMUX40 board is illustrated in Figure 79.
FI GURE 79 FRONT PANEL OF VMUX BOARD

operation of the VMUX board.

4. Laser class sign


TABLE 87 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF VMUX BOARD AND RELATED BASI C OPERATI ON
Board
I tem
VMUX
Board ID VMUX40 VMUX48
Subband Name
C100_1
C100_2
L100_1
L100_2
C100_1
C100_2
Indicator
[Note]
Laser warning sign
eyes.
CHn
Optical channel input interface,
n = 1-40, LC/PC connector
Optical channel input interface,
n = 1-48, LC/PC connector
OUT Line optical output interface, LC/PC connector
Optical
interface
MON Local optical monitoring interface, LC/PC connector
Number of occupied
slot
2
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of VMUX is CLASS 1
Slots for VMUX
board
Operation
precautions
Always keep the optical connectors clean. Put on the dust caps
for the unused optical connectors in time.

Note: The relationship between the status of VMUX board and corresponding status
of indicators are same as that of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for the
C100_1 and C100_2 respectively refer to the first and the second subband in C band
with the spacing at 100 GHz.

Optical Connections of VMUX Board
The VMUX board is usually used at the transmitting end of OTM equipment in
ultra long-haul 40/48-channel or 80/96-channel systems without
regenerator. Taking an 80/96-channel system as example, Figure 80
illustrates the position and optical connections of the VMUX boards in the
system.

Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 80 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ONS OF VMUX BOARD
VMUX
C100_1
OTU
.
.
VMUX
C100_2
OTU
.
.
OCI
C50_1
OTM
EOBA
OLA
...
OTM
O
S
C
OPM

The CHn interface of VMUX board is connected to the line side interface of
OTU series board, or the aggregate interface of convergence boards (such as
SRM41/SRM42/GEM/DSA boards). The multiplexed optical signal is output
from the OUT interface of VMUX board.
The VMUX should be used with the OPM board together. It can adjust the
power spectrum slope of each channel through the EMS according to the
monitored optical power from the OPM board.

The performance and alarm messages of the VMUX board are listed in Table
88.
TABLE 88 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF VMUX BOARD
Type I tem
MUX output power
Optical attenuator value
AWG operating temperature
Performance
Output power out of upper limit alarm
Output power out of lower limit alarm
Alarm
AWG temperature out of limit alarm
Channel attenuation adjustment failure
Event
MCU reset



ODU Board
Functions
The ODU board implements the demultiplexing of wavelengths and provides
an interface special for online monitoring of multiplexed optical signal.
Four types of ODU boards are available, ODU8, ODU16, ODU32, ODU40,
ODU48 and ODU80, as described in Table 89.
TABLE 89 TYPE LI ST OF ODU BOARD
Board Type
I tem
ODU8 ODU16 ODU32 ODU40 ODU48 ODU80
Demultiplexing
Number
8 16 32 40 48 80
Multiplexer type TFF TFF AWG, TFF AWG, TFF AWG AWG
Operating wavelength C100_1 C100_1
C100_1
L100_1
C100_1
C100_2
L100_1
L100_2
C100_1
C100_2
C50_1
L50_1
Note: AWG: Array Waveguid Grating
TFF: Thin Film Filter

Operating Principle
Taking the ODU80 as example, Figure 81 illustrates the operating principle of
ODU board.
FI GURE 81 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF ODU BOARD
Multiplexedoptical
signalinput
OpticalPower
MonitoringModule
?
1
?
2
?
80
1:80
DeMUX
Opticalchanneloutput1
Onlinemonitoring
interface

The DeMUX in the ODU board separates optical signals of different channels
in a single fiber and then sends them to corresponding optical receivers.
Chapter 3 Boards

Before the multiplexed optical signal enters the DeMUX, part of the signal is
sent to the optical power monitoring module, which provides a monitoring
interface for online supervision. The optical power monitoring module
reports the total input optical power to the EMS through the control and
communication unit.
80:1 Multiplier
Combine 80 wavelengths signals into a multiplexed signal.
Coupler
Separate the multiplexed signal of 160/176 channels and sends part of
the optical signals to the optical power monitoring module.
Send the output optical power monitored by the monitoring module to
the control and communication unit.
the EMS.

Taking the ODU80 board as example, Figure 82 illustrates its front panel.


FI GURE 82 FRONT PANEL OF ODU BOARD

operation of four types of ODU boards.
TABLE 90 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF ODU BOARD AND RELATED BASI C OPERATI ON
Board Type
I tem
Board ID ODU8 ODU16 ODU32 ODU40 ODU48 ODU80
Subband Name C100_1 C100_1
C100_1
L100_1
C100_1
C100_2
L100_1
L100_2
C100_1
C100_2
C50_1
L50_1
Indicator
[Note]
Laser warning
sign
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of ODU board is CLASS 1
4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

Board Type
I tem
Optical channel output interface
n = 1-8 n = 1-16 n = 1-32 n = 1-40 n= 1-48 n= 1-80 CHn
Optical line input interface
OUT
Local optical monitoring interface
Optical
interface
MON
Number of
occupied slot
2 2 2 2 2 4
Slots for ODU
board
Operation
precautions
The ODU board using AWG as its multiplexer is an active board.
Therefore, unplugging this kind of ODU board will cause the traffic
interruption.

Note: The relationship between the status of ODU board and corresponding status of
description.

Optical Connections of ODU Board
The ODU board is usually equipped at the receiving end of OTM equipment.
The output optical signals from CHn interfaces meet the wavelength
requirements specified in ITU-T G.692. The output signals can be output to
user equipment directly, or sent to line-side interfaces on OTU series boards
or aggregate interfaces of convergence boards (such as
SRM41/SRM42/GEM/DSA boards) firstly. And then the signals will be
forwarded to user equipment via client-side interfaces or tributary interfaces
on these boards.
In the system with no more than 48 wavelengths, the amplified signal on the
main optical channel is directly accessed to the IN interface of the ODU board.
Suppose the signal is amplified by an EOPA board. Figure 83 illustrates the
optical connection of the ODU board.



FI GURE 83 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ON OF ODU BOARD ( WAVELENGTH NUMBER N 40)
OTU1
?1
OUT2
?2
OTUn
?n
O
D
U
EOPA

In a system with more than 48 wavelengths, use an ODU80 board, or two
ODU32/ODU40/ODU48 boards and an OCI board to split optical wavelength.
When using an ODU80 board, the optical connection of ODU80 board is
When using two ODU32/ODU40/ODU48 boards and an OCI board, the IN
interface on the ODU board is connected to the R1 or R2 interface on the OCI
board, as shown in Figure 77.

The Performance and Alarm Messages of the ODU board are listed in Table
91.
TABLE 91 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF ODU BOARD
Type I tem Remark
Input power -
AWG operating temperature Performance
Only for ODU boards with AWG
-
Input power out of upper
limit alarm
-
Input power out of lower
limit alarm
-
Alarm
AWG temperature out of
limit alarm
Only for ODU boards with AWG
Event MCU reset -
Chapter 3 Boards

OAD Board
Functions
The OAD board implements the add/drop multiplexing function by
adding/dropping 4 or 8 fixed wavelengths and then combining the local
added signals with other wavelengths. The fixed wavelengths to be
added/dropped are determined according to the customers requirements.
Moreover, the OAD board can supervise the optical power of the
added/dropped signals.
Operating Principle
Taking the OAD8 as example, Figure 84 illustrates the operating principle of
the OAD board.
FI GURE 84 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF OAD BOARD ( 8 WAVELENGTHS)
OADM
IN OUT
DROP
ADD
Optical Power Monitoring Module

The OAD board is mainly composed of the Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
(OADM), the optical power monitoring module and the control and
communication unit.
OADM
It adopts optical modules to add/drop the specified wavelengths,
multiplex them and forward other wavelengths through.
It monitors the optical power of added/dropped signals and reports the
measured power value to the control and communication unit.
It reports the power value received from the optical power monitoring
module to the EMS, and receives control commands from the EMS.


Taking the OAD8 as example, Figure 85 illustrates the front panel.
FI GURE 85 FRONT PANEL OF OAD8 BOARD

4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

operation of two types of OAD boards.
TABLE 92 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF OAD BOARD AND RELATED BASI C OPERATI ON
Board Type
I tem
OAD4 OAD8
Board ID OAD4 OAD8
Indicator
[Note]
Laser warning sign
eyes.
Optical drop interface, LC/PC
Dn
n = 1-4 n = 1-8
Optical add interface, LC/PC connector
An
n = 1-4 n = 1-8
M1 Mid1 interface for pass-through signal, LC/PC connector
M2 Mid2 interface for pass-through signal, LC/PC connector
IN Input interface for multiplexed signal, LC/PC interface
Optical
interface
OUT Output interface for multiplexed signal, LC/PC connector
Number of occupied
slot
2 2
Laser warning
sign
eyes.
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OAD board is CLASS 1
Slots for OAD board
Operation
precautions
To ensure the gain flatness of each channel while the signal is
output from the OUT interface on the OAD board, calculate the
attenuation of each channel according to actual situations and
add appropriate attenuators between the M1 interface and the
M2 interface, and before An interfaces.

Note: The relationship between the status of OAD board and corresponding status of
indicators are same as that of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31for the detailed
description.



Optical Connections of OAD Board
The OAD board is usually equipped in OADM equipment.
Taking unidirectional 8-channel OADM equipment as example, Figure 86
illustrates the optical connections of the OAD8 board.
FI GURE 86 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ONS OF OAD8 BOARD
O
A
D
?1
?2
?8
.
.
.
OTU1
OTU2
OTU8
?1
?2
?8
.
.
.
OSCL OPM
EOPA
EOBA
?OSC
?OSC
OTU1
OTU2
OTU8
Opticallineinputfrom
upstreamsite
Opticallineoutputto
downstreamsite

The output optical signals from Dn interfaces meet the wavelength
requirements of G.692, which can be directly output to user equipment.
These signals can also be sent to line-side interfaces on OTU boards or
aggregate interfaces of convergence boards (such as
SRM41/SRM42/GEM/DSA boards) firstly. And then the signals will be
forwarded to user equipment via client-side interfaces or tributary
interfaces on these boards.
Optical signals meeting the G.692 requirements, which are output by
OTU boards or convergence boards (such as SRM41/SRM42/ GEM/DSA
boards), are accessed to the OAD board through the An interfaces.
When there is only one OAD board, connect the M1 interface to the M2
interface. If two OAD boards are cascaded to get more add/drop
channels, connect the M1 interface on the first OAD board to the IN
interface on the second one, and connect the M2 interface on the first
board to the OUT interface on the second.
Each OAD board only supports the signal receiving and sending in one
direction, that is, the IN interface is connected to the upstream site while
the OUT interface is connected to the downstream site.
IN interface: Connected to the OUT interface on the OPA board. The
external optical signal is accessed to the OAD board after being
amplified.
OUT interface: Connected to the IN interface on the OBA board.

Chapter 3 Boards

The Performance and Alarm Messages of the OAD board are listed in Table
93.
TABLE 93 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF OAD BOARD
Type I tem
Performance Channel add/drop optical power
No add/drop optical power alarm
Alarm
Low add/drop optical power alarm
Event -

WBU Board
Functions
WBU (Wavelength Blocking Unit) board is configured in an ROADM
(Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer) subsystem to implement the
configuration of add/drop wavelengths. With the application of WBU board,
the maintenance of existing system becomes convenient when the add/drop
wavelengths change.
The main funtions of WBU board includes:
Supports Wavelength Blocking (WB) modules with two frequency
spacings, 50 GHz and 100 GHz.
Supports blocking any wavelength
Provides the function of channel power equalization
Provides the function of spectrum justification

Operating Principle
According to different main optical elements cofigured on the board, WBU
board can be classified into three different board types, as listed in Table 94.



TABLE 94 WBU BOARD TYPE
WBU Board
Type
Add
Port
Drop
Port
Application Status
WBU/AD1 1 1
1. Supports 40/48 add and 40/48 drop
(the frequency spacing is 100GHz)
WBU/AD2 2 2
WBU/DGE 0 0
It does not support adding/dropping of the
wavelength, but it supports the dynamic
gain equalization for the pass-through
wavelength.

Operating Principle of WBU/AD1 and WBU/AD2
The operating principle of WBU/AD1 board is similar to that of WBU/AD2
board. Taking WBU/AD2 board for example, Figure 87 illustrates its
operating principle.
FIGURE 87 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF WBU/AD2 BOARD

For the optical signal in direction A, after the line signal is input to the WBU
board, two couplers separate two specified wavelengths (Drop1/Drop2)
respectively from the appointed signal and drop them.
For the optical signal in direction B, after the line signal is input to the WBU
board, the WB module blocks and equalizes the power of dropped
wavelengths in the pass-through signal. Finally, the processed pass-through
wavelengths are combined with two added wavelengths via two couplers and
then the combined signal is output as the line signal.
The WBU board consists of a WB module, couplers and the control &
communication unit.
Chapter 3 Boards

WB module
The WB module blocks the dropped wavelengths. On the other hand, it
equalizes the power of pass-through wavelengths by applying spectrum
adjustment.
Coupler
It extracts or composes optical signal according to a specified coupled
power proportion.
It sends adjustment command to the WB module, reads the status of the
WB module, communicates with the NCPF board and APSF, and accepts
the commands from the EMS.

Operating Principle of WBU/DGE
The operating principle of WBU/DGE board shows in Figure 88. WBU/DGE
board does not support wavelength adding/dropping, but it dynamically
equalizes gain in the pass-through signal. The functional modules shown in
Figure 88 are same as those in WBU/AD2 board, as described above.
FIGURE 88 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF WBU/DGE BOARD

The front panel of WBU board is shown in Figure 89.


FIGURE 89 FRONT PANEL OF WBU BOARD

operations of the WBU board.
TABLE 95 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTIONS OF WBU BOARD AND RELATED BASIC
OPERATIONS
Board
Item
WBU/AD1, WBU/AD2, WBU/DGE
Board ID WBU
Indicator
A1 Optical add interface 1, LC/PC connector
A2 Optical add interface 2, LC/PC connector
Optical
interface
D1 Optical drop interface 1, LC/PC connector
4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

Board
Item
WBU/AD1, WBU/AD2, WBU/DGE
D2 Optical drop interface 2, LC/PC connector
EXIN Pass-through optical input interface, LC/PC connector
EXOUT Pass-through optical output interface, LC/PC connector
OUT Line output optical interface, LC/PC connector
MON Local monitoring output interface, LC/PC connector
Laser warning
sign
eyes.
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of WBU board is CLASS 1
Number of
occupied slot
2
Slots for board
Operation
precautions
Note: The relations between the working status and corresponding indicator
status of WBU board are same as those of OTU board.

Optical Connections of WBU Board
WBU board is used in an ROADM subsystem. Taking WBU/AD2 board for
example, Figure 90 shows the optical connections.


FIGURE 90 OPTICAL CONNECTIONS OF WBU/AD2 BAORD

As shown in Figure 90, each WBU board only supports the transceiving of
signals in one optical direction. The IN/OUT interface of WBU board is
connected to site in the direction A or direction B.
The following describes the connection of WBU boards interfaces.
IN: It is connected to the OUT interface of EOPA board for accessing the
amplified aggregate optical signal.
OUT: It is connected to the IN interface of EOBA board to output
aggregate optical signal.
D1/D2: It is connected to the IN interfaces of ODU board.
The optical signals output from CHn interfaces of ODU board meet the
wavelength requirements specified in ITU-T G.692. These signals can be
output to user equipment directly, or output to line interface of OTU
series boards or aggregate interface of convergence boards (such as
SRM/GEM/DSA boards) first and then forwarded to user equipment
through the client interfaces of these boards.
A1/A2: It is connected to the OUT interface of OMU board.
The CHn interfaces of OMU board is connected to line interfaces of OTU
series board or aggregate interface of convergence boards (such as
SRM/GEM/DSA boards) for accessing optical signals meeting the
requirements of ITU-T G.692.
Various optical multiplexing/demultiplexing boards can be connected to
WBU board, such as OMU8, OMU16, OMU32, OMU40, OMU48, OMU80,
OMU96, OCI, ODU8, ODU16, ODU32 ODU40, ODU48, ODU80, ODU96
and OCI. Each WBU board supports the adding/dropping of up to 40/80
or 48/96 wavelengths.
EXIN and EXOUT interfaces of WBU board at A side are connected to
EXOUT and EXIN interface of WBU board at B side respectively.

Chapter 3 Boards

The performance, alarm and event messages of the WBU board are listed in
Table 96.
TABLE 96 PERFORMANCE, ALARM AND EVENT MESSAGES OF WBU BOARD
Type Item
Performance
Optical channel attenuation
Board environment temperature alarm
Alarm
WB module failure alarm
MCU reset
EEPROM data error Event

WSU Board
Functions
WSU (Wavelength Selective Unit) board is configured in an ROADM
(Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer) subsystem to implement the
reconfiguration of add/drop wavelengths. With the application of WBU board,
the maintenance of existing system becomes convenient when the add/drop
wavelengths change.
WSU board offers the following main functions:
Supports assigning any wavelength to any port
Supports blocking any wavelength
Supports equalizing channel power
Supports adjusting specturm

Operating Principle
Six types of WSU boards are available according to different main optical
components used in the board, as described in Table 97.


TABLE 97 TYPES OF WSU BOARD
Board
Type
Panel
Type
Add
Channel
Number
Drop
Channel
Number
Application
WSUD/MA1 1 8
WSUD/MA1 supports the
adding/dropping of 40
wavelengths.
WSUD/MA2 2 8
WSUD/MA2 supports the
adding/dropping of 40
wavelengths.
WSUD/E
WSUD
0 9
Using as the extension board for
upgrade, it has no adding optical
interface and local monitoring
output interface.
WSUA/MD1 8 1
WSUA/MD1 board is used in
networks that need broadcast
function. It supports the
adding/dropping of 40 channels
of fixed wavelengths or 40
assinged wavelengths.
WSUA/MD2 8 2
WSUA/MD2 board is used in
networks that need broadcast
function. It supports the
adding/dropping of 40 channels
of fixed wavelengths or 40
assinged wavelengths.
WSUA/E
WSUD
8 0
Using as the extension board for
upgrade, it has no dropping
optical interface.

Operating Principle of WSUD/MA1 and WSUD/MA2
With the similar operating principle, only the channel numbers of optical
adding/dropping between WSUD/MA1 and WSUD/MA2 are different. Taking
a WSUD/MA2 board for example, the operating principle is described in
Figure 91.
Chapter 3 Boards

FIGURE 91 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF WSUD/MA2 BOARD

After the line signal in direction A is input to the WSU board, the WSS module
outputs two dropped signals with specified wavelengths. At the same time,
the WSS module equalizes the power of pass-through signals and outputs
the signals through pass-through interface.
For the pass-through signal in direction B, after the optical signal is input to
the WSU board, the processed pass-through wavelengths are combined with
two added wavelengths via two couplers and then the combined signal is
output as the line signal.
WSU board is comprised of WSS module, coupler and control and
communication unit.
WSS module: it supports the assignment and adjustment function from
any wavelength to any port, and it equalizes the power by adjusting
spectrum.
Coupler
It extracts or composes optical signal according to a specified coupled
power proportion.
It sends adjustment command to the WSS module, reads the status of
the WSS module, communicates with the NCPF board and APSF, and
accepts the commands from the EMS.



Operating Principle of WSUD/E Board
Applied as the extension board for upgrade, WSUD/E board has no optical
added interface and local output monitoring interface. The operating
principle of the WSUD/E board is described in Figure 92. The unit functions of
WSUD/E board are the same as those of WSUD/MA2.
FIGURE 92 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF WSUD/E BOARD
WSS Module
Control and
Communication Unit
Drop 1 Drop 2 Drop 9

Optical Input

Operating Principle of WSUA/MD1 and WSUA/MD2
Board
With the similar operating principle, only the channel numbers of optical
adding/dropping between WSUA/MD1 and WSUA/MD2 are different. Taking
a WSUA/MD2 board for example, the operating principle is described in
Figure 93. The unit functions of WSUA/MD1 and WSUA/MD2 board are the
same as those of WSUD/MA2.
Chapter 3 Boards

FIGURE 93 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF WSUA/MD2 BOARD

Operating Principle of WSUA/E Board
Applied as the extension board for upgrade, WSUA/E board has no optical
added interface. The operating principle of the WSUA/E board is described in
Figure 94. The functions of WSUA/E board are the same as those of
WSUD/MA2.
FIGURE 94 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF WSUA/E BOARD



The front panel of WSU board varies depending on its type, WSUA or WSUD.
Two kinds of front panels are similar except optical interfaces identifiers, as
shown in Figure 95.
FIGURE 95 FRONT PANEL OF WSU BOARD

WSUA WSUD

4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

operations of WSU board.
TABLE 98 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTIONS OF WSU BOARD AND RELATED BASIC
OPERATIONS
Board
Item
WSUA/MD1,
WSUA/MD2, WSUA/E
WSUD/MA1,
WSUD/MA2, WSUD/E
Board ID WSUA WSUD
Indicator
[Note]
An
Optical add interface,
Optical add interface,
Dn
Optical drop interface,
Optical drop interface,
EXIN Pass-through input optical interface, LC/PC connector
EXOUT
Pass-throuhg output optical
interface, LC/PC connector
-
OUT
Line output optical
-
OUT/D9 -
Line output optical
It acts as the optical drop
interface 9 when the board
is used as an extension
board.
Optical
interface
MON Local monitoring output optical interface, LC/PC connector
Laser warning sign
eyes.
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of WSU board is CLASS 1
Number of
occupied slot
2
Slots for board
Operation
precautions
status of WSU board are same as those of OTU board.


Optical Connections of WSU Board
WSU board is used in an ROAMD subsystem. Take WSUD/MA2 board as
example. Figure 96 shows the optical connections of two WSUD boards.
FIGURE 96 OPTCIAL CONNECTIONS OF WSUD/MA2 BOARD

As shown in Figure 96, each WSU board only supports the transceiving of
optical signals in one optical direction. The IN/OUT interface of WSU board
is connected to site A or site B.
The following describes the connection of WSU boards interfaces.
IN: It is connected to the OUT interface of EOPA board for accessing the
amplified aggregate optical signal.
OUT: It is connected to the IN interface of EOBA board to output
aggregate optical signal.
Dn: Dn interfaces are connected to line interfaces of OTU series boards
or aggregate interface of convergence boards (such as SRM/GEM/DSA
boards). Then the needed optical signals are output from the client
interfaces or tributary interfaces of these boards to user equipment.
A1/A2: optical add interface. A1/A2 interfaces are connected to the
OUT interface of OMU board. The CHn interfaces of OMU board are
connected to line interfaces of OTU series boards or aggregate interfaces
of convergence boards (such as SRM/GEM/DSA boards) so as to access
optical signals meeting ITU-T G.692 requirements.
EXIN/EXOUT interfaces of WSUD board at side A are respectively
connected to EXIN/EXOUT interfaces at side B.
Chapter 3 Boards

If extension WSUD boards are used for system expansion, connect a Dn
interface of the WSUD/MA2 board to the IN interface of a WSUD/e board.
The optical connections are showed in Figure 97.
FIGURE 97 OPTICAL CONNECTIONS OF WSUD/MA2 BOARD (WITH WSUA/E
BOARDS)

In the case that service broadcast function is needed together with the
add/drop configuration and port assignment functions, WSUA board should
be configured instead.
The configuration of WSU board is flexible. The adding/dropping of 8, 16, 24,
32 and 40 wavelengths can be implemented by configuring different
interfaces of WSU board.



The performance, alarm and event messages of WSU board are listed in
Table 99.
TABLE 99 PERFORMANCE, ALARM AND EVENT MESSAGES OF WSU BOARD
Type Item
Performance
Optical channel attenuation
Board environment temperature alarm
Alarm
WSS module failure alarm
MCU reset

WBM Board
Functions
WBM (Wavelength Blocking Multiplexing) board is configured in a
Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer (ROADM) subsystem to
implement the reconfiguration of add/drop wavelengths. With the
application of WBU board, the maintenance of existing system becomes
convenient when the add/drop wavelengths change.
WBM provides the following functions:
Supports the configuration of wavelengths with the spacing at 100 GHz,
adding wavelengths from 1 to 40 channels or passing wavelengths
through
Divides the multiplexed input optical signal (combining wavelengths with
the spacing at 100 GHz) into two parts: drop optical signal and
straight-through optical signal, so as to implement the add/drop or
straight-through of wavelengths with the spacing at 100 GHz
Supports manual/automatic configuration of add or straight-through
status for each wavelength in the EMS
Supports the optical power equalization for each wavelength channel of
output port
Provides the optical power detection function for line input interface,
drop interface, straight-through output interface, straight-through input
interface, line output interface and each wavelength channel
Chapter 3 Boards

All wavelengths will be blocked at the output port when the board is
power down. After the board restarts, the status before power-down can
recover automatically.
Operating Principle
Figure 98 illustrates the operating principle of WBM board.
FIGURE 98 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF WBM BOARD
ROAM Moduel
Control and
Communication Unit
Drop optical output
Straight-through
optical output
Straight-through
optical input
Line output
Line input
Add 1 Add 2 Add 40
...
...

WBM board consists of an ROAM module and a control and communication
unit. The following describes the function of each component of WBM board.
ROAM Module
Supports the configuration of wavelengths with the spacing at 100
GHz. Adds wavelengths from channel 1 to channel 40 or passes
wavelengths through according to actual configuration requirements.
The add or straight-through status of wavelengths can be set in the
EMS manually or automatically.
Divides the line input signal combining wavelengths with the spacing
at 100 GHz into two parts: drop optical signal and straight-through
optical signal
Implements the optical power equalization function for channels of
output interface with the following two modes:
1) Open loop control mode: In this mode, the ROAM module adjusts
the attenuation amount of Variable Optical Amplifier (VOA) to achieve
the power equalization.
2) Closed loop control mode: In this mode, the ROAM module controls
the attenuation amount of VOA by setting the object optical power of
each channel before MUX.
The adjustment range of attenuation is 0 to 20 dB. The attenuation
adjustment precision within the range from 0 to 10 dB is 0.7dB. The
attenuation adjustment precision within the range from 10 dB to 20
dB is 1.3dB.
When the power supply of the WBM board fails, the ROAM module will
block all wavelengths at the output interfaces. After the power supply
recovers, the status of all these wavelengths will recover too.


Detects and monitors the optical power of line input interface, drop
interface, straight-through output interface, straight-through input
interface, line output interface, as well as each wavelength channel,
and then reports the information to the EMS
Communicates with NCPF and APSF boards, executes the commands
issued by the EMS, and forwards configuration and adjustment
commands to the ROAM module

Figure 99 shows the front panel of WBM board.
FIGURE 99 FRONT PANEL OF WBM BOARD

4. Laser class sign

operations of WBM board.

Chapter 3 Boards

TABLE 100 DESCRIPTION OF WBM BOARD S FRONT PANEL AND RELATED
Board
Item
WBM
Board ID WBM
Indicator
An Optical add interface, n=1-40, LC/PC connector
DROP Optical drop interface, LC/PC connector
EXIN
Optical input interface of straight-through light, LC/PC
connector
EXOUT
Optical output interface of straight-through light, LC/PC
connector
IN Line optical input interface, LC/PC connector
Optical
interface
OUT Line optical output interface, LC/PC
Laser warning
sign
eyes.
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of WBM board is CLASS 1
Number of
occupied slot
2
Slots for WBM
board
Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and slot 8
Operation
precautions
status of WSB board are same as those of OTU board.

Optical Connections of WBM Board
Figure 100 illustrates the optical connections of WBM boards in an ROADM
subsystem.
As shown in Figure 100, an ROADM site needs two WBM boards, one
connected to upstream site and the other connected to downstream site.
Each WBM board supports the receiving and transmitting of optical signals in
one optical direction.


FIGURE 100 OPTICAL CONNECTIONS OF WBM BOARD

The following explains the optical connections in the transmitting direction
shown in Figure 100. The optical connections in the receiving direction are
similar to those in the transmitting direction.
Each WBM board only provides a pair of transmitting/receiving in one
optical direction, that is , the interface IN/OUT connects to site A or site
B.
IN: accesses the amplified aggregate signals, and connects to the
OUT interface on EOPA board.
OUT: outputs aggregate signals, and connects to the IN interface on
EOBA board.
DROP interface of WBM board is connected to IN interface of ODU board.
The optical signals output from CHn interface of ODU board, complying
with ITU-T G.692, can be output directly to the user equipments. The
signals are also transmitted to the line interface of OTU boards, or to the
aggregate interface of convergence board (SRM/GEM/DSA), and then
transmitted to the user equipments via the corresponding client interface
or tributary interface.
An interface is connected to the line interface of OTU board, or aggregate
interface of SRM/GEM/DSA board. And then the signals are transmitted
to the user equipments via the corresponding client interface to tributary
interface.
EXIN/EXOUT of WBM board at side A is respectively connected to
EXOUT/EXIN of WBM at side B.

Chapter 3 Boards

The performance, alarm and event messages of WBM board are listed in
Table 101.
TABLE 101 PERFORMANCE, ALARM AND EVENT MESSAGES OF WBM BOARD
Type Item
Input optical power
AWG working temperature offset
Performance
VOA attenuation amount
Board environment temperature over-threshold alarm
Board self-test failure alarm
Module failure alarm
Output power over upper threshold alarm
Output power below lower threshold alarm
Low input power too low alarm
Input power over upper threshold alarm
Input power below lower threshold alarm
Alarm
Temperature over-threshold alarm
MCU rest

SDM Board
Functions
SDM (Supervisory Division Multiplexing) board performs the
multiplexing/demultiplexing of signals of the main optical channel and
optical supervisory channel, cooperating with the EMS to implement
supervision function.


It is applicable to such cases which needs no EOA board due to short span.
The following two types of SDM board are available to replace EOBA board
and EOPA board.

Operating Principle
The operating principle of SDM board is illustrated in Figure 101.
FI GURE 101 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF SDM BOARD
1510/1550
Demultiplexer
1510/1550
Multiplexer
OSC
Lineinput Lineoutput
SDMR SDMT
Lineoutput Lineinput

Note: SDMR board has only 1510/1550 demultplexer while SDMT board has only
1510/1550 multiplexer.

SDMR: separates the optical supervisory channel signal (1510 nm) from the
main optical channel signal (1550 nm) in the line signal (1510 nm + 1550
nm).
SDMT: combines the optical supervisory channel signal (1510 nm) and the
main optical channel signal (1550 nm) and then sends the combined signal
(1510 nm + 1550 nm) to the line.

The front panels of SDMT and SDMR board are shown in Figure 102.
Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 102 FRONT PANEL OF SDM BOARD

SDMT SDMR

TABLE 102 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF SDM BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
I tem
Transmitting End SDM Receiving End SDM
Board ID SDMT SDMR
Indicator
[Note]
Laser warning sign
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of SDM board is CLASS 1
IN
1550 nm main optical channel
input interface, LC/PC connector
Line input interface, LC/PC
connector
Optical
interface
OUT
Line output interface, LC/PC
interface
1550 nm main optical channel
output interface, LC/PC connector
4. Laser class sign


Board
I tem
Transmitting End SDM Receiving End SDM
SIN
1510 nm optical supervisory
channel input interface, LC/PC
connector
-
SOUT -
1510 nm optical supervisory
channel output interface, LC/PC
connector
MON
Local monitoring output interface,
LC/PC connector
LC/PC connector
Number of occupied
slot
1 1
Slots for SDM board
Operation
precautions

Note: The relations between the status of SDM board and corresponding status of
indicators are same as those of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for the

Optical Connections of SDM Board
SDM board is configured in OTM equipment. The location of SDMT/SDMR
board and the optical connection relations with other boards are illustrated in
Figure 103.
FI GURE 103 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ON OF SDM BOARD
OTU1
1
OTU2
2
OTUn
n
OTU1
OTU2
OTUn
O
M
U
O
D
U
OPM
SDMR
IN
OSC
OSCT
OSC
SIN
MON
OUT
OUT
SOUT
MON
IN
SDMT
1
2
n

Chapter 3 Boards

The performance and alarm messages of SDM board are listed in
Table 103.
TABLE 103 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF SDM BOARD
Type I tem Remark
Input optical power Only for SDMR board
Performance
Output optical power Only for SDMT board
Only for SDMR board
Alarm
Only for SDMT board
Event - -

Optical Amplification Boards
EOA Enhanced Optical Amplifier
DRA Distributed Raman Amplifier
OA/OTU subrack

EOA Board
Function and Operating Principle
EOA (Enhanced Optical Amplifier) board adopts Erbium-Doped Fiber
Amplifier (EDFA) to amplify optical signals, which uses the full light
amplification mode to replace the original electrical regeneration mode. In
this way, both the cost and the complexity of the system are reduced.
EOA board provides the feature of high transient response, which can meet
the transmitting requirement of single-channel system at 10Gbit/s rate and
the long distance DWDM system. The saturated output power of EOA board
is up to 24 dBm.
EOA board also provides the following functions.
Gain major adjustment, gain lock and power clamp function
Gain lock: EOA board adopts the fixed gain amplification mode. The
gain lock value can be adjusted to meet the needs of different
regeneration distance. Within the full input and full operating


temperature range, the error of signal gain lock precision is no more
than 0.1 dB.
Power clamp: When the input optical power is too high or too low,
EOA board can control its output power with the power clamp
function to avoid the optical surge of EDFA. The power clamp
includes two modes:
Upper clamp: Under this mode, the output power always keeps the
nominal output value when the input power reaches the saturated
output power.
Lower clamp: It ensures that a certain small optical power will be
output from the EOA board when the EOA board has no input light.
Automatic Power Reduction (APR) function
When the system detects that there is no input light on the link, it will
shut down or reduce the output optical power of the EOA board
automatically. When the input light recovers, EOA board will work again.
In this way, the optical power level is always in the safe range while
operators maintain or repair fibers of the optical line.
APR: It acts on an OTS. When any OTS fails, all the other OTSs and
downstream alarms will not be influenced. During the APR
processing, the EOA board at each receiving end outputs clamped
optical power, while the EOA board at each transmitting end is shut
down.

Note:
OTS: It is an optical path between OTM/OADM and OLA, or between OLAs

Supervision function
EOA board has a 1510/1550 multiplexer and a 1510/1550 demultiplexer
to add and drop the supervisory wavelength (1510 nm). However, EOA
board does not process the supervisory signal (1510 nm).
EOA board also provides feature monitoring and alarm processing
functions, which will be implemented according to the requirement of
EMS.
EOA board can amplify optical signals in C/L band. In terms of its position
and function in the network, OA board falls into three types: Enhanced
Optical Booster Amplifier (EOBA), Enhanced Optical Line Amplifier (EOLA)
and Enhanced Optical Pre-Amplifier (EOPA), as described in Table 104.
According to different band and output power, the board can be classified
into several subtypes, as listed in Table 105.
TABLE 104 TYPE LI ST OF EOA BOARD
Type Position Function
EOBA
Located after light emitter of
OTM equipment regenerator
equipment
It boosts the emitting power so as to
extend the transmission distance.

Chapter 3 Boards

Type Position Function
EOLA
Located in the middle of an
OMS without dispersion
compersation
It inserts EDFA in the optical
transmission link to amplify optical
signals directly. Multiple EOLAs can be
used in an OMS as needed.
EOPA
Located at the end of an OMS
and before light receiver
It preamplifiers optical signals having
been attenuated through the optical
line so as to enhance the optical power
to meet the sensitivity of optical
receivers.
EONA
Located in the middle of an
OMS
It inserts EDFA in the optical
transmission link to amplify optical
signals directly. The gain range can be
adjusted greatly to meet the
requirements of different regeneration
distances. DCM module can be
inserted in the middle for the
dispersion compensation.

TABLE 105 LI ST OF BOARD SUBTYPE
Board
Type
Board
Subtype
Band
Output Optical
Power (dBm)
Remark
EOBAS C P20
Single-slot, LC/PC
connector
EOBAD CL P20
Double-slot, LC/PC
connector
EOBA
EOBAH CL 20<P26
Double-slot.
OUT interface:
E2000/APC
Other interfaces:
LC/PC
EOLAS C P20
Single-slot, LC/PC
connector
EOLAD CL P20
Double-slot, LC/PC
connector
EOLA
EOLAH CL 20<P26
Double-slot.
OUT interface:
E2000/APC
Other interfaces:
LC/PC
EOPAS C P20
Single-slot, LC/PC
connector
EOPA
EOPAD CL P20
Double-slot, LC/PC
connector
EONA
EONAD CL P20 Double-slot, LC/PC


Board
Type
Board
Subtype
Band
Output Optical
Power (dBm)
Remark
connector
EONAH CL 20<P26
Double-slot.
OUT interface:
E2000/APC
Other interfaces:
LC/PC

Different type of EOA board also provides the following features:
The saturation output power of EOBAH board is up to 26 dBm.
The features of EONA board are listed as follows:
Supports gain adjustment in a large range, which is up to 10 dB to
meet the requirements of different line and regeneration distance.
Supports the function of gain gradient adjustment. the adjustment
range is 0.5 dB to 1 dB to compensate the power difference of each
channel caused by the SRS effect in the long-distance DWDM
system.
Supports the output power adjustment in a large range. The range is
-10 dBm to the saturation output power.
Supports the function of inserted DCM attenuation.
EOBA/EOLA/EOPA board supports the gain adjustment to provide the
adjustment range up to 2 dB.

Operating Principle
Operating principle of EOBA/EOLA/EOPA
The operating principle of EOBA/EOLA/EOPA board is similar. Take EOLA
board for example, the operating principle is shown in Figure 104.
Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 104 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF EOLA BOARD
1510nm
1510nm
Line
Output 1510/1550
Demultiplexer
EDFA Coupler Coupler
1510/1550
Multiplexer
Optical
Power
Monitoring
EDFADrive
Circuit
Optical
Power
Monitoring
ControlandCommunication
Line
Input
OnlineMonitoringat
OutputInterface
1550nm 1550nm
1550nm
1550nm

After entering the EOLA board, the optical line signal is separated by the
1510/1550 demultiplexer into the signal with the wavelength 1510 nm and
that with the wavelength 1550 nm. The 1510 nm wavelength is sent to the
OSC/OSCF board while the 1550 nm wavelength is sent to the EDFA module
for amplification. After that, these two wavelengths are combined again by
the 1510/1550 multiplexer and then are output from the EOLA board.
The function of each module in the EOLA board is described as follows:
1510/1550 demultiplexer, 1510/1550 multiplexer
Located at the receiving and transmitting end of the EOLA board
respectively, the demultiplexer and the multiplexer implement the
separation and combination of the supervisory channel (1510 nm) and
the main optical channel (1550 nm).
The EOBA board only has the multiplexer; the OPA board only has the
demultiplexer; while the OLA board has both the demultiplexer and the
multiplexer.
Coupler
One coupler is after the 1510/1550 demultiplexer and another coupler is
before the 1510/1550 multiplexer. They extract some light from the
main optical channel signal and send it to two optical power monitoring
modules.
It receives the small amount of optical signal from the coupler, monitors
the optical power and implements the gain control. The optical power
monitoring module at the transmitting end also provides an online
monitoring interface for the purpose of monitoring the parameters such
as line spectrum and optical power with instruments without influencing
the traffic.
EDFA, EDFA drive circuit
The EDFA amplifies the optical signal with the wavelength 1550 nm. The
amplification is controlled by the EDFA drive circuit, which has the
functions of gain adjustment, power clamp, gain lock, APSD and APR.


The gain adjustment range of the OA board suitable for 32-channel
systems is 3 dB; while for the OA board suitable for 40-channel systems,
the gain adjustment range is 2 dB. The adjustment precision is 0.1 dB.
It checks the input/output optical power and reports it to the EMS. At the
same time, it receives control commands from the EMS.

Operating principle of EONA board
The operating principle of EONA board is illustrated in Figure 105.
FI GURE 105 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF EONA BOARD

After entering the EONA board, the optical line signal is separated by the
1510/1550 demultiplexer into the signal with the wavelength 1510 nm and
that with the wavelength 1550 nm. The 1510 nm wavelength is sent to the
OSC/OSCF board. On the other hand, the 1550 nm wavelength is sent to the
EDFA module for the first grade amplification, and then it is accessed into the
DCM module for dispersion compensation after gain adjustment in EVOA
module. Then, the 1550 nm wavelength is proceeded the second grade
amplification in EDFA module. After that, these two wavelengths are
combined again by the 1510/1550 multiplexer and then are output from the
EONA board.
The function of each module in the EONA board is described as follows:
1510/1550 demultiplexer, 1510/1550 multiplexer
Located at the receiving and transmitting end of the OA board
respectively, the demultiplexer and the multiplexer implement the
separation and combination of the supervisory channel (1510 nm) and
the main optical channel (1550 nm).
Coupler
Chapter 3 Boards

One coupler is after the 1510/1550 demultiplexer and another coupler is
before the 1510/1550 multiplexer. They extract some light from the
main optical channel signal and send it to two optical power monitoring
modules.
It receives the small amount of optical signal from the coupler, monitors
the optical power and implements the gain control. The optical power
monitoring module at the transmitting end also provides an online
monitoring interface for the purpose of monitoring the parameters such
as line spectrum and optical power with instruments without influencing
the traffic.
EDFA, EDFA drive circuit
The EDFA amplifies the optical signal with the wavelength 1550 nm. The
amplification is controlled by the EDFA drive circuit, which has the
functions of gain adjustment, power clamp, gain lock, APSD and APR.
The gain adjustment range of EONA board is 10 dB (5 dB). The
adjustment precision is 0.1 dB.
EVOA (Electrically Variable Optical Attenuator)
It adjusts optical attenuation according to the commands from EMS.
It checks the input/output optical power and reports it to the EMS. At the
same time, it receives control commands from the EMS.

EOA board can be divided into three types: EOBA, EOLA and EOPA.
EOBA board
Figure 106 illustrates the front panel of EOBA board.


FI GURE 106 FRONT PANEL OF EOBA BOARD

EOBAS EOBAD EOBAH

TABLE 106 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF EOBA BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
Item
EOBA
Board ID EOBAS EOBAD EOBAH
Label mn
Located below the board ID on the front panel.
m: two digits, indicating the amplification gain of
EOBA board. For example, 25 means the gain of
OBA board is 25 dB.
n: two digits, indicating the saturated output power of
EOBA board. For example, 20 means the output optical
power is 20 dBm.
Indicator
[Note]
4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

Board
Item
EOBA
Board ID EOBAS EOBAD EOBAH
IN Line input interface, LC/PC connector
SIN 1510 nm input interface, LC/PC connector Optical
interface
OUT
Line output
interface,
LC/PC
connector
Line output
interface,
LC/PC
connector
Line output
interface,
E2000/APC
connector
Laser warning sign
burning eyes.
Indicates that the laser class of EOBA board
Laser class sign
CLASS 3R CLASS 3B CLASS 3B
Number of occupied slot 1 2 2
Slots for OLA board
Always keep the optical connectors clean. Put on
the dust caps for the unused optical connectors
in time.
Note: The relations between the working status and corresponding indicator status
of EOBA board are same as those of OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for detailed
description.

EOLA board
Figure 107 illustrates the front panel of EOLA board. Table 107 describes
the front panel and related basic operations of EOLA board.


FI GURE 107 FRONT PANEL OF EOLAD BOARD

EOLAS EOLAD EOLAH

TABLE 107 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF EOLA BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
Item
EOLA
Board ID EOLAS EOLAD EOLAH
Label mn
OBA board is 27 dB.
power is 20 dBm.
Indicator
[Note]
Optical
4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

Board
Item
EOLA
Board ID EOLAS EOLAD EOLAH
SIN 1510 nm input interface, LC/PC connector
SOUT 1510 nm output interface, LC/PC connector
interface
OUT
Line output
interface,
LC/PC
connector
Line output
interface,
LC/PC
connector
Line output
interface,
E2000/APC
connector
Laser warning sign
burning eyes.
Indicates that the laser class of EOLA board
Laser class sign
CLASS 3R CLASS 3B CLASS 3B
Number of occupied slot 1 2 2
Slots for OLA board
in time.

description.

EOPA board
Figure 108 illustrates the front panel of EOLA board. Table 108 describes
the front panel and related basic operations of EOLA board.


FI GURE 108 FRONT PANEL OF EOPAD BOARD

EOPAS EOPAD

TABLE 108 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF EOPA BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
Item
EOPA
Board ID EOPAS EOPAD
Label mn
OBA board is 22 dB.
power is 12 dBm.
Indicator
[Note]
4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

Board
Item
EOPA
Board ID EOPAS EOPAD
Optical
interface
OUT Line output interface, LC/PC connector
Laser warning sign
burning eyes.
Indicates that the laser class of EOPA board
Laser class sign
CLASS 3R CLASS 3B
Number of occupied slot 1 2
Slots for OLA board
in time.

description.

EONA board
Figure 108 illustrates the front panel of EONA board. Table 108 describes
the front panel and related basic operations of EONA board.


FI GURE 109 FRONT PANEL OF EONA BOARD

EONAD EONAH

TABLE 109 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF EONA BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
Item
EONA
Board ID EONAD EONAH
Label mn
OBA board is 25 dB.
power is 20 dBm.
Indicator
[Note]
4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

Board
Item
EONA
Board ID EONAD EONAH
DCM1 DCM input interface, LC/PC connector
DCM2 DCM output interface, LC/PC connector
SIN 1510 nm input interface, LC/PC connector
MON1 Local monitoring output interface, LC/PC connector
MON2
Optical
interface
OUT
Line output interface,
LC/PC connector
Line output interface,
E2000/APC connector
Laser warning sign
burning eyes.
Laser class sign
Indicates that the laser class of EONA board is
CLASS 3B
Slots for OLA board
in time.

Optical Connections of EOA Board
Figure 110 illustrates typical optical connections of EOA boards.


FI GURE 110 TYPI CAL OPTI CAL CONNECTI ONS OF EOA BOARD
OSC OPM
EOLA
EOLA
EOBA
EOBA
EOPA
EOPA
EAST
Input
EAST
Output
OSC OSC
WEST
Output
WEST
Input
OPM OPM
OTM OTM OLA
OSC
OSC
OSC
OSC
OSC
OSC

EOBA board: receives multiplexed optical signal through IN interface,
and outputs the amplified signal through OUT interface. The monitoring
signal from OSC board is input to OBA board through SIN interface. The
MON interface is connected to OPM board.
EOPA board: receives optical line signal through IN interface and outputs
the amplified signal through OUT interface. It outputs the monitoring
signal to OSC board through SOUT interface. The MON interface is
connected to OPM board.
EOLA board: receives optical line signal to be amplified through IN
interface, and outputs amplified line signal through OUT interface. Its
SIN/SOUT interfaces are connected to the output/input interfaces of OSC
board. The MON interface is connected to OPM board.

The performance messages of EOA board are listed in Table 110.
TABLE 110 PERFORMANCE MESSAGES OF EOA BOARD
Type I tem Remark
Pump laser n bias current n=1-4
Pump TEC current
n=1-4, only EOA board with
TEC function has this
performance
Pump laser temperature offset
performance
Pump background PD current n=1-4-
Board Environment temperature -
Board
EDF temperature
Only EOA board of L board
has this performance.
Inner-modulation
interface
Amount of Optical attenuation
Only for EONA board
EOA Input
Interface
Chapter 3 Boards

Type I tem Remark
Pump reflection power
Only EOA with the output
power is higher than 24
dBm has this performance
EOA Output
Interface
Pump reflectance
Only EOA with the output
power is higher than 24
dBm has this performance

Note: for the pump laser n (n>1), the perfomance value is only exist if the number
of pump is more than one.

The alarm messages of EOA board are listed in Table 111.
TABLE 111 ALARM MESSAGES OF EOA BOARD
Type I tem Remark
Pump laser n bias current over-threshold
alarm
n=1-4
Pump laser n cooling current over-threshold
alarm
performance
Pump laser temperature offset
over-threshold
n=1-4
Pump laser n end-of-life alarm n=1-4-
Board Environment temperature
-
EDF temperature offset out of limit alarm
Only EOA board with TEC
function in L board has this
performance.
Modules failure or communication fault
alarm
-
Board
DSP operating alarm -
High input optical power alarm -
Low input optical power alarm -
Input optical power out of upper limit alarm -
EOA Input
Interface
Input optical power out of lower limit alarm -
High output optical power alarm -
Low output optical power alarm -
No output optical power alarm -
Output optical power out of upper limit
alarm
-
EOA Output
Interface
Output optical power out of lower limit
alarm
-


Type I tem Remark
High reflection power alarm
Only for EOA board with the
output power higher than
24 dBm
High reflectance alarm
Only for EOA board with the
output power higher than
24 dBm

The event messages of EOA board are listed in Table 112.
TABLE 112 EVENT MESSAGES OF EOA BOARD
Type I tem Remark
MCU reset -
DSP start-up -
DSP download program failure -
Board Port
Board data configuration is faulty -
EDFA pump laser automatic shut-down
It is only reported when the
board software operates
automatically rather than
when EMS sends commands
EDFA pump laser automatic startup
It is only reported when the
board software operates
automatically rather than
when EMS sends commands
Enter optical power control -
Output Port
Quit optical power control -
Internal Module
Interface
Attenuation adjustment failure
-

DRA Board
Functions
RAMAN amplifiers share the characteristics of small noise coefficient,
adjustable gain, flat gain, standard structure and high reliability. The DRA
board implements the distributed amplification of optical signals by using
RAMAN amplifier to feed the RAMAN pump light into transmission fiber in the
reverse direction. Cooperating with EDFA, it is applicable to single-hop
ultra-long distance systems.
The DRA board has the following functions.
Chapter 3 Boards

Supporting the amplification of wavelengths in C band, L band and C+L
band (1529 nm-1604 nm), and implementing ultra-capacity and
ultra-long distance optical fiber communication
Supporting gain adjustment, gain spectrum adjustment and gain
stabilization
Gain adjustment: Adjust pump laser optical power, combining with
gain adjustment of EDFA. During the adjustment, it adopts slow
change control so as to improve system security.
Gain spectrum adjustment: Adjust optical power of each pump laser
respectively to implement the spectrum adjustment so as to solve
problems of channel flatness.
Gain stabilization: Stabilize pump power.
Laser automatic shut-down
Performance monitoring and alarm processing, performing
corresponding operations according to requirements of EMS

Operating Principle
The operating principles of DRA board are different for the amplification of
C-band wavelengths and L-band wavelengths. Figure 111 and Figure 112
illustrates the operating principles of DRA board in case of C band and C+L
band wavelength amplification respectively.
FI GURE 111 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF DRA BOARD ( C BAND)
RAMAN Pump Module
(C-Band)
C-band optical
signal input
C-band optical
signal output
Extended pump
light
Output online
monitoring



FI GURE 112 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF DRA BOARD ( C+L BAND)
RAMAN Pump Module
(C-Band)
C+L band optical signal input
C+L band optical
signal output
Extended pump light
C band output
online monitoring
RAMAN Pump Module
(L-Band)
Control and Communication
Unit
Control and Communication
Unit
L band output online monitoring
DRA (L band)
DRA (C band)

Two types of RAMAN pump modules are available for DRA board, C-band
module and L-band module. C-band RAMAN module works independently in
system, while L-Band module can only work with the cooperation of C-band
module.
C-band RAMAN module: Works independently to amplify C-band optical
signals. It has the functions of output power detection, pump light
multiplexing and pump/signal coupling.
L-band RAMAN module: Only provides driver for pump source and
amplifies L-band optical signals. It must be used with C-band together.
While L-band RAMAN module and C-band RAMAN module work together,
the DRA board receives optical signals through the input interface of
C-band module. C-band signals are amplified in C-band module. L-band
signals are amplified in L-band and then the amplified signals are input to
C-band module through the extended pump optical interface. Finally, the
C-band module outputs amplified C+L band optical signals together.
Chapter 3 Boards

The front panel of DRA board is illustrated in Figure 113.Table 113 describes
the front panel and related operations of DRA board.
FI GURE 113 FRONT PANEL OF DRA BOARD

DRAC-band DRAL-band
TABLE 113 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF DRA BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
I tem
DRAC-band DRAL-band
Board ID DRA DRA
Indicator
[Note]
Laser warning
sign
1. Running and alarm
indicators
4. Laser class sign


Board
I tem
DRAC-band DRAL-band
IN
C-band or C+L band optical signal
input interface, E2000/APC
connector
-
OUT
C-band or C+L band optical signal
output interface, LC/PC connector
-
MON
LC/PC connector
-
EXT
Extended interface for L-band
pump light, LC/PC connector
-
PMON
C-band pump monitoring output
L-band pump monitoring output
Optical
interface
POUT -
L-band pump light output
Number of
occupied slot
2 2
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class sign of DRA is CLASS 3B
Slots for DRA
board
Operation
precautions
A board slot at the right side of DRA should be reserved without
inserted board at the right of DRA board for heat dissipation.
In the application of DRA board, connectors used in optical line
should be as few as possible. The reflectance of fiber connecting
surface should be no more than -30 dB so as to ensure the
amplification efficiency of DRA board.
If line optical fiber route changes or optical fiber changes, fiber
pigtails connected to DRA board should be recleaned. Record
reflectance and reflected power of DRA board.
Cleaning
precautions
Use fiber microscope to observe optical fibers to check whether they
are clean while cleaning fiber surfaces for DRA board. The reflectance
should be no more than -30 dB (the reflectance alarm threshold is -15
dB).
Clean fiber surface once you plug/unplug fiber pigtails or replace DRA
board.

Note: The relationship between the status of DRA board and corresponding status of
description.

Chapter 3 Boards

Optical Connections of DRA Board
C-band DRA board can be used separately to implement the amplification
of C-band optical signals.
L-band DRA band must be used with C-band DRA board together.
Connect the POUT interface of L-band DRA board to the EXT interface of
C-band DRA board to implement the amplification of C and L band optical
signals.
In ultra-long distance systems, DRA board is used with small gain OA
boards in series. The location and optical connection relation of DRA
board is shown in Figure 69.

The performance and alarm messages of DRA board are listed in Table 114.
TABLE 114 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF DRA BOARD
Type I tem Remark
Laser TEC current -
Only C-band DRA board
Output optical power of pump -
Reflected optical power of pump -
Pump reflectance -

Module temperature alarm -
Pump reflection power high alarm -
Pump refection rate high alarm -
Pump laser bias current over-threshold alarm -
Pump laser TEC current over-threshold alarm -
Alarm
Pump temperature offset alarm -
Pump laser automatic shut-down -
Event
Pump laser automatic start up -



Power Management Boards
LAC Line Attenuation Compensator
OWM Optical Wavelength Monitor
MCPD Multiple Channel Power Detector
OA/OTU subrack

LAC Board
Functions
The LAC board adjusts its electrically variable optical attenuator (EVOA)
through the EMS according to measured line optical power to ensure the
power of each span, received power at receiving end and OSNR keep normal.
The operating wavelength range of LAC board is C band or L band. The
intrinsic insertion loss is less than 2 dB. The adjustment range of EVOA is 2
dB-26 dB, the adjustment precision is 0.5 dB and adjustment step is 0.2 dB.
LAC board includes two types: LACG and LACT.
LACG board: It has two EVOAs, being applicable to OLA, OADM and
back-to-back OTM sites.
LACT board: It has one EVOA, being applicable to single-end OTM sites.
The LAC board supports the monitoring function for input power and output
power.
LAC board with Gain Flattening Filter (GFF) can compensate DWDM spectral
dipping caused by Simulated RAMAN Scattering effect to improve
transmitting performance of the system.
Operating Principle
Taking an LACG board as example, Figure 114 illustrates its operating
principle.
Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 114 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF LAC BOARD ( LACG)
Coupler
Coupler
Coupler
Coupler
EVOA
OpticalPower
MonitoringUnit
OpticalPower
MonitoringUnit
OpticalPower
MonitoringUnit
OpticalPower
MonitoringUnit
EVOADrive
Circuit
Controland
Communiction
Unit
EVOA
OUT1
IN2
IN1
OUT2
GFF
GFF

Note: Compared with LACG board, LACT board reduces an optical direction.
The EMS sends attenuation adjustment command through the control and
communication unit in LAC board. Upon receiving the command, the EVOA
drive circuit drives corresponding EVOA in the optical receiving module to
adjust attenuation amount.
EVOA: electrically variable optical attenuator; an EVOA is configured for
each optical direction, which is driven by EVOA drive circuit.
Coupler: separates optical signal from the main optical channel and
sends part of the signal to the optical power measuring unit.
EVOA drive circuit: reports measured input optical power and output
optical power to control and communication unit. Meanwhile, it receives
control commands from the control and communication unit and sends
adjustment command to EVOA.
Optical power measuring unit: measures output optical power and input
optical power, and feeds it to EVOA drive circuit.
GFF: uses to compensate the DWDM spectral dipping caused by SRS
effect. GFF is an optional element.
It reports the power value received from the optical power monitoring
module to the EMS, and receives control commands from the EMS.

The front panels of LACG board and LACT board are illustrated in Figure 115.
Table 115 describes the front panel and related basic operations of LAC
board.


FI GURE 115 FRONT PANEL OF LAC BOARD

LACG Board LACT Board
TABLE 115 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF LAC BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
I tem
LACG
LACT
Board ID LACG LACT
Indicator
[Note]
Laser warning sign
eyes.
IN
- Optical input interface, LC/PC
connector
OUT
- Optical output interface, LC/PC
connector
Optical
interface
IN1
Optical input interface 1, LC/PC
connector
-
Chapter 3 Boards

Board
I tem
LACG
LACT
OUT1
Optical output interface 1,
LC/PC connector
-
IN2
Optical input interface 2, LC/PC
connector
-
OUT2
Optical output interface 2,
LC/PC connector
-
Number of occupied
slot
1
1
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of LAC board is CLASS 1
Slots for LAC board
Operation
precautions

Note: The relations between the status of LACG/LACT board and corresponding
status of indicators are same as those of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for
the detailed description.

Optical Connections of LAC Board
The LACG board is applicable to OLA, OADM and back-to-back OTM sites
while the LACT board is applicable to single-end OTM sites.
The optical connections of LAC boards can be divided into two types, as
described in Figure 116 and Figure 117 respectively. For the first connection
way shown in Figure 116, LACT boards are usually configured after EOBA
board, while LACG boards are configured before EOLA board. LACT boards
are configured before EOPA boards, while LACG boards are configured before
EOLA boards as shown in Figure 117.
FI GURE 116 THE OPTI CAL CONNECTI ON OF LAC BOARDS ( 1)
EOLA EOBA
EOPA
LACT
LACG
EOBA EOPA EOLA LACT
OTM OLA OTM



FI GURE 117 THE OPTI CAL CONNECTI ON OF LAC BOARDS ( 2)
EOLA
EOBA
EOPA
LACT
LACG
EOBA
EOPA EOLA
LACT
OTM OLA OTM

The performance and alarm messages of LAC board are listed in Table 116.
TABLE 116 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF LAC BOARD
Type I tem
Performance
Input optical power
High input optical alarm
No output optical alarm
Low output optical alarm
No input optical alarm
Alarm
Low input optical alarm
Attenuation adjustment failure
MCU reset Event
Data configuration of board is faulty

OWM Board
Functions
OWM (Optical Wavelength Monitor) board functions to supervise central
frequency drift of optical channels after these channels have been
multiplexed and then send the frequency adjustment message to NCPF
board. Each OWM board can implement the wavelength control for
bidirectional 80 C-band wavelengths.
The impact of frequency drift is relatively small in a DWDM system with the
channel spacing at 100 GHz. However, in a system with higher single
channel rate and smaller channel spacing (for example, in the system with
the spacing at 50 GHz), the frequency drift will influence the system stability
directly.
Chapter 3 Boards

In an 80-channel DWDM system with the spacing at 50 GHz consisting of
ZXWM M900, OWM board, multiplexing type boards, OTU series boards, EOA
board, master board (NCPF/NCPF) and the EMS ZXONM E300 can be
combined to build up a centralized wavelength supervision subsystem to
improve the stability and precision of wavelength control.

Note: For detailed knowledge of integrated wavelengh supervision subsystem,
please refer to Appendix C in this manual.

OWM board functions to supervise central frequency drift of optical channels
after multiplexing and send frequency adjustment message to NCP/NCPF
board.
Each OWM board can implement the wavelength control for bidirectional 80
C-band or L-band wavelengths.

Operating Principle
The operating principle of OWM board is illustrated in Figure 118.
FI GURE 118 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF OWM BOARD
12
Optical
Switch
TF
Wavelength
Supervisor
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
a
n
d
C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
U
n
i
t
TFDriveCircuit
OpticalSwitch
DriveCircuit
NCP
or
NCPF
Reference
wavelength
C/L-bandinput
light1
C/L-band
inputlight2
Detection
wavelength
Detection
wavelengh
Wavelengthcontrol
message

OWM board consists of a 12 optical switch, tunable filter (TF), wavelength
supervisor, drive circuits and the control and communication unit.
12 optical switch: selects aggregate optical signals to be detected. Each
OWM board can only detect either C-band 80-channel aggregate signal
or L-band 80-channel aggregate signal.
TF: uses narrow-band tunable filter to get current detection wavelength,
which is set in the EMS ZXONM E300.
Wavelength supervisor: monitors wavelength offset according to the
detection wavelength got from the TF. It also acts as synchronization
check device during wavelength adjustment.
Drive circuits: includes optical switch drive circuit and TF drive circuit.
They receive control commands from the control and communication unit
and then drive the 12 optical switch and TF.



Control and communication unit: drives optical switch and TF via optical
switch drive circuit and TF drive circuit. It calculates wavelength offset
according to the detection wavelength and reference wavelength got
from the wavelength supervisor. It also sends adjustment command to
NCP/NCPF board.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicator
The front panel of OWM board is illustrated in Figure 119. Table 117
describes the front panel and related basic operations of OWM board.
FI GURE 119 FRONT PANEL OF OWM BOARD

TABLE 117 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF OWM BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
I tem
OWM
Board I D OWM
Indicator
[Note]
Laser warning sign
eyes.
4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

Board
I tem
OWM
IN1
Optical input interface 1 for C/L-band multiplexed signal, LC/PC
connector
Optical
interface
IN2
Optical input interface 2 for C/L-band multiplexed signal, LC/PC
connector
Number of occupied
slot
1
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OWM board is CLASS 1
Slots for OWM board
Operation
precautions

Note: The relations between the status of OWM board and corresponding status of

Optical Connections of OWM Board
OWM board is configured at the transmitting end of the system.
Each OWM board only detects two C/L-band 80-channel optical signals.
Therefore, a 160-channel bidirectional node needs two OWM boards. An
80-channel four-direction node also needs two OWM boards.
All optical transponder boards supervised by an OWM board must be
managed by the same NCP/NCPF board with the OWM board. That is, the
OWM board and optical transponder boards must be installed in the cabinet
managed by the same NCP/NCPF board.
For the detailed configuration of OWM board, please refer to Appendix C in
this manual.



The performance and alarm messages are listed in Table 118.
TABLE 118 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF OWM BOARD
Type I tem Remark
Performance Board environment temperature -
Wavelength offset over-threshold alarm
Alarm threshold: wavelength
offset is out of 5 GHz
Alarm threshold: temperature is
out of 0-65
Alarm
Module failure alarm -
Supervision circuit damage or device fault -
Optical switch failure -
Successful wavelength adjustment -
Unable to supervise wavelength -
Wavelength band error -
Unadjustable object board -
Adjustment failed several times -
Wavelength adjustment time out -
Data error -
Data type do not match for the board type -
Event
Agent can not find the corresponding
wavelength or board
-

OPM Board
Functions
The OPM board implements the supervision of optical channel performance,
measuring parameters of each optical channel, such as optical power,
central wavelength and OSNR, and then reports these data to the EMS. Each
OPM board detects performances of four optical interfaces.
The precision for parameter measurement is as follows.
Optical power: 1.0 dBm
Central wavelength: 0.1 nm
OSNR: 1.5 dB (OSNR<25 dB)

Chapter 3 Boards

Operating Principle
The operating principle of OPM board is illustrated in Figure 120.
FI GURE 120 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF OPM BOARD
Optical
switch
Detecting
and
Processing
Unit

As shown in Figure 120, the OPM board has four optical interfaces. The
detecting and processing unit measures parameters of each optical channel.
Then the control and communication unit reports the detected performance
data to the EMS, which can issue commands to query optical channel
parameters through the control and communication unit.

The front panel of OPM board is illustrated in Figure 121. The front panel and
related basic operations are described in Table 119.


FI GURE 121 FRONT PANEL OF OPM BOARD

TABLE 119 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF OPM BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
I tem
OPM
Board ID OPM
Indicator
[Note]
Laser warning sign
eyes.
IN1 Optical input interface 1, LC/PC connector
Optical
interface
Number of occupied
slot
2
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OPM board is CLASS 1
Slots for OPM board
4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

Board
I tem
OPM
Operation
precautions
Connect IN1, IN2, IN3 or IN4 interface to MON interface of a
board to measure the parameters of optical channel occupied
by this interface. The measured result is displayed in the
ZXONM E300 EMS.

Note: The relationship between the status of OPM board and corresponding status of
description.

The performance and alarm messages of OPM board are listed in Table 120.
TABLE 120 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF OPM BOARD
Type I tem Remark
Optical power of channel
(optical interface 1-4)
-
Central wavelength of channel
-
Performance
OSNR of channel
-
No channel optical power alarm
Alarm threshold: 5 dB less than
normal optical power
Wavelength offset alarm
Alarm threshold: the offset from
nominal wavelength is out of the
range 0.15 nm
Alarm
OSNR alarm
Alarm threshold: 3 dB less than
the recommended OSNR index
Event
Optical switch failure
-



MCPD Board
Board Function
MCPD board is applied in the ultra-long span system with DRA or RPU board,
to correctly and quickly verify different statuses, such as no optical input,
ASE noise input, and +ASE noise of multi-channel signal input. The position
of MCPD board in the system is described in Figure 122.

Note: For detail description about RPU board, please refer to Unitrans ZXWM M900
(V2.20) Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing Optical Transmission System RPOA
Subsystem Users Manual.
FI GURE 122 THE POSI TI ON OF MCPD BOARD I N THE SYSTEM

MCPD board provides the functions described as follows:
Supports optical power monitoring for the aggregate input optical, and
reports the data to the EMS system.
Correctly monitors if the modulation signals exist in the input optical.
Assists with APR and APSD functions.
Supports the application in C+L band.

Chapter 3 Boards

Operating Principle
The operating principle of MCPD board is shown in Figure 123.
FI GURE 123 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF MCPD BOARD
O/E
Conversion
Power
Monitoring
ControlandCommunication
Signal
Spectrum
Monitoring

After O/E conversion, the aggregate optical signals are accessed to the
spectrum monitoring and power monitoring. And then the control and
communication unit reports the monitoring result to the EMS. EMS system
can send the query commands for the channel parameter via control and
communication unit.
O/E conversion
It converts the aggregate optical signals into the electric signals, and
then sends the signals to the spectrum monitoring unit and power
monitoring unit.
Spectrum monitoring
It monitors the spectrum features and controls the gain for the electrical
signals after O/E conversion.
Power monitoring
It monitors the power of input power.
It reports the signal spectrum and optical power to EMS, and accepts the
control commands from EMS.

Performance and Alarm
THE PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF MCPD BOARD ARE LI STED I N TABLE 121.


TABLE 121 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF MCPD BOARD
Type I tem Remark
Performance Input optical power -
Board self-test failure alarm -
Low optical power alarm -
No optical power alarm -
Alarm
LOS alarm -
MCU reset -
Data error
-
Event
Board criterion imcomplement
Board criterion includes optical power
criterion and ASE monitoring voltage
criterion.

The front panel of MCPD board is illustrated in Figure 124. The front panel
and related basic operations are described in Table 119.
FI GURE 124 FRONT PANEL OF MCPD BOARD

4. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

TABLE 122 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF MCPD BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
I tem
MCPD
Board ID MCPD
Indicator
[Note]
Laser warning sign
eyes.
Optical
interface
IN Optical input interface, LC/PC connector
Number of occupied
slot
1
Slots for OPM board
Operation
precautions
Connect IN interface to MON interface of a board to measure
the parameters of optical channel occupied by this interface.
The measured result is displayed in the ZXONM E300 EMS.

Protection Boards
OP Optical Protect Board
OPCS Optical Protect for Channel Section
OPMS Optical Protect for Mux Section
OMCP Optical Multi-Channel Protection
OA/OTU subrack

OP Board
Functions
The OP board is used to implement OMS line 1+1 protection and OCH 1+1
protection function.


It performs protection switching or restoring based on received optical power,
manual switching/restoring command from EMS or automatic protection
switching (APS) external command (complying with ITU-T G.841).
With the ZXONM E300 EMS, users can manage current protection switching
status of OP board.

Operating Principle
The operating principles of OP board are illustrated in Figure 125.
FI GURE 125 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF OP BOARD
Coupler
12
switch
Coupler
Coupler
TOUT1
TOUT2
ROUT
TIN
RIN1
RIN2

As shown in Figure 125, there are two directions: concurrent transmitting
direction from TIN to TOUT1/TOUT2, preferred receiving direction from
RIN1/RIN2 to ROUT.
In concurrent transmitting direction: Optical signal received through TIN
are divided into two optical signals with same wavelength by the coupler,
and then output through TOUT1 and TOUT2. These two optical signals
protect each other.
In preferred receiving direction: Optical signals received through RIN1
and RIN2 are input to corresponding couplers separately. Part of light
output from couplers is input to the control and communication unit for
optical power measurement. The other part of light is input to the 12
switch, which selects optical signal according to APS controllers
instruction and measured optical power. Finally, the selected optical
signal is output through ROUT port.

Chapter 3 Boards

The front panel of OP board is illustrated in Figure 126.
FI GURE 126 FRONT PANEL OF OP BOARD

Table 123 describes the front panel and related basic operations of OP board.
TABLE 123 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF OP BOARD AND RELATED BASI C OPERATI ONS
Board
I tem
OP
Board ID OP
Indicator
[Note]
TIN Transmitting end input interface, LC/PC connector
TOUT1
Transmitting end working line/channel output interface, LC/PC
connector

Optical
interface

TOUT2
Transmitting end protection line/channel output interface, LC/PC
connector
2. Optical switching status indicator
5. Laser class sign


Board
I tem
OP
ROUT Receiving end output interface, LC/PC connector
RIN1
Receiving end working line/channel output interface, LC/PC
connector
Optical
interface
RIN2
Receiving end protection line/channel output interface, LC/PC
connector
Number of occupied
slot
1
Laser warning
sign
eyes.
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OP board is CLASS 1
Slots for OP board
Operation
precautions

Table 124 lists the relationship between the board status and corresponding
status of indicators.
TABLE 124 CORRESPONDENCE RELATI ONS BETWEEN THE WORKI NG STATUS AND
I NDI CATOR STATUS OF OP BOARD
Indicators
Working Status
NOM (Green) ALM (Red) STA
for configuration.
alternately.
Off
normally, and no
alarm occurs.
Flashing slowly and
regularly
Off -
normally, and some
alarm occurs.
Flashing slowly and
regularly
On -
Board initialing On
Flashing slowly and
regularly
Off
for download
Off
Downloading status
Off
Switching alarm
Flashing slowly and
regularly
- On (red)
No switching
Flashing slowly and
regularly
- On (green)
Chapter 3 Boards

Note:
STA bi-color indicators are green and red.
The - symbol means that the indicator status is indefinite.

Optical Connections of OP Board
OP board can be used to implement OCH 1+1 protection and OMS 1+1
protection. The following introduces these two kinds of protection modes
respectively.
OCH 1+1 Protection
OP board applies the operating principle of concurrent transmitting and
preferential receiving to implement OCH 1+1 protection. Two
configuration modes are available for OCH 1+1 protection function: OTU
redundancy configuration and OTU shared configuration.
OTU redundancy configuration mode
In this mode, a pair of transmitter and receiver OTU type boards is
configured on the working channel and the protection channel
respectively. For OCH protection, OP boards are located before
transmitting-end OTU board in optical terminal and after
receiving-end OTU board.
The OTU redundancy configuration mode is applicable to both chain
networks and ring networks. Figure 127 illustrates the optical
connection relation of OTU redundancy OCH 1+1 protection in a chain
network.
FI GURE 127 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ONS OF OP BOARD ( OTU 1+1 PROTECTI ON, OTU
REDUNDANCY MODE I N CHAI N NETWORK)

Figure 128 illustrates the optical connection relation in a ring
network.


FI GURE 128 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ONS OF OP BOARD ( OTU 1+1 PROTECTI ON, OTU
REDUNDANCY MODE I N RI NG NETWORK)
O
M
U
O
P
Protection channel
OTU
O
D
U
O
M
U
O
D
U
O
D
U
O
M
U
O
D
U
O
M
U
O
P
Working channel
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU

Transmitting end: The TIN interface of OP board is connected to
transmitting optical interface of user equipment. The TOUT1 and
TOUT2 interfaces are connected to client-side receiving optical
interfaces of OTU board on the working channel and the protection
channel respectively.
Receiving end: The ROUT interface of OP board is connected to
receiving optical interface of user equipment. The RIN1 and RIN2
interfaces are connected to client-side transmitting optical interfaces
of OTU board on the working channel and the protection channel
respectively.
OTU shared configuration mode
In this mode, a pair of transmitter OTU and receiver OTU are shared
in the working channel and the protection channel. OP boards are
located after transmitting-end OTU board in optical terminal and
before receiving-end OTU board.
The OTU shared configuration mode is only applicable to ring
networks. Figure 129 illustrates the optical connection relation of OP
board in the OTU shared configuration mode.
Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 129 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ON OF OP BOARD ( OTU 1+1 PROTECTI ON)
O
M
U
O
P
Protection channel
OTU
O
D
U
O
M
U
O
D
U
O
D
U
O
M
U
O
D
U
O
M
U
O
P
Working channel
OTU
OTU
OTU

Transmitting end: TIN interface of OP board is connected to
transmitting optical interface at line side of OTU board. TOUT1 and
TOUT2 interfaces are connected to CHn optical interfaces of OMU
boards on the working channel and the protection channel
respectively.
Receiving end: ROUT interface of OP board is connected to receiving
optical interface at line side of OTU board. RIN1 and RIN2 interfaces
are connected to CHn optical interfaces of ODU boards on the working
channel and the protection channel respectively.

OMS 1+1 Protection
For OMS protection, OP boards are located after multiplexed signal at the
transmitting end of OTM equipment and before multiplexed signal at the
receiving end of OTM equipment. According to the different positions of
EOA boards, two configuration modes are available for OMS 1+1
protection function: EOA shared configuration mode and EOA
redundancy configuration mode.
EOA shared configuration mode
In this mode, a pair of EOBA/EOPA board is shared on the working
channel and the protection channel. OP boards are located after
transmitting-end EOBA board in optical terminal and before
receiving-end EOPA board, as shown in Figure 130.


FI GURE 130 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ON OF OP BOARD ( OA SHARED CONFI GURATI ON MODE)
O
M
D
O
P
O
P
Adirectionline1
O
D
U
O
D
U
O
M
U
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Adirectionline2
EOBA
EOBA
EOPA
EOPA
Line1-WorkingchannelLine2-Protectionchannel
Bdirectionline1
Bdirectionline2 .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
n
3
2
1
n
3
2
1
n
3
2
1
n
3
2

Transmitting end: TIN interface of OP board is connected to OUT
interface of EOBA board. TOUT1 and TOUT2 interfaces are connected
to line fibers on the working channel and the protection channel
respectively.
Receiving end: ROUT interface of OP board is connected to IN
interface of EOPA board. RIN1 and RIN2 interfaces are connected to
line fibers of ODU boards on the working channel and the protection
channel respectively.
EOA redundancy mode
In this mode, a pair of transmitter and receiver OTU type boards is
configured on the working channel and the protection channel
respectively. OP boards are located before transmitting-end OTU
board in optical terminal and after receiving-end OTU board, as
shown in Figure 131.
FI GURE 131 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ON OF OP BOARD ( EOA REDUNDANCY CONFI GURATI ON
MODE)
O
M
D
O
P
O
P
ADirectionline1

O
D
U
O
D
U
O
M
U
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU

n

OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU

n
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU

n

n
ADirectionline2
BDirectionline1
BDirectionline2
Line1-WorkingchannelLine2-Protectionchannel
EOBA
EOBA
EOPA
EOPA
EOP
A
EOBA
EOPA
EOBA

Chapter 3 Boards

Transmitting end: TIN interface of OP board is connected to OUT
interface of OMU board. TOUT1 and TOUT2 interfaces are connected
to IN interface on the working channel and the protection channel
respectively.
Receiving end: ROUT interface of OP board is connected to IN
interface of ODA board. RIN1 and RIN2 interfaces are connected to
OUT interface on the working channel and the protection channel
respectively.

The performance and alarm messages are listed in Table 125.
TABLE 125 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF OP BOARD
Type I tem Remark
Working channel input optical power -
Performance
Protection channel input optical power -
No working channel input optical power
Low working channel input optical power
-
Alarm
No protection channel input optical power
Low protection channel input optical power
-
Optical switch failure -
Optical switch protection switching -
Optical switch restoring -
Event
Repeat switching event
When OP board receives two
different switching commands
in 50 ms, it will only perform
the first switching and report
alarm to EMS.

OPMS Board
Functions
OPMS (Optical Protect for Mux Section) board is used to implement the
optical multiplex section shared protection function.
Two types of OPMS board are available: OPMSS board with preventing
resonance switch and OPMSN without preventing resonance switch.



Operating Principle
Figure 132 illustrates the operating principle of OPMS board.
FIGURE 132 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF OPMS BOARD
Optical Swich
Controlling Unit
Protection channel
Working channel
Working channel
Protection channel
Protection channel
Working channel
Working channel
Protection channel
Checking and Controlling
Circuit
A

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
B

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n

OPMS board performs the protection switching when it receives the
switching command sent by the APS controller of OSCF/APSF board. It also
accepts and conducts the forcible switching or recovery command sent from
NCPF board. The protection switching and recovery is implemented by the
optical switch in OPMS board.

The front panel of OPMS board is shown in Figure 133.
Chapter 3 Boards

FIGURE 133 FRONT PANEL OF OPMS BOARD

operations of the OPMS board.
TABLE 126 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTIONS OF OPMS BOARD AND RELATED BASIC
OPERATIONS
Board
Item
OPMS
Board ID OPMS
ALM Alarm indicator, red Indicator
STA Optical switch status indicator, bi-color (red-green)
Laser warning
sign
eyes.
ARO
A-direction red-ribbon output optical interface
SC/PC connector Optical
interface
ARI1
A-direction local red-ribbon input optical interface
SC/PC connector
3. Optical switch status indicator


Board
Item
OPMS
BRO1
B-direction local red-ribbon output optical interface
SC/PC connector
BRI
B-direction red-ribbon input optical interface
SC/PC connector
ABO
A-direction blue-rippon output optical interface
SC/PC connector
BRI1
B-direction local red-ribbon input optical interface
SC/PC connector
ARO1
A-direction local red-ribbon output optical interface
SC/PC connector
BBI
B-direction blue-ribbon input optical interface
SC/PC connector
ARI
A-direction red-ribbon input optical interface
SC/PC connector
BBO1
B-direction local blue-ribbon output optical interface
SC/PC connector
ABI1
A-direction local blue-ribbon input optical interface
SC/PC connector
BRO
B-direction red-ribbon output optical interface
SC/PC connector
ABI
A-direction blue-ribbon input optical interface
SC/PC connector
ABO1
A-direction local blue-ribbon output optical interface
SC/PC connector
BBI1
B-direction local blue-ribbon input optical interface
SC/PC connector
Optical
interface
BBO
B-direction blue-ribbon output optical interface
SC/PC connector
Number of
occupied slot
2
Slots for board
Operation
precautions
Table 127 lists the relationship between the board status and the status of
corresponding indicators.
Chapter 3 Boards

OF OPMS BOARD
Indicator Status
Working Status
NOM (Green) ALM (Red) STA (Bi-color)
Waiting for
configuration
OFF
Running normally
Flashing slowly
and regularly
OFF -
Alarming
Flashing slowly
and regularly
ON -
Initializing
indicator flash quickly three times.
OFF
Downloading status
indicator flash quickly at the same
time.
OFF
A-direction switching
alarm
Flashing slowly
and regularly
-
Continuously lit
in red
B-direction switching
alarm
Flashing slowly
and regularly
-
Continuously lit
in green

OPMS board has only event messages as listed in Table 129.
TABLE 128 EVENT MESSAGES OF OPMS BOARD
Type Item
Performance -
Alarm -
Control optical switch for status switching
Event
Online upgrade of software

Configuration of OPMS Board
During the configuration of multiplex section shared protection, wavelengths
carrying services should be different. Working wavelengths and protection
wavelengths of outer ring and inner ring should be assigned symmetrically.
For example, 16 wavelengths (192.1 THz to 193.8 THz) are used as working
wavelengths of outer ring, while 16 wavelengths (194.3 THz to 196.0 THz)
are used as working wavelengths of inner ring.
As shown in Figure 134, a pair of services is transmitted between node A and
node B.


FIGURE 134 CONFIGURATION FOR MULTIPLEX SECTION SHARED PROTECTION
B
D F E
A H
G
C
21(FE)
21(FE)
43(EF)
43(EF)
43(AB)
21(BA)
21(BA)
43(AB)

The service from node B to node A is carried by wavelength 21 (outer ring)
while the service from node A to node B is carried by wavelength 43 (inner
ring). In this way, the working wavelength 21 and 43 can be used repeatedly
between other nodes in the ring network. The wavelength 21 on the inner
ring can act as the protection wavelength of the wavelength 21 on the outer
ring. Similarly, the wavelength 43 on the outer ring can act as the protection
wavelength of the wavelength 43 on the inner ring, so as to implement the
shared protection of multiple services on the network.
To configure the multiplex section shared protection, an OPMS board with
preventing resonance switch (OPMSS) should be configured at least in the
ring to prevent self-excitation in the ring.

OPCS Board
Functions
OPCS (Optical Protect for Channel Section) board is used to implement the
optical channel shared protection of ZXMP M800 equipment. It detects
channel faults and performs optical channel switching once some fault
occurs in the optical line.

Operating Principle
Figure 135 illustrates the operating principle of OPCS board.
Chapter 3 Boards

FIGURE 135 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF OPCS BOARD
Optical Switch
Controlling Unit
Protection channel
Working channel
Working channel
Protection channel
Protection channel
Working channel
Working channel
Protection channel
Checking and
Cotnrolling Circuit
A

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
B

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
A-direction dropped
wavelength
A-direction added
wavelength
B-direction dropped
wavelength
B-direction added
wavelength

OPCS board receives and executes the protection switching or recovery
command sent from OSC/APS board. The protection switching and recovery
is implemented by the optical switches in OPCS board.


The front panel of OPCS board is shown in Figure 136.
FIGURE 136 FRONT PANEL OF OPCS BOARD

operations of the OPCS board.
TABLE 129 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTIONS OF OPCS BOARD AND RELATED BASIC
OPERATIONS
Board
Item
OPCS
Board ID OPCS
Indicator
[Note]
STA Optical switch status indicator, bi-color (red-green)

AWO
A-direction working signal output optical interface
LC/PC connector
2. Optical switching status indicator
5. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

Board
Item
OPCS
APO
A-direction protection signal output optical interface
LC/PC connector
BWI
B-direction working signal input optical interface
LC/PC connector
BPI
B-direction protection signal input optical interface
LC/PC connector
AWI
A-direction working signal input optical interface
LC/PC connector
API
A-direction protection signal input optical interface
LC/PC connector
BWO
B-direction working signal output optical interface
LC/PC connector
BPO
B-direction protection signal output optical interface
LC/PC connector
AADD
A-direction working signal optical add interface
LC/PC connector
ADROP
A-direction working signal optical drop interface
LC/PC connector
BADD
B-direction working signal optical add interface
LC/PC connector
Optical
interface

Optical
interface
BDROP
B-direction working signal optical drop interface
LC/PC connector
Laser warning sign
eyes.
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OPCS board is CLASS 1
Number of
occupied slot
2
Slots for board
Operation
precautions
status of OPCS board are same as those of OPMS board. Please refer to Table
127 for detailed description.



The performance, alarm and event messages of OPCS board are listed in
Table 130.
TABLE 130 PERFORMANCE, ALARM AND EVENT MESSAGES OF OPCS BOARD
Type Item
Input optical power of A-direction working channel
Performance
Input optical power of B-direction working channel
Low input power of A-direction working channel
No input power of A-direction working channel
Low input power of B-direction working channel
Alarm
No input power of B-direction working channel
Control optical switch for status switching
Event
Online upgrade of software

Configuration of OPCS Board
During the configuration of optical channel shared protection, wavelengths
carrying services should be different. For example, a pair of services is
transmitted between node A and node B, as shown in Figure 137.
FIGURE 137 CONFIGURATION FOR OPTICA CHANNEL SHARED PROTECTION
B
D F E
A H
G
C
21(FE)
21(FE)
22(EF)
22(EF)
22(AB)
21(BA)
21(BA)
22(AB)

The service from node B to node A is carried by wavelength 21 (outer ring)
while the service from node A to node B is carried by wavelength 22 (inner
ring). In this way, the working wavelength 21 and 22 can be used repeatedly
between other nodes in the ring network. The wavelength 21 on the inner
ring can act as the protection wavelength of the wavelength 21 on the outer
ring. Similarly, the wavelength 22 on the outer ring can act as the protection
wavelength of the wavelength 22 on the inner ring, so as to implement the
shared protection of multiple services on the network.
Chapter 3 Boards

Although the wavelengths can be assigned flexibly, be sure that working
wavelengths in two directions are different. For convenient debugging and
maintenance, adjacent even and odd wavelengths are generally assigned to
two directions respectively.

OMCP Board
Functions
The OMCP uses optical cross connection to implement traffic
adding/dropping and protection switching with optical switch modules in it.
Each OMCP board supports bidirectional channel 1:8 protection. Two
cascaded OMCP boards support directional channel 1:16 protection.

Operating Principle
An OMCP board drives two optical switch modules at the same time. The
operating principle of OMCP board is illustrated in Figure 138.
FI GURE 138 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF OMCP BOARD
Optical Switch Module
IN8
IN0
OUT8
OUT1
Control and
Communication Unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
IN1 22 optical switch 1
22 optical switch 8
OUT0

The OMCP board mainly consists of optical switch module and the control and
communication unit.
Optical switch module


Each optical switch module contains eight 22 optical switches. As
shown in Figure 138, the channel from IN0 to OUT0 is the protection
channel, while the channels from IN1/OUT1 to IN8/OUT8 are working
channels.
Working status
Eight 22 optical switches are all in cross status. The IN0 is
connected to OUT0; the IN1 is connected to OUT1, and so on.
Protection status
If the traffic i is interrupted due to failure of wavelength channel i
(1i8), the OMCP board switches to protection status from working
status when the traffic interruption is detected. The 22 optical
switch i turns to straight-through status from cross status with other
optical switches unchanged.
In the protection status, the INi and OUTi are disconnected. The INi is
connected to OUT0. Then the traffic i is transmitted through channel
0 to implement 1: N channel protection. In this case, the original
traffic carried by channel 0 is discarded.
board and EMS supervision function.

The front panel of OMCP board is illustrated in Figure 139.
Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 139 FRONT PANEL OF OMCP BOARD

TABLE 131 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF OMCP BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
I tem
OMCP
Board ID OMCP
Indicator
[Note]
STA Status indicator, bi-color (green and red), indicating switching status
Laser warning
sign
AIn
Working channel input interface of optical switch module A, n=1~8,
corresponding to IN1-IN8 in Figure 138
AOn
Working channel output interface of optical switch module A, n=1~8,
corresponding to OUT1-OUT8 in Figure 138
API
Protection channel input interface of optical switch module A,
corresponding to IN0 in Figure 138
Optical
interface
APO
Protection channel output interface of optical switch module A,
corresponding to OUT0 in Figure 138
4. Laser class sign


Board
I tem
OMCP
BIn
Working channel input interface of optical switch module B, n=1~8
corresponding to IN1-IN8 in Figure 138
BOn
Working channel output interface of optical switch module B, n=1~8
corresponding to OUT1-OUT8 in Figure 138
BPI
Protection channel input interface of optical switch module B
corresponding to IN0 in Figure 138
BPO
Protection channel output interface of optical switch module B
corresponding to OUT0 in Figure 138
Number of
occupied slot
2
Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OMCP board is CLASS 1
Slots for OMCP
board
Operation
precautions
When the faulty channel recovers, the traffic can only be switched
back to the channel in EMS manually.
Since the insertion loss of protection interfaces (IN0/OUT0) of
OMCP board is greater than that of other interfaces, make sure
that the input power of transmitting end OTU and the output
power of receiving end OTU of traffic 0 are in the normal optical
power range.
I NDI CATOR STATUS OF OMCP BOARD
Indicator Status
Working Status
The Bootrom program is
downloaded.
Off Off Off
configuration.
flash alternately.
Off
occurs.
Flashing slowly and
regularly
Off -
normally, and some alarm
occurs.
Flashing slowly and
regularly
On -
The board is performing
self-test upon power on.
flash quickly for three times.
Off
The board is in the
downloading status.
flash quickly at the same time.
Off
The input of channel is
- - Glowing in red
Chapter 3 Boards

Indicator Status
Working Status
switched.
The output of channel is
switched.
- - Glowing in green
Both the input and output
of channel are switched at
the same time.
- - Glowing in orange
Note: For the bi-color indicator STA, when the red light and green light glows at the
same time, it will be lighted in orange.

Optical Connections of OMCP Board
OMCP boards are located at both ends of channels to be protected, that is,
before transmitting end OTU and after receiving end OTU. They are used in
pairs.
When both the transmitting end and the receiving end are configured
with an OMCP board, the system can implement bidirection 1: N (N8)
protection, as shown in Figure 140.
Optical switch module A corresponds to channel connections in local
transmitting direction, while optical switch module B corresponds to
channel connections in local receiving direction. The relations between
optical switch module and optical interfaces of OMCP board are described
in Table 131.
FI GURE 140 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ON OF OMCP BOARD ( BI DI RECTI ONAL 1: 8 PROTECTI ON)
OMCP
AO8
OMU OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
AI8
Client
signal
input
ODU
ODU
OMU
OTU
API
APO
BPI
OTU
BI8 BO8
BPO
OMCP
OTU
BPI
BPO
BI8 BO8
OTU
AO8 AI8
API
APO
Client
signal
output
Client
signal
input
Client
signal
output

As shown in Figure 140, at the transmitting end, client side signals are
input to the OMCP board through input interfaces. The output interfaces
of OMCP board are connected to client-side interfaces of OTU board.
At the receiving end, the OMCP boards input interfaces are connected to
client-side interfaces of OTU board while its output interfaces are
connected to user equipment.


The system can implement bidirectional 1:N (N16) protection by
cascading OMCP board (slave OMCP) with existing OMCP board (master
OMCP), as shown in Figure 141.
FI GURE 141 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ON OF OMCP BOARD ( BI DI RECTI ONAL 1: 16 PROTECTI ON)
The dashed frame indicates a site. two slabe OMCPs in the same dashed frame belong to one OMCP
board
Connect the APO/BPO interfaces of master OMCP to API/BIP interfaces of
slave OMCP board correspondingly with optical fibers.
At the transmitting end, client-side signals are connected to input
interfaces of OMCP board. The output interfaces of OMCP board are
connected to client-side interfaces of OTU board.
At the receiving end, the input interfaces of OMCP board are connected to
client-side interfaces of OTU board. The output interfaces of OMCP board
are connected to user equipment.

Chapter 3 Boards

The OMCP board only has event messages as listed in Table 133.
TABLE 133 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF OMCP BOARD
Type I tem
Performance -
Alarm -
Optical switch status switching
Optical switch status restoring Event
Optical switch failure

Control and Supervision Boards
NCP NE Control Processor
OHP Overhead Processing Board
NCPF NE Control Processor for Fast Ethernet
OSCF Optical Supervision Channel for Fast Ethernet
OHPF Overhead Processing Board for Fast Ethernet
APSF Automatic Protection Switching for Fast Ethernet
OA subrack
PBX Power Box Board Interface area of subrack
PWSB Power Supervision Board Monitoring plug-in box
FCB Fan-Control Board Independent fan unit

NCP Board
Functions and Operating Principle
NCP board is the NE control processor in 2 M supervision systems to
implement all functions of NE supervision subsystem. It has the following
functions:
Collecting and processing alarm and performance messages of the NE
where it is located, reporting these messages to the EMS and forwarding
data received from other NCPs, receiving control commands issued by
the EMS;


Storing configuration data. It can work separately without the EMS once
it has been configured.
Providing Qx and f interface for upper-layer management system.
10/100 M Ethernet electrical interface is used as Qx interface while
RS232 interface is used as f interface (complying with V.28 protocol);
Providing ECC route for communication with other NEs, and S interface
for communication with other boards;
Sending equipment alarms to PWSB board through alarm output
interface;
Receiving information about fan rotate speed, temperature of fan plug-in
box sent from FCB board, reporting them to the EMS, and forwarding
rotate speed adjustment command from the EMS to FCB board;
Providing management function for multiple racks. One NCP board can
manage four racks at most.
The operating principle of NCP board is illustrated in Figure 142.
FI GURE 142 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF NCP BOARD
MCU
Database
and
Program
Qx
EMS
S
Other boards
ECC
Other NEs
f interface
Fan communication
interface
FCB
Alarm output interface
PWSB

Front Panel: Interface and Indicators
The front panel of NCP board is shown in Figure 143.
Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 143 FRONT PANEL OF NCP BOARD

TABLE 134 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF NCP BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board NCP
Board ID NCP
Indicator
Interface RS232 DB9 socket (female), complying with V.28 protocol
Reset button RST Reset NCP board
DIP switch S2
Located at the PCB of NCP board
Switch DIP2 to ON position to enter mandatory IP address
status. The IP address of OSCF board is 192.192.192.11
Switch DIP1 and DIP8 to ON position to enter Probe &
debugging status.
Switch all pins to non-ON position to enter application
program status.
Number of occupied
slot
1
Slots for NCP board Slot 8 in OA subrack

2. RS232 interface
3. Reset button


The indicator lights, NOM (green) and ALM (red), on the NCP board
represents the running status of the NE. The working status and indicator
status of the NCP(/NCPF) board are listed in is shown in Table 135.
TABLE 135 CORRESPONDENCE RELATI ONS BETWEEN THE WORKI NG STATUS AND THE
I NDI CATOR STATUS OF NCP/ NCPF BOARD
Indicator Status
Working/ Debugging Status
Working Status
The system is lack of basic databases. Off Flashing
The NCP/NCPF board has been equipped in the ZXWM
M900; but it has not been configured in the EMS.
On Flashing
The system runs normally or it is downloading a
program to a board.
Flashing Off
Errors occur while the system is running. Off On
The NCP/NCPF board is started and initialized.
The red indicator and green
The Agent program is downloaded to the NCP/NCPF
board.
The red indicator and green
indicator flash at the same time.
Debugging Status
Mandatory IP status (the DIP2 pin of the DIP switch S2
is set to ON)
Off On
Probe & debugging status ( the DIP1 and DIP8 of the
DIP switch S2 are set to ON)
On Off

Chapter 3 Boards

The performance and alarm messages of NCP board are listed in Table 136.
TABLE 136 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF NCP BOARD
Type I tem
Performance -
Card dismount alarm
Alarm
Card mount alarm
Event -

OSC Board
OSC board is used in 2 M supervision systems, mainly performing the
following functions:
Forwarding monitoring information carried by the supervision channel
(1510 nm or 1625 nm) to NCP/NCPF board and OHP board, and
implementing the conversion in the reverse direction.
Implementing APS controller and automatic power reduction (APR)
function
In terms of different requirements, OSC board is divided into terminal
OSC board (OSCT) and line OSC board (OSCL).
OSCT board: processes supervision signal in one direction. It is
applicable to OTM equipment.
OSCL board: processes supervision signals in two directions. If two
OSCL board are installed in an OA subrack, supervision signals in
four directions can be processed at the same time. The OSCL board
is applicable to OLA and OADM equipment.



Operating Principle
The operating principle of OSC board is illustrated in Figure 144.
FI GURE 144 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF OSC BOARD
Transcoder O/E Converter
Optical supervision
signal input
E/O Converter Transcoder
Optical supervision
signal output
Data
Processng Unit

At the receiving end, the OSC board receives optical supervision signal from
its adjacent NE. After O/E conversion, code transform and data processing, it
forwards the electrical signal to NCP/NCPF board and OHP board via the
control and communication unit.
At the transmitting end, the control and communication unit receives
electrical signal from NCP/NCPF board and OHP board. After data processing,
code transform and E/O conversion, the optical signal carrying supervision
information is sent to the adjacent NE.

The front panels of OSCL and OSCT board are illustrated in Figure 145.
Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 145 FRONT PANEL OF OSC BOARD

OSCL OSCT

TABLE 137 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF OSC BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
I tem
OSCL
OSCT
Board ID OSCL OSCT
Indicator
[Note]
Laser warning sign
eyes.
4. Laser class sign


Board
I tem
OSCL
OSCT
IN
- Optical supervision signal input
OUT
- Optical supervision signal output
IN1
Optical supervision signal input
interface 1, LC/PC connector
-
OUT1
Optical supervision signal output
-
IN2
Optical supervision signal input
-
Optical
interface
OUT2
Optical supervision signal output
-
Number of
occupied slot
1
1
Slots for OSC board
Slot 5 and slot 7 in OA subrack
Master OSC board must be installed in slot 7
Operation
precautions

Note: The relations between the status of OSC board and corresponding status of

Optical Connections of OSC Board
A pair of optical interfaces of OSC board transmits/receives the supervision
information of a site.
In a system with 80 channels or below, OSC boards are connected to
SIN/SOUT interfaces of EOBA, EOPA and EOLA boards with optical fibers,
as shown in Figure 146.

Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 146 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ON OF OSC BOARD
OSCL
EOLA
EOLA
EOBA
EOBA
EOPA
EOPA
EAST
Input
EAST
Output
OSCT OSCT
IN
WEST
Output
WEST
Input
OTM OTM OLA
OUT
SIN
SOUT
IN1
OUT1
OUT2
IN2
SOUT
SIN
SIN
OUT
IN
SOUT
SIN
SOUT
OMU
ODU OMU
ODU

In a 160-channel system, OSC boards are connected to CSR/CST
interfaces of OBM boards with optical fibers, as shown in Figure 73 in the
section Optical Connections of OBM Board.

The performance and alarm messages of OSC board are listed in Table 138.
TABLE 138 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF OSC BOARD
Type Detection Point I tem Remark
15-min/24-hour background BE -
15-min/24-hour ES -
15-min/24-hour SES -
15-min/24-hour UAS -
OSC sink port
(optical input
interface)
15-min/24-hour OOF times count -
Performance
OSC source port
(optical output
interface)
Default threshold:
-48 dBm
Default threshold:
-45 dBm
LOF alarm -
UAS alarm -
SD alarm -
LOS alarm -
Alarm
OSC sink port
(optical input
interface)
15-min/24-hour ES
-


15-min/24-hour SES
-
15-min/24-hour UAS
-
15-min/24-hour BE count
-
Default threshold:
-10 dBm
Default threshold:
-7 dBm
OSC source port
(optical output
interface)
OSC RD (remote defect) alarm -
Loop locking succeeds/fails -
Segment locking succeeds/fails -
Protection locking succeeds/fails -
Switching maneuver
succeeds/fails
-
Cleaning external commands
succeeds/fails
-
Forcible switching succeeds/fails -
Line (loop) switching
succeeds/fails
-
Event
Protection
switching port
Line (loop) restoring
succeeds/fails
-

OHP Board
Functions and Operating Principle
OHP board processes orderwire data and transparent user channel data
between sites in 2 M supervision systems. The operating principle of OHP
board is illustrated in Figure 147.
Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 147 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF OHP BOARD
Signaling
HDLC
Time Division Switching Unit
Conference
telephone processing
CODEC SLIC
2 audio
interfaces
RS232 interface RS422 interface
PCM
clock
DTMF
CODEC
Signal tone
generator
To OSC board

SLIC: Subscriber Line Interface Circuit
HDLC: High-level Data Link Control
PCM: Pulse Code Modulation
DTMF: Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency

Orderwire overhead information processing
OHP board uses the circuit-switching mode to process speech and
speech-related signaling. As shown in Figure 147, the time division
switching unit, conference telephone processing unit, codec, SLIC, signal
tone generator, PCM clock unit and signaling HDLC unit work together to
implement the task. OHP board has the following functions related to
orderwire data processing:
Supporting three calling modes: selection call, group call and
broadcast call;
Being capable of communication crossing optical multiplex sections,
that is, orderwire communication between different optical multiplex
sections;
Supporting orderwire interconnection in multiple directions (no less
than four directions);
Providing interfaces (audio interfaces) for main phone set and
subsidiary phone set, which are located on the interface area of OA
subrack. Both phone sets have same functions and can be used
within the range of 200 m
Transparent user channel information processing
OHP board processes transparent user channel information carried by
optical supervision channel. It provides two user transparent channel
interfaces, RS232 interface and RS422 interface.
Control and communication information processing


The control and communication unit receives supervision information
from other modules and report it to the EMS. It also receives control
commands from the EMS.

The front panel of OHP board is shown in Figure 148.
FI GURE 148 FRONT PANEL OF OHP BOARD

Chapter 3 Boards

TABLE 139 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF OHP BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
I tem
OHP
Board ID OHP
Indicator
[Note]
Number of occupied
slot
1
Slots for OHP board Slot 6 in OA subrack

Note: The relations between the status of OHP board and corresponding status of

The performance and alarm messages of OHP board are listed in Table 140.
TABLE 140 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF OHP BOARD
Type I tem
Performance -
Alarm Loss of clock source alarm
Event Establishment of orderwire communication link establishment fails

NCPF Board
Operating Principle
NCPF board can be used as NE control processor in 2 M or 100 M supervision
systems to implement NE-level network management function. It provides
the following functions:
Collecting and processing alarm and performance messages of other
boards in equipment, and report them to the EMS;
Storing configuration data. It can work separately without the EMS once
it has been configured.
Providing S interface for communication with other boards;
Providing ECC route for communication with other NEs, and Qx and f
interfaces for upper-layer management system;



In 2 M supervision systems, the implementation of ECC route and Qx
interface is same as those of NCP board. In 100 M supervision systems,
ECC route and Qx interface are provided by OSCF board.
RS232 interface is adopted as f interface. It complies with V.28 protocol.
Supporting standby route to ensure the transfer and exchange of
supervision information when optical supervision channel fails;
In a 2 M supervision system, the standby route is accessed to the system
by a HUB.
In a 100 M supervision system, the standby route is accessed to the
system by an OSCF board.
Providing alarm output interface to send equipment alarms to PWSB
board;
Receiving information about fan rotate speed, temperature of fan plug-in
box sent from FCB board, reporting them to the EMS, and forwarding
rotate speed adjustment command from the EMS to FCB board;
Providing management function for multiple racks. An NCPF board can
manage four racks. More NCPF boards are needed for the management
of more than four racks. In this case, add HUB between OSCF board and
NCPF board to enable the communication between NCPF boards and
OSCF boards.
The operating principle of NCPF board in a 2 M supervision system is same as
that of NCP board, as shown in Figure 142.
The operating principle of NCPF board in a 100 M supervision system is
FI GURE 149 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF NCPF BOARD ( 100 M SUPERVI SI ON SYSTEM)
MCU
Database
and Program
Qx
EMS
S interface
ECC
Other NEs
Standby route
f interface
Fan communiation
interface
FCB
Alarm output
interface
OSCF
Ethernet
interface
Other
boards
PWSB

Chapter 3 Boards

The front panel of NCPF board is shown in Figure 150.
FI GURE 150 FRONT PANEL OF NCPF BOARD

TABLE 141 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF NCPF BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
I tem
NCPF
Board ID NCPF
Indicator
[Note]
NET
10/100BASE-T interface, RJ45 socket
In different supervision systems, the usage of this interface is
different too.
In 2 M supervision systems, it is used to connect EMS
In 100 M supervision systems, it is used to connect Ethernet
electrical interface of OSCF board
Interface
RS232 DB9 socket (female), complying with V.28 protocol
2. Ethernet interface
3. RS232 interface
4. Reset button


Board
I tem
NCPF
Reset
button
RST Reset NCPF board
DI P
switch
S2
Located at the PCB of NCPF board
Switch all pins to non-ON position to enter application program
status.
Number of
occupied slot
1
Slots for NCPF
board
Slot 8 in OA subrack

Note: The relations between the status of NCPF board and corresponding status of
indicators are same as those of NCP board. Please refer to Table 135 for the detailed
description.

The performance and alarm messages of NCPF board are same as those of
NCP board, as listed in Table 136.

OSCF Board
OSCF board is used in 100 M supervision systems to implement transfer and
exchange of ECC data, orderwire and transparent user channel data, and
APS information between NEs. It provides the following functions:
Encapsulating ECC data, APS data, transparent user channel data and
orderwire data between NEs in a 100 M supervision system into IP
packets to implement transfer and exchange of these data;
Providing six 10/100BASE-T electrical Ethernet interfaces with automatic
crossover function. Through these interfaces, other boards (such as
NCPF, OHPF and APSF), EMS, slave OSCF board and standby route can be
accessed into the 100 M supervision system to implement the transfer of
internal supervision information of a NE.
Providing two 100BASE-FX or 10BASE-FL optical Ethernet interfaces for
the accessing of 1510 nm or 1625 nm optical supervision channel to
implement the transfer of supervision information between NEs. Use
10BASE-FL interfaces in 10 M supervision systems while use
100BASE-FX interfaces in 100 M supervision systems.
Providing hardware-based layer 3 transfer capability
Supporting dynamic routing with OSPF (open shortest path first) protocol
adopted

Chapter 3 Boards

Operating Principle
The operating principle of OSCF board is illustrated in Figure 151.
FI GURE 151 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF OSCF BOARD
Route
Switching
Unit
Ethernet electrical
interface 1 ~ 6
Ethernet optical
interface 1
Ethernet optical
interface 2
OSC

At the transmitting end, the OSCF board receives data packets from NCPF,
APSF and OHPF board in the NE through Ethernet electrical interfaces. These
data packets are forwarded to other NEs after being switched to
corresponding Ethernet optical interfaces by the route switching unit.
At the receiving end, the OSCF board receives data packets from other NEs
through Ethernet optical interfaces. The route switching unit switches these
data packets to corresponding Ethernet electrical interfaces according to the
types, destination IP addresses and MAC addresses of these packets.
Through these interfaces, the packets are forwarded to NCPF, APSF and
OHPF board in the NE.

The front panel of OSCF board is shown in Figure 152.


FI GURE 152 FRONT PANEL OF OSCF BOARD

TABLE 142 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF OSCF BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
I tem
OSCF
Board ID OSCF
STA
Indicates connection status and data receiving/transmitting status of
optical interfaces, bi-color (green and red)
Yellow indicator, located at the right top corner of each Ethernet
electrical interface. It indicates connection status of Ethernet
electrical interface
Indicator

Green indicator, located at the right bottom corner of each Ethernet
electrical interface. It indicates data receiving/transmitting status of
Ethernet electrical interface.
IN1
Supervision signal 10BASE-FL or 100BASE-FX input interface 1,
LC/PC connector
Optical
interface
OUT1
Supervision signal 10BASE-FL or 100BASE-FX output interface 1,
LC/PC connector
2. Optical interface status indicator
4. Ethernet electrical interface status indicator
5. Ethernet electrical interface
6. Laser alarm sign
7. Laser class sign
Chapter 3 Boards

Board
I tem
OSCF
IN2
Supervision signal 10BASE-FL or 100BASE-FX input interface 2,
LC/PC connector
OUT2
Supervision signal 10BASE-FL or 100BASE-FX output interface 2,
LC/PC connector
Ethernet
electrical
interface
1~6
10/100BASE-T interface with automatic crossover function, RJ45
socket. They are connected to NCPF, APSF, OHPF, slave OSCF board,
standby route or EMS computer.
Laser warning sign
eyes.
DI P
switch
S2
Located at the PCB of OSCF board
Switch DIP1 and DIP8 to ON position to enter Probe &
debugging status.
Switch all pins to non-ON position to enter normal running
status.
Number of
occupied slot
1
Slots for OSCF
board
For two or less optical directions, insert an OSCF board in slot 7
of OA subrack
For three or more optical directions, insert the master OSCF
board into slot 7 of OA subrack and other OSCF boards into any
other spare slots of OA subrack.
Operation
precautions

Table 143 describes the running status of the board and corresponding
indicators status.
I NDI CATOR STATUS OF OSCF BOARD
Indicator Status
Working Status
The board is waiting for configuration.
alternately.
The board is running normally, and no
alarm occurs.
It flashes slowly and
regularly.
Off
The board is running normally, and some
alarm occurs.
It flashes slowly and
regularly.
On
Board initialization On
It flashes


Indicator Status
slowly and
regularly.
The board is waiting for program
downloading.
The board is in the program downloading
status.
slowly and regularly at the same time.
Debugging Status
The board is running the Boot program in
the mandatory IP status. (the DIP2 pin of
the DIP switch S2 is set to ON)
Off On
Probe & debugging status ( the DIP1 and
DIP8 of the DIP switch S2 are set to ON)
On Off
Note:
Both the DIP switch S2 and the Ethernet electrical interface for debugging are
located on the PCB of the OSCF board.
When the board is in the debugging status, the STA indicator light and Ethernet
electrical interface indicator lights of the OSCF board are all blacked out.

Table 144 describes the working status of optical/electrical interfaces of the OSCF
board and corresponding indictors status.
I NDI CATOR STATUS OF THE OPTI CAL/ ELECTRI CAL I NTERFACES ON OSCF BOARD
Indicator Status
Working Status
STA (Bi-color)
Ethernet
Electrical
Interface
Indicator
(Yellow)
Ethernet
Electrical
Interface
Indicator
(Green)
The optical interface 1 is
connected while the optical
interface 2 is unconnected.
Glowing in green. - -
sending and receiving data
packets; while the optical
Flashing in green. - -
connected while the optical
Glowing in red. - -
sending and receiving data
packets; while the optical
Flashing in red. - -
Both the optical interface 1 and
2 are connected.
Glowing in orange. - -
Chapter 3 Boards

2 are sending and receiving
data packets.
Flashing in orange. - -
2 are unconnected.
- On -
The Ethernet electrical
interface is connected.
- Off -
The Ethernet electrical
interface is unconnected.
- On Flashing

Configuration of OSCF Board
Optical Connections
When the transmission distance is short and span loss is less than 28 dB,
use 100BASE-FX optical interfaces of OSCF board to transfer supervision
information. In this case, the optical connection of OSCF board is same as
that of OSCL board. Please refer to the section Optical Connections of
OSC Board.
When the transmission distance is short and span loss is between 28 dB
and 42 dB, use 10BASE-FL optical interfaces to transfer supervision
information. In this case, the optical connection of OSCF board is same as
that of OSCL board. Please refer to the section Optical Connections of
OSC Board.
When the transmission distance is long and span loss is more than 42 dB,
use 100BASE-FX optical interfaces of OSCF board and OTU boards
together to transfer supervision information. In this case, an operating
wavelength in the DWDM system will be occupied.
Taking unidirectional supervision channel as example, Figure 153
illustrates optical connection relations of OSCF boards.
FI GURE 153 OPTI CAL CONNECTI ON BETWEEN OSCF BOARD AND OTU BOARD
OSCF OTU
OMU
Long-distance
transmission
OTU
OTU
ODU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OSCF
EOBA
EOP
A

IN1/OUT1 interfaces or IN2/OUT2 interfaces of OSCF board are
connected to client-side interfaces of OTU boards.



Note: OTU boards connected to OSCF board must be those supporting
continuous-rate traffic.

Network Cable Connections
Since the Ethernet electrical interfaces of OSCF board have automatic
crossover function, OSCF board can be connected to other boards (NCPF,
APSF, OHPF or slave OSCF board), standby router and EMS computer in 100
M supervision systems with crossover network cable or straight network
cable.

The performance and alarm messages of OSCF board are listed in Table
145.
TABLE 145 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF OSCF BOARD
Input optical power
Only for 10BASE-FL optical
interfaces
15-min received massage -
15-min sent data message -
15-min lost data message -
OSC sink port
(optical input
interface)
15-min CRC error packet -
Laser bias current - OSC source port
(optical output
interface)
interfaces
15-min received massage -
15-min sent data message -
15-min lost data message -
Performance
Network port
(electrical
interface 1-6)
15-min CRC error packet -
LOS alarm -
Low input optical power
interfaces. Default alarm
threshold is -40 dBm.
No input optical power
interfaces
15-min CRC error packet
-
Alarm
OSC sink port
15-min message loss
-

Chapter 3 Boards

Laser bias current
-
OSC source port
Laser failure alarm
interfaces. Default alarm
threshold is -10 dBm.
15-min CRC error packet
-
Network port
15-min message loss
-
Laser shut-down -
OSC source port
Laser start up -
Over-long packet
over-threshold event
Event
OSC sink port and
network port
Over-short packet
over-threshold event
Over 10 over-long/short
packets in 15 minutes

OHPF Board
Operating Principle
OHPF board processes orderwire data and transparent user channel data
between sites in 100 M supervision systems. The operating principle of OHPF
board is illustrated in Figure 154.
FI GURE 154 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF OHPF BOARD
Control and
Communication Unit
Voice
processing
Time division
switching
Conference telephone
processing
CODEC SLIC
PCM
2 audio
interfaces
10M/100M
Ethernet interface
RS232
interface
RS422
interface
PCM clock



Orderwire overhead information processing
OHPF board uses VoIP technology to process voice and voice-related
signalings. It sends voice in IP packets to OSCF board, which will forward
it to the destination NE. As shown in Figure 154, the voice processing unit,
time division switching unit, conference telephone processing unit, codec,
SLIC and PCM clock unit work together to implement the task.
OHPF board has the following functions related to orderwire data
processing:
Supporting three calling modes: selection call, group call and
broadcast call;
Being capable of communication crossing optical multiplex sections;
Supporting orderwire interconnection in multiple directions (no less
than four directions);
Providing interfaces (audio interfaces) for main phone set and
subsidiary phone set, which are located on the interface area of OA
subrack. Both phone sets have same functions and can be used
within the range of 200 m

Transparent user channel information processing
OHPF board provides two transparent user channel interfaces (RS232
interface and RS422 interface), which can receive and send data
simultaneously.
Control and communication information processing
OHPF board communicates with OSCF board through Ethernet interfaces
shown in Figure 154. The control and communication unit receives
supervision information from other modules and report it to the EMS. It
also receives control commands from the EMS.

Front Panel: Interface and Indicators
The front panel of OHPF board is shown in Figure 155.
Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 155 FRONT PANEL OF OHPF BOARD

TABLE 146 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF OHPF BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
I tem
OHPF
Board ID OHPF
Indicator
[Note]
Interface NET
Connect it to Ethernet electrical interface of OSCF board
Reset
button
RST Reset OHPF board
Number of
occupied slot
1
Slots for OHPF
board
Slot 6 in OA subrack
3. Reset button


Note: The relations between the status of OHPF board and corresponding status of

OHPF board has no performance and alarm messages but an event message,
as listed in Table 147.
TABLE 147 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF OHPF BOARD
Type I tem
Performance -
Alarm -
Event Establishment of orderwire communication link establishment fails

APSF Board
APSF board implements APS information management and switching control
function in 2 M or 100 M supervision systems to ensure that APS data
processing speed meet the requirement for APS switching time. It has the
following functions:
Managing APS information of multiple racks. Each APSF board can
transfer APS information between four racks. In a 100 M supervision
system, additional APSF boards are needed for more than four racks. Add
a HUB between OSCF board and APSF board to enable the
communication between them.
Forwarding clock information to help CA board to access external clock
and distribute clock unifiedly.
Providing automatic power reduction (APR) function.
Collecting and processing internal APS information of an NE, and
forwarding APS information to other NEs through OSCF board. It acts as
an APS protocol controller in 100 M supervision system.

Chapter 3 Boards

Operating Principle
The operating principle of APSF board is illustrated in Figure 156.
FI GURE 156 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF APSF BOARD
APS information
collecting
Control and
Communication Unit
APS information
processing
To APSF board of
other NES
From other boards
To protection board
Ethernet
interface
RS232 interface
OSCF

When the main optical channel in a system fails, APSF board collects APS
information sent from each board. The APS information processing unit
analyzes and processes the APS information and then forwards it to the APSF
board of corresponding NE. It also informs the protection board to perform
switching in specified time.
The control and communication unit communicates with NCPF board through
S interface. It provides an RS232 interface for debugging board.

The front panel of APSF board is shown in Figure 157.


FI GURE 157 FRONT PANEL OF APSF BOARD

TABLE 148 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF APSF BOARD AND RELATED BASI C
OPERATI ONS
Board
I tem
APSF
Board ID APSF
ALM Alarm indicator, red Indicator
STA Switching status indicator, bi-color (green and red)
NET
Connect to Ethernet electrical interface of OSCF board
Interface
RS232
DB9 socket (female)
Output debugging information of board
Reset button RST Reset APSF board
Slots for APSF board Slot 9 in OA subrack

3. RS232 interface
4. Reset button
Chapter 3 Boards

Table 149 describes the working status of the board and corresponding
indicator status.
I NDI CATOR STATUS OF APSF BOARD
Indicator Status
Working Status
NOM
(Green)
ALM (Red)
STA
(Bi-color)
The board is running normally, and no
alarm occurs.
Flashing slowly
and regularly
Off -
The board is running normally, and some
alarm occurs.
Flashing slowly
and regularly
On -
Flashing
slowly and
regularly
-
The board is waiting for program
downloading.
The red indicator and the green
indicator flashes quickly at the
same time.
-
The board is in the program
downloading status.
The red indicator and the green
indicator flashes slowly and
regularly at the same time.
-
No protection group has been
configured.
- - Off
No switching - - Off
A-direction
switching
- - Glowing in red
B-direction
switching
- -
Glowing in
green
The protection
mode of the first
protection group is
the channel ring
shared protection
or the MS ring
shared protection
Straight through - -
Glowing in
orange
No switching - - Off
Adding switching - - Glowing in red
Dropping
switching
- -
Glowing in
green
The protection
mode of the first
protection group is
the 1:N channel
protection
Adding/Dropping
switching
- -
Glowing in
orange

APSF board has no performance and alarm message.



PBX Board
PBX (Power Box) board provides the following two functions:
Processing active and standby power supply provided by the power
distribution subrack and powering boards in the subrack where it is
located;
Monitoring input/output voltage of the subrack and reporting
under-voltage/over-voltage alarms to the EMS.

Operating Principle
The operating principle of PBX board is illustrated in Figure 158.
FI GURE 158 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF PBX BOARD
Voltage
separation
detection
Reverse
connection
protection
Soft
start
Balance
Reverse
connection
protection
Soft
start
Balance
Voltage
separation
detection
Power alarm
Power alarm
Power
supply for
subrack
Standby DC
Active DC
PBX board 2
PBX board 1

Subrack power supply
The active and standby DC power supplies are input to the PBX boards
through air switches on the power distribution subrack and power
sockets in interface areas of OA/OTU/TMUX subrack. The active power
supply is input to PBX1 board in the upper slot of interface area while the
standby power supply is input to PBX2 board in the lower slot in interface
area.
After the processing of reverse connection protection, soft start and
balance output, the power is supplied to other boards in slots of the
subrack through power sockets on the backplane.
Alarm report
Chapter 3 Boards

The voltage separation detection unit monitors input/output voltage and
sends the monitoring signal to PWSB board through the power alarm
interface in interface area of OA/OTU/TMUX subrack.
Front Panel and Rear Panel
The front panel and rear panel of PBX board are shown in Figure 159.
FI GURE 159 FRONT PANEL AND REAR PANEL OF PBX BOARD

TABLE 150 PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF PBX BOARD AND RELATED BASI C OPERATI ONS
Board PBX
NOM
When the board runs normally, it glows in green
OV
Over-voltage alarm indicator, red
When an over-voltage alarm is detected, the OV indicator will be lit.
Indicator
UV
Under-voltage alarm indicator, red
When an under-voltage alarm is detected, the UV indicator will be lit.
Power socket
It is located on the rear panel of PBX board. The socket is secured
with three screws. The left and right short screws are for -48 V, while
the middle long screw is for the ground GND.
Signal interface
It is located on the rear panel of PBX board, including address wires
and output wire for power alarm signal
Slots for PBX
board
PBX board is mounted in the PBX plug-in box on subrack. Each
subrack has two PBX plug-in boxes, as shown in Figure 11 and Figure
18.

1. Indicators
2. Power socket
3. Signal interface


The performance and alarm messages of PBX board are listed in Table 151.
TABLE 151 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES
Type I tem
Input voltage monitoring
Performance
Output voltage monitoring
Alarm -
Event -

PWSB Board
PWSB (Power Supervision) board provides the following functions:
Automatically detecting the over-voltage and under-voltage status of
output voltage of the subrack where it is located;
Detecting voltage alarms of subracks and in-position status of PBX
boards;
Outputting audible and visual alarms and reporting them to the EMS;
Sending equipment alarms to the first cabinet of row in equipment room.
The relation between PWSB board and power distribution subrack is
Chapter 3 Boards

FI GURE 160 RELATI ONS BETWEEN PWSB BOARD AND POWER DI STRI BUTI ON SUBRACK
Lightening
protection and
filter
Lightening
protection and
filter
Air switch
DC1-1
DC1-6
DC2-1
DC2-6
DC1
DC2
-48V
LED board NCP/NCPF
WARN
ALM_IN
External alarm input
ALM_OUT
First
cabinet of
row
Power Distribution Subrack
Subrack data interface
BUS
LED
Power alarm input
from subracks
SP_ALM 1-4
PWSB

Operating Principle
The operating principle of PWSB board is illustrated in Figure 161.
FI GURE 161 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF PWSB BOARD
-48V 1 -48V 2
Power supply processing
/detecting unit
Indicators
on panel
Subrack power
alarm input
External
alarm input
Total power
alarm
First cabinet in row
Alarm
LED NCP/NCPF
FAN bus
Input
equipment
alarm
Output
equipment
alarm
DIP switch for
cabinet No.



PWSB board consists of the control and communication unit, power supply
processing/detecting unit and panel indicators.
Power supply processing/detecting unit
Two groups of -48 V power supply provided by power distribution
subrack are input to the PWSB board through it. Each of the accessed two
groups of power supply can act as either the active or standby one for the
purpose of protection.
After the voltage separation detection, the input power supply and total
power alarm are sent to the control and communication unit.
The power supply processing/detecting unit also provides the reverse
connection protection and output balance functions.
Panel indicators
The indicators on panel of PWSB board are controlled by the control and
communication unit, indicating alarm status of two groups of power
supply.
It receives and processes power alarms of each subrack, 10 external
input alarms and equipment alarms from NCP/NCPF board. The control
and communication unit also controls the LED board and alarm output of
the first cabinet of row.

PWSB board is installed in the monitoring plug-in box of 1U height (as shown
in Figure 26), which is located below the power distribution subrack (as
shown in Figure 24).
The front panel of PWSB board is shown in Figure 162.
FI GURE 162 FRONT PANEL OF PWSB BOARD

1. Indicators (Nom, Alm, M_OV, M_UV, S_OV, S_UV)
The relations between running status of PWSB board and status of
indicators are described in Table 152.

Chapter 3 Boards

TABLE 152 CORRESPONDI NG RELATI ONS BETWEEN RUNNI NG STATUS AND I NDI CATOR
STATUS OF PWSB BOARD
Indicators
Working Status
NOM (green)
ALM
(red)
M_OV
(red)
M_UV
(red)
S_OV
(red)
S_UV
(red)
occurs.
Flashing slowly
and regularly
Off - - - -
occurs.
Flashing slowly
and regularly
On - - - -
Master power supply
over-voltage alarm occurs.
Flashing slowly
and regularly
- On - - -
Master power supply
under-voltage alarm
occurs.
Flashing slowly
and regularly
- - On - -
Slave power supply
over-voltage alarm occurs.
Flashing slowly
and regularly
- - - On -
Slave power supply
under-voltage alarm
occurs.
Flashing slowly
and regularly
- - - - On

2. DIP switch for cabinet No. selection
The 4-pin DIP switch is used to define the number of cabinet where PWSB
board is located. It has no silkscreen ID on the front panel. Figure 163
illustrates the DIP switch. If the pin is set to ON position, it means the
corresponding selection digit is 0. The definitions of cabinet No. are
listed in Table 153.
FI GURE 163 DI P SWI TCH ON PWSB BOARD
ON
1 2 3 4
DIP

TABLE 153 DESCRI PTI ON OF CABI NET NO.
1 2 3 4 DI P

Cabinet No.
Selection
Digit 3
Selection
Digit 2
Selection
Digit 1
Selection
Digit 0
Cabinet 0 (master) 0 0 0 0
Cabinet 1 (extended) 0 0 0 1



3. -48_In1/-48_In2
The master/slave power supply input interfaces are used to connect the
master/slave -48 V power supply from the power distribution subrack.
They are type-D 3-pin DC power supply sockets, as shown in Figure 13.
The definitions of pins are described in Table 154.
TABLE 154 DEFI NI TI ONS OF PI NS I N - 48_I N1/ - 48_I N2 POWER SOCKET
Pin Signal Function Signal Attribute
A1 -48V GND -48 V ground Power supply
A2 PGND Protection ground Protection ground
A3 -48V -48 V Power supply
- Screws beside socket Protection ground Protection ground

4. Alm_In
It is a DB25 socket used as an external alarm input interface. Alarms
from external monitoring equipment are input to PWSB board through
this interface and displayed in the EMS. The input alarm signals are
isolated with optical couplers or relays. Table 155 lists the definitions of
pins of Alm_In socket.
TABLE 155 DEFI NI TI ONS OF PI NS I N ALM_I N SOCKET
Pin No. Signal Name Function Signal Attribute
1 ALMIN1_C1 External alarm input 1 + Optical coupler/relay isolated
14 ALMINCOM_C0 External alarm input 1 - Optical coupler/relay isolated
Chapter 3 Boards

Pin No. Signal Name Function Signal Attribute

5. Alm_Out
The alarm output interface is a DB15 socket (male), as shown in Figure
164. It is connected to the first cabinet of its row or other monitoring unit
out of the cabinet. Table 156 describes the definitions of pins in the
Alm_Out socket.
FI GURE 164 DB15 SOCKET ( MALE)
8
1
9 15

TABLE 156 DEFI NI TI ONS OF PI NS I N ALM_OUT SOCKET
Pin No. Signal Name Function Description Signal Attribute
1 BUZZ_OUT+ Buzzer signal + On-off signal
9 BUZZ_OUT- Buzzer signal - On-off signal
2 S_ALARM+ Critical alarm signal + On-off signal
10 S_ALARM- Critical alarm signal - On-off signal
3 G_ALARM+ Major alarm signal + On-off signal
11 G_ALARM- Major alarm signal - On-off signal
4 ALM_SET+ Alarm setting signal + On-off signal
12 ALM_SET- Alarm setting signal - On-off signal
6 BGND -48 V ground -48 V ground
13 BGND -48 V ground -48 V ground
8 M_-48V -48 V output -48 V
15 M_-48V -48 V output -48 V
Note:
The signals (relay isolated) are sent from PWSB board to the first cabinet of its row.
It depends on the connection of the alarm setting signals (ALM_SET+ and ALM_SET-)
whether alarm signals are valid when they are connected or disconnected.
If the ALM_SET+ and the ALM_SET- are disconnected, alarm signals are valid when
the alarm signals are connected. It is determined before making cables on site.



6. Warn
The internal alarm interface is a DB9 socket (female). It is connected to
J3 interface of OA subrack. Signals, which are optical coupler isolated,
are sent from NCP board.
The DB9 socket is shown in Figure 15. The definitions of pins in Warn
socket are described in Table 157.
TABLE 157 DEFI NI TI ONS OF PI NS I N WARN SOCKET
Pin No. Signal Name Function Signal Attribute From/ to
1 RING_C1 Ring control signal + Optical coupler isolated
6 RING_C0 Ring control signal - Optical coupler isolated
2 YELLOW_C1 Warning signal Optical coupler isolated
7 YELLOW_C0 Warning signal Optical coupler isolated
3 RED_C1 Critical alarm signal Optical coupler isolated
8 RED_C0 Critical alarm signal Optical coupler isolated
From NCP
to PWSB
4 ALM_PWR_1+ Power alarm + Optical coupler isolated
9 ALM_PWR_1- Power alarm - Optical coupler isolated
From PWSB
to NCP
Note: The above table lists four pairs of on-off signal isolated by optical coupler or
relay.

7. Led
The alarm LED interface is a DB9 socket (female). The alarms are output
to the LED board on the cabinet door through this interface.

8. Sp_Alm1-Sp_Alm4
For subrack power supply alarm sockets are available on PWSB board.
They are DB9 sockets (female), which can be connected to J12 interface
of OA subrack, J4 interface of OTU subrack or J12 interface of TMUX
subrack. The definitions of pins are described in Table 158.
TABLE 158 DEFI NI TI ONS OF PI NS I N SP_ALM SOCKET
Pin No. Signal Definition Descriptions
1 Vinu1 Under-voltage alarm of subrack input power supply 1
6 Vino1 Over-voltage alarm of subrack input power supply 1
2 ONLINE1 Subrack PBX1 board in-position signal
7 Voutu Under-voltage alarm of subrack output power supply
3 ALMCOM Common alarm terminal
8 Vouto Over-voltage alarm of subrack output power supply
4 ONLINE2 Subrack PBX2 board in-position signal
9 Vino2 Over-voltage alarm of subrack input power supply 2
Chapter 3 Boards

Pin No. Signal Definition Descriptions
5 Vinu2 Under-voltage alarm of subrack input power supply 2

9. Bus
The local data interface is a type-D 36-pin in-line PCB soldered socket
(female). It is the end interface of data bus of cabinet.

The performance and alarm messages of PWSB board are listed in
Table 159.
TABLE 159 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF PWSB BOARD
Type
Detection
Point
I tem Remark
Performance - - -
Subrack master power supply input
under-voltage alarm
-
over-voltage alarm
-
Subrack slave power supply input
under-voltage alarm
-
over-voltage alarm
-
Board port
External alarm 1-10
External alarm
types are
specified in the
EMS
under-voltage alarm
-
over-voltage alarm
-
Subrack master PBX board dismount
alarm
-
under-voltage alarm
-
over-voltage alarm
-
Subrack slave PBX board dismount alarm -
Subrack power supply output
under-voltage alarm
-
Alarm
4 subrack
ports
Subrack power supply output
over-voltage alarm
-


Type
Detection
Point
I tem Remark
Subrack power supply monitoring failure
alarm
-
Subrack power supply power down
alarm
-
Event - - -

FCB Board
The FCB board provides the following functions.
The FCB board monitors the running status of fans and temperature of
the fan plug-in box, and then report the rotate speed and temperature to
NCP/NCPF board.
EMS queries the working status of fans and temperature of the fan
plug-in box, and adjusts the rotate speed of fans automatically via
NCP/NCPF and FCB boards
If EMS disables the automatical speed adjustment function, or FCB board
fails to communicate with the EMS, the FCB board will adjust rotate
speed of fans if the temperature reported by its built-in temperature
sensors is out of range, so as to lower the temperature.
When the FCB board fails, it can not control fans anymore. The fans will
be forced to run at full speed.

Front Panel
The structure of FCB board is illustrated in
Figure 34, while Table 160 describes its front panel and related information
for basic operations.
TABLE 160 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF OAD BOARD AND RELATED BASI C OPERATI ON
Board
I tem
FCB
NOM
Running indicator (green) located on the front panel of independent
fan unit
It flashes slowly and regularly when the FCB board runs normally.
Indicator
ALM
Alarm indicator (red) located on the front panel of independent fan
unit
The ALM indicator glows in red and the NOM indicator flashes slowly
and regularly when the fan unit reports alarm.
Power socket Provides - 48 V power for independent fan unit
Signal interface Carries fan bus from NCP board to FCB board
Chapter 3 Boards

Board
I tem
FCB
Position
The FCB board is installed in independent fan unit, as shown in Figure
22.
Operation
precautions
When the FCB board fails, the fans will be forced to rotate at full
speed.

The performance and alarm messages of the FCB board are listed in Table
161.
TABLE 161 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF FCB BOARD
Type I tem
Fan rotate speed
Performance
FCB temperature
Alarm Fan failure
Event -

Clock Board
CA Clock Assignment
CSU Cross-switch and Synchronous-clock Unit
TMUX subrack

CA Board
CA (Clock Assignment) board acts as SDH equipment clock in TMUX subrack,
complying with ITU-T G.781 Recommendation. It has the following main
functions:
For input clocks of different level, the CA board monitors their quality and
sorts them based on their priority. Then it selects an optimal clock as the
reference clock source. The CA board supports two kinds of input clock,
line clock and external clock.


Line clock: provided by convergence boards installed in TMUX
subrack. The CA board supports 12 line clocks at most.
External clock: provided by external BITS equipment. The CA board
supports two 2 MHz and two 2 Mbit/s clocks.
The CA board generates clocks complying with ITU-T G.813
Recommendation and assigns them to other boards as reference line
clock or external clock. The line clock is sent to convergence boards
installed in TMUX subrack. And the CA board provides two 2 MHz and two
2 Mbit/s external clocks.
Operating Principle
The operating principle of CA board is illustrated in Figure 165.
FI GURE 165 OPERATI NG PRI NCI PLE OF CA BOARD
Clock
selection unit
External clock
processing unit
SEC clock
processing unit
Clock
assignment
unit
External clock
processing unit
G.813
External clock
input
Line extracted
clock
Interface
board clock
External
clock output
Active/standby
status control unit
Clock sent between
active and standby
CA board

The operating principles of clock input/output and active/standby switching
of CA board are described below.
Clock input/output
The CA board receives clocks at different levels from convergence boards
or external interfaces, and then forwards them to the clock selection unit
or external clock processing unit for filtering. The filtered clocks are sent
to the SEC clock processing unit, which selects the optimal clock and
generates output clock complying with ITU-T G.813. Then the clock
assignment unit distributes the generated clock to other boards as the
reference clock, or sends it to the external clock processing unit, which
outputs standard external clocks.
The Synchronization Status Message (SSM) of clock is sent to other
service boards in the subrack through the data bus on TMUX subrack
backplane.
Active/standby CA board switching
Two CA boards can be installed in a TMUX subrack to implement the hot
backup. In normal running status, only one of them acts as the active
Chapter 3 Boards

board. The standby board is locked with the output clock of the active
one so as to ensure the synchronization of output clock of active and
standby CA boards.
Both the EMS and the board itself can control the switching between
active CA board and standby CA board. The EMS sends switching
command to the board through the control and communication unit. In
another way, when the active CA board is power down or its clock output
fails, the active/standby status control unit of the board enables the
switching automatically to ensure the reliability and correctness of
system clock.

The front panel of CA board is shown in Figure 166.
FI GURE 166 FRONT PANEL OF CA BOARD

TABLE 162 FRONT PANEL DESCRI PTI ONS OF CA BOARD AND RELATED BASI C OPERATI ONS
Board
I tem
CA
Board I D CA
2. Active/standby CA board indicator
3. Clock status indicator


Board
I tem
CA
M/S Active/standby CA board indicator, green
CKS1
Indicator
CKS2
Clock status indicator, green
They indicate current clock running status of the system through
different combination of indicator status.
Number of
occupied slot
1
Slots for CA board
Slot 7 or slot 8 in TMUX subrack
The CA board in slot 7 is the active board while that in slot 8 is the
standby board by default.

The correspondence between CA board indicator and the boards running
status is shown in Table 163.
I NDI CATOR STATUS OF CA BOARD
Indicator Status
Working Status
NOM (Green)
ALM
(Red)
M/ S
(Green)
CKS1
(Green)
CKS2
(Green)
The Bootrom program is
downloaded.
Off Off - - -
configuration.
The red indicator and the
green indicator flash
alternately.
- - -
occurs.
Flashing slowly
and regularly
Off - - -
occurs.
Flashing slowly
and regularly
On - - -
Flashing
slowly
and
regularly
- - -
Board is waiting for
download
green indicator flash
- - -
Board in downloading
status
green indicator flash slowly
at the same time.
- - -
The board is configured
as the active CA board
- - On - -
The board is configured
as the standby CA board.
- - Off - -
Chapter 3 Boards

Indicator Status
Working Status
NOM (Green)
ALM
(Red)
M/ S
(Green)
CKS1
(Green)
CKS2
(Green)
The CA board runs in the
clock lock mode (normal
tracing).
- - - On On
clock holdover mode.
- - - On Off
fast pull-in mode.
- - - Off On
clock free run mode.
- - - Off Off



The performance and alarm messages of CA board are listed in Table 164.
TABLE 164 PERFORMANCE AND ALARM MESSAGES OF CA BOARD
Type I tem
Performance -
Alarm Loss of clock alarm
CA board switching
Clock source automatic switching
Clock source manual switching
Event
Clock source forcible switching

CSU Board
Functions
CSU (Cross-switch and Synchronous-clock Unit) board acts as a clock and
signal cross-connect processing unit. Generally, two CSU boards are
mounted together in the TMUX subrack for use.
CSU board provides the following functions.
Cross-connection function
CSU board receives the backplane service signals from various service
boards installed in the same TMUX subrack, such as DSAE and SMU,
cross-connects these signals and sends them to corresponding service
boards.
The cross-connection capacity is 4848 2.5 Gbit/s backplane signals.
Clock function
CSU board selects the optimal clock as the system clock from the input
clocks at different levels according to certain algorithm. The input clock
may be line clock, external clock or clock from the other CSU board in the
TMUX board.
Line clock: comes from various service boards in the TMUX subrack.
Each service board provides one clock. Up to 12 channels of clocks
are available.
External clock: Provided by external BITS equipment. Two channels
of 2 MHz and two channels of 2 Mbit/s clock signals are supported.
Clock from the other CSU board: The other CSU board can output one
channel of clock signal according to certain algorithm.
Chapter 3 Boards

In addition, CSU board can convert the system clock into various clock
signals and assign them to other service boards in the TMUX subrack as
reference clock. These clock signals can also be output as external clocks
or provided to the other CSU board.
Line clock: It is output to all the other service boards in the TMUX
subrack. For each service board, one channel of clock signal is
provided. Up to 12 channels of output clock signals are available.
External clock: Two channels of 2 MHz and 2 channels of 2 Mbit/s
clock signals are output.
Clock output to the other CSU board: One channel of clock signal is
output to the other CSU board.
CSU board receives APS commands sent by APSF board to implement the
protection switching at electronic layer.

Operating Principle
The operating principle of CSU board is illustrated in Figure 167.
FIGURE 167 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF CSU BOARD
Cross-connect
unit
Control &
communication unit
Clock
processing
unit
Master/slave
switching control
unit
Line clock
External clock
Clock from the other CSU board
Line clock
Clock to the other CSU board
External clock
48 channels of 2.5 Gbit/s
backplane signals
48 channels of 2.5 Gbit/s
backplane signals

CSU board consists of a cross-connect unit, a clock processing unit, a
master/slave switching control unit and a control & communication unit, as
described one by one below.
Cross-connect unit
This unit receives 48 channels of 2.5 Gbit/s backplane traffic signals from
12 service boards in the TMUX subrack, i.e. each service board provides
4 channels of 2.5 Gbit/s backplane traffic signals, cross-connects these
signals and sends the processed signals to corresponding service boards.


Clock processing unit
This unit processes input clocks of various levels and then selects the
optimal clock as the system clock from them according to certain
algorithm. The input clocks may be line clocks extracted from service
boards, external clock input from the external clock interface or the clock
from the other CSU board.
On the other hand, this unit can also converts the system clock into clock
signals in various format and then assigns them to service boards in the
TMUX subrack as reference clock, outputs them as external clock, or
provides to the other CSU board.
Master/slave switching control unit
Two CSU board can be mounted in the TMUX subrack for the purpose of
hot backup. In normal situation, only one of them acts as the master
board. The slave CSU board works in the locked mode so as to guarantee
the consistence between the output clock phases of the master CSU
board and the slave one.

Note: The master/slave concept only directs to the clock function of CSU board.
The cross-connect units of both CSU boards work at the same time. Therefore, for
service boards, the cross-connect unit is not classfied into master one or slave one.
The switching between master CSU board and slave CSU board can be
controlled by the EMS or the board itself. The EMS issues the switching
command to the board through the control & communication unit.
The switching of CSU board is non-revertive. The prerequisite of
successful switching is that the slave CSU board is working normally.
When the master CSU board fails or it receives a switching command, the
master/slave switching control unit will perform the switching
automatically so as to ensure the reliability and validity of system clock.
APS switching control unit
TMUX subrack implements the function of protection switching at
electronic layer. CSU board performs the commands sent by APS. APS
control unit sends APS commands to both the master and slave CSU
boards of TMUX subsystem, in order to realize the protection switching
function.
Control & communication unit
This unit monitors the power supply of the board and implements the
supervision of board and the EMS.

Chapter 3 Boards

Front Panel
The front panel of CSU board is shown in Figure 168.
FIGURE 168 FRONT PANEL OF CSU BOARD

operations of the CSU board.
TABLE 165 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTIONS OF CSU BOARD AND RELATED
Board
Item
CSU
Board ID CSU
M/S Master/slave board indicator, green
CKS1
Indicator
CKS2
Clock status indicator, green
Indicates the current clock status of the system by different
status combination of two indicators.
2. Master/slave CSU board indicator
3. Clock status indicators


Board
Item
CSU
Number of
occupied slot
1
Slots for board
Slot 7 and 8 in TMUX subrack
Slot 7 is used for master CSU board while slot 8 is used for
slave CSU board by default.
Table 166 describes the relationship between the working status of CSU
board and the status of indicators.
OF CSU BOARD
Indicator Status
Working
Status
NOM
(Green)
ALM
(Red)
M/S
(Green)
CKS1
(Green)
CKS2
(Green)
Downloading
BootROM
program
OFF OFF - - -
Waiting for
configuration
The green indicator and
the red indicator flash
slowly alternately.
- - -
Running
normally
Flashing
slowly and
regularly
OFF - - -
Alarming
Flashing
slowly and
regularly
ON - - -
Initializing ON
Flashing
slowly and
regularly
- - -
Waiting for
download
quickly at the same
time.
- - -
Downloading
status
- - -
Master CSU
board
- - ON - -
Slave CSU
board
- - OFF - -
Locked
(tracing
normally)
- - - ON ON
Hold-in - - - ON OFF
Fast pull-in - - - OFF ON
Free oscillation - - - OFF OFF
Chapter 3 Boards

Note: The symbol - indicates indefinite status.

The performance, alarm and event messages of CSU board are listed in Table
167.
TABLE 167 PERFORMANCE, ALARM AND EVENT MESSAGES OF CSU BOARD
Type Item
Performance Board environment temperature
Environment temperature alarm
Alarm
Loss of clock alarm
MCU reset
EEPROM data error
CSU board switching
Clock source automatic switching
Clock source manual switching
Event
Clock source forced switching




Ap p e n d i x A
Optical Connections of ZXWM
M900

This appendix introduces the optical fiber connections between boards in the
ZXWM M900 through examples of 40/48/80/96/160/176-channel systems.
8/16/32/40/48-Channel System
The optical cable connections of 8, 16, 32, 40 and 48 channel systems are
similar. Figure 169 illustrates the application of ZXWM M900 in a network
and the optical fiber connection.
FI GURE 169 APPLI CATI ON OF ZXWM M900 ( NO MORE THAN 48- CHANNEL SYSTEM)
OBA
O
M
U
OTU
n-1
Sn-1
OTU
2
OTU
n
S1 OTU
1
Sn
S2
O
S
C
T
OPA
RM1
RM2
RMn-1
RMn
OLA
OLA
OLA
OSCL
MPI-S
R'
MPI-R S'
? ? ? ? ?
OSCL
OADM
MPI-S
R'
OAD
OAD
OTM OTM
S'
MPI-R
OBA
O
M
U
OTU
2
S2
OTU
n-1
OTU
1
S1
OTU
n
Sn
Sn-1
O
S
C
T
OPA
RM1
RM2
RMn-1
RMn
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
SDn
SD2
SD1
SDn-1
O
D
U
OTU
1
OTU
2
OTU
n-1
OTU
n
R1
R2
Rn-1
Rn
SDn
SD2
SD1
SDn-1
O
D
U
OTU
1
OTU
2
OTU
n-1
OTU
n
R1
R2
Rn-1
Rn
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
? ?
? ?
? ?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
? ?
? ?
? ?



Operating wavelength range: C-band (191.3 THz-196.0 THz)
Channel spacing: 100 GHz
80/96-Channel System
Figure 170 illustrates the optical fiber connection in an 80/96-channel
system consisting of ZXWM M900.
FI GURE 170 APPLI CATI ON OF ZXWM M900 ( 80/ 96- CHANNEL SYSTEM)

Operating wavelength range: C-band (191.30 THz-196.05 THz)

Note: In contrast to a 40-channel system, the 80-channel system adds OCI boards to
combine wavelengths in C100_1 band and C100_2 band with the frequency spacing
at 100 GHz into wavelengths in C50_1 band with the spacing at 50 GHz.
160/176-Channel System
Figure 171 illustrates the optical fiber connection in a 160/176-channel
system consisting of ZXWM M900.

Appendix A Optical Connections of ZXWM M900

FI GURE 171 APPLI CATI ON OF ZXWM M900 ( 160/ 176- CHANNEL SYSTEM)
OMU
( C10
0_1)
OTU
.
.
OMU
( C100_
2)
OTU
.
.
OMU
( L100_
1)
OTU
.
.
OMU
( L100_
2)
OTU
.
.
OCI
( C50
_1)
OCI
( L50
_1)
OBM
( C/L)
EOBA
EOBA
O
S
C
OBM
( C/L)
OBM
( C/L)
O
S
C
EOPA EOBA
DCM VGSC
EOPA EOBA
DCM VGSC
OPM
OPM
100km
G.652
DRA
OBM
( C/L)
O
S
C
EOPA EOBA
DCM VGSC
EOPA EOBA
DCM VGSC
OPM
OPM
100km
G.652
DRA
OCI
( C50
_1)
OCI
( L50
_1)
ODU
( C10
0_1)
ODU
( C100_
2)
ODU
( L100_
1)
ODU
( L100_
2)
OTU
.
.
OTU
.
.
OTU
.
.
OTU
.
.
OTM1 OLA OTM2

Operating wavelength range:
C-band (191.30 THz-196.05 THz)
L-band (186.95 THz-190.90 THz)

Note: In contrast to an 80/176-channel system, the 160/176-channel system adds
additional OBM boards in OTM and OLA equipment.
The OBM board in OTM combines or separate signals in L band.
The OBM board in OLA multiplexes/demultiplexes signals in C+L band so as to
amplify signals in different band separately.
Requirements on Operating
Wavelength
The operating wavelengths of ZXWM M900, which employs the specific
central wavelengths in multi-channel systems as its operating wavelengths,
comply with ITU-T G.692 strictly. All the line-side interfaces of optical
transponder boards, the aggregate interfaces of convergence boards (SRM
/GEM/DSA) and the channel interfaces of add/drop boards meet the
wavelength requirements specified in this appendix.
Wavelength Allocation in 8/32/40-Channel
Systems
8/32/40 Wavelength System
Table 168 lists the wavelength allocation in a system consisting of ZXWM
M900 with 40 wavelengths in C band. The spacing between wavelengths is
100 GHz.



TABLE 168 WAVELENGTH ALLOCATI ON ( 8/ 32/ 40 CHANNEL, C BAND)
S/
N
Sub-ba
nd
Name
Central
Frequen
cy (THz)
Central
Waveleng
th (nm)
S/
N
Sub-ba
nd
Name
Central
Frequen
cy (THz)
Central
Waveleng
th (nm)
1 C100_1 192.1 1560.61 21 C100_1 194.1 1544.53
2 C100_1 192.2 1559.79 22 C100_1 194.2 1543.73
3 C100_1 192.3 1558.98 23 C100_1 194.3 1542.94
4 C100_1 192.4 1558.17 24 C100_1 194.4 1542.14
5 C100_1 192.5 1557.36 25 C100_1 194.5 1541.35
6 C100_1 192.6 1556.55 26 C100_1 194.6 1540.56
7 C100_1 192.7 1555.75 27 C100_1 194.7 1539.77
8 C100_1 192.8 1554.94 28 C100_1 194.8 1538.98
9 C100_1 192.9 1554.13 29 C100_1 194.9 1538.19
10 C100_1 193.0 1553.33 30 C100_1 195.0 1537.40
11 C100_1 193.1 1552.52 31 C100_1 195.1 1536.61
12 C100_1 193.2 1551.72 32 C100_1 195.2 1535.82
13 C100_1 193.3 1550.92 33 C100_1 195.3 1535.04
14 C100_1 193.4 1550.12 34 C100_1 195.4 1534.25
15 C100_1 193.5 1549.32 35 C100_1 195.5 1533.47
16 C100_1 193.6 1548.51 36 C100_1 195.6 1532.68
17 C100_1 193.7 1547.72 37 C100_1 195.7 1531.90
18 C100_1 193.8 1546.92 38 C100_1 195.8 1531.12
19 C100_1 193.9 1546.12 39 C100_1 195.9 1530.33
20 C100_1 194.0 1545.32 40 C100_1 196.0 1529.55

48/96 Wavelength System
TABLE 169 WAVELENGTH ALLOCATI ON ( 48/ 96 CHANNEL, C BAND)
S/ N
Sub-band
Name
Central
Frequenc
y (THz)
Central
Wavelengt
h (nm)
S/ N
Sub-band
Name
Central
Frequenc
y (THz)
Central
Wavelengt
h (nm)
1 C100_2 196.05 1529.16 49 C100_2 193.65 1548.11
2 C100_1 196.00 1529.55 50 C100_1 193.60 1548.51
3 C100_2 195.95 1529.94 51 C100_2 193.55 1548.91
4 C100_1 195.90 1530.33 52 C100_1 193.50 1549.32
5 C100_2 195.85 1530.72 53 C100_2 193.45 1549.72
6 C100_1 195.80 1531.12 54 C100_1 193.40 1550.12
7 C100_2 195.75 1531.51 55 C100_2 193.35 1550.52

S/ N
Sub-band
Name
Central
Frequenc
y (THz)
Central
Wavelengt
h (nm)
S/ N
Sub-band
Name
Central
Frequenc
y (THz)
Central
Wavelengt
h (nm)
8 C100_1 195.70 1531.90 56 C100_1 193.30 1550.92
9 C100_2 195.65 1532.29 57 C100_2 193.25 1551.32
10 C100_1 195.60 1532.68 58 C100_1 193.20 1551.72
11 C100_2 195.55 1533.07 59 C100_2 193.15 1552.12
12 C100_1 195.50 1533.47 60 C100_1 193.10 1552.52
13 C100_2 195.45 1533.86 61 C100_2 193.05 1552.93
14 C100_1 195.40 1534.25 62 C100_1 193.00 1553.33
15 C100_2 195.35 1534.64 63 C100_2 192.95 1553.73
16 C100_1 195.30 1535.04 64 C100_1 192.90 1554.13
17 C100_2 195.25 1535.43 65 C100_2 192.85 1554.54
18 C100_1 195.20 1535.82 66 C100_1 192.80 1554.94
19 C100_2 195.15 1536.22 67 C100_2 192.75 1555.34
20 C100_1 195.10 1536.61 68 C100_1 192.70 1555.75
21 C100_2 195.05 1537.00 69 C100_2 192.65 1556.15
22 C100_1 195.00 1537.40 70 C100_1 192.60 1556.55
23 C100_2 194.95 1537.79 71 C100_2 192.55 1556.96
24 C100_1 194.90 1538.19 72 C100_1 192.50 1557.36
25 C100_2 194.85 1538.58 73 C100_2 192.45 1557.77
26 C100_1 194.80 1538.98 74 C100_1 192.40 1558.17
27 C100_2 194.75 1539.37 75 C100_2 192.35 1558.58
28 C100_1 194.70 1539.77 76 C100_1 192.30 1558.98
29 C100_2 194.65 1540.16 77 C100_2 192.25 1559.39
30 C100_1 194.60 1540.56 78 C100_1 192.20 1559.79
31 C100_2 194.55 1540.95 79 C100_2 192.15 1560.20
32 C100_1 194.50 1541.35 80 C100_1 192.10 1560.61
33 C100_2 194.45 1541.75 81 C100_2 192.05 1561.02
34 C100_1 194.40 1542.14 82 C100_1 192.00 1561.42
35 C100_2 194.35 1542.54 83 C100_2 191.95 1561.83
36 C100_1 194.30 1542.94 84 C100_1 191.90 1562.24
37 C100_2 194.25 1543.33 85 C100_2 191.85 1562.64
38 C100_1 194.20 1543.73 86 C100_1 191.80 1563.05
39 C100_2 194.15 1544.13 87 C100_2 191.75 1563.46
40 C100_1 194.10 1544.53 88 C100_1 191.70 1563.87
41 C100_2 194.05 1544.92 89 C100_2 191.65 1564.27
42 C100_1 194.00 1545.32 90 C100_1 191.60 1564.68
43 C100_2 193.95 1545.72 91 C100_2 191.55 1565.09
44 C100_1 193.90 1546.12 92 C100_1 191.50 1565.5
45 C100_2 193.85 1546.52 93 C100_2 191.45 1565.91
46 C100_1 193.80 1546.92 94 C100_1 191.40 1566.32


S/ N
Sub-band
Name
Central
Frequenc
y (THz)
Central
Wavelengt
h (nm)
S/ N
Sub-band
Name
Central
Frequenc
y (THz)
Central
Wavelengt
h (nm)
47 C100_2 193.75 1547.32 95 C100_2 191.35 1566.73
48 C100_1 193.70 1547.72 96 C100_1 191.30 1567.14

80/160 Wavelength System
TABLE 170 WAVELENGTH ALLOCATI ON ( 80 CHANNEL, C BAND)
S/ N
Sub-band
Name
Central
Frequenc
y (THz)
Central
Wavelengt
h (nm)
S/ N
Sub-band
Name
Central
Frequenc
y (THz)
Central
Wavelengt
h (nm)
1 C50_1 196.05 1529.16 41 C50_1 194.05 1544.92
2 C50_1 196.00 1529.55 42 C50_1 194.00 1545.32
3 C50_1 195.95 1529.94 43 C50_1 193.95 1545.72
4 C50_1 195.90 1530.33 44 C50_1 193.90 1546.12
5 C50_1 195.85 1530.72 45 C50_1 193.85 1546.52
6 C50_1 195.80 1531.12 46 C50_1 193.80 1546.92
7 C50_1 195.75 1531.51 47 C50_1 193.75 1547.32
8 C50_1 195.70 1531.90 48 C50_1 193.70 1547.72
9 C50_1 195.65 1532.29 49 C50_1 193.65 1548.11
10 C50_1 195.60 1532.68 50 C50_1 193.60 1548.51
11 C50_1 195.55 1533.07 51 C50_1 193.55 1548.91
12 C50_1 195.50 1533.47 52 C50_1 193.50 1549.32
13 C50_1 195.45 1533.86 53 C50_1 193.45 1549.72
14 C50_1 195.40 1534.25 54 C50_1 193.40 1550.12
15 C50_1 195.35 1534.64 55 C50_1 193.35 1550.52
16 C50_1 195.30 1535.04 56 C50_1 193.30 1550.92
17 C50_1 195.25 1535.43 57 C50_1 193.25 1551.32
18 C50_1 195.20 1535.82 58 C50_1 193.20 1551.72
19 C50_1 195.15 1536.22 59 C50_1 193.15 1552.12
20 C50_1 195.10 1536.61 60 C50_1 193.10 1552.52
21 C50_1 195.05 1537.00 61 C50_1 193.05 1552.93
22 C50_1 195.00 1537.40 62 C50_1 193.00 1553.33
23 C50_1 194.95 1537.79 63 C50_1 192.95 1553.73
24 C50_1 194.90 1538.19 64 C50_1 192.90 1554.13
25 C50_1 194.85 1538.58 65 C50_1 192.85 1554.54
26 C50_1 194.80 1538.98 66 C50_1 192.80 1554.94
27 C50_1 194.75 1539.37 67 C50_1 192.75 1555.34
28 C50_1 194.70 1539.77 68 C50_1 192.70 1555.75
29 C50_1 194.65 1540.16 69 C50_1 192.65 1556.15
30 C50_1 194.60 1540.56 70 C50_1 192.60 1556.55

S/ N
Sub-band
Name
Central
Frequenc
y (THz)
Central
Wavelengt
h (nm)
S/ N
Sub-band
Name
Central
Frequenc
y (THz)
Central
Wavelengt
h (nm)
31 C50_1 194.55 1540.95 71 C50_1 192.55 1556.96
32 C50_1 194.50 1541.35 72 C50_1 192.50 1557.36
33 C50_1 194.45 1541.75 73 C50_1 192.45 1557.77
34 C50_1 194.40 1542.14 74 C50_1 192.40 1558.17
35 C50_1 194.35 1542.54 75 C50_1 192.35 1558.58
36 C50_1 194.30 1542.94 76 C50_1 192.30 1558.98
37 C50_1 194.25 1543.33 77 C50_1 192.25 1559.39
38 C50_1 194.20 1543.73 78 C50_1 192.20 1559.79
39 C50_1 194.15 1544.13 79 C50_1 192.15 1560.20
40 C50_1 194.10 1544.53 80 C50_1 192.10 1560.61

TABLE 171 WAVELENGTH ALLOCATI ON ( 80 CHANNEL, L BAND)
S/ N
Sub-band
Name
Central
Frequenc
y (THz)
Central
Wavelengt
h (nm)
S/ N
Sub-band
Name
Central
Frequenc
y (THz)
Central
Wavelengt
h (nm)
1 L50_1 190.90 1570.42 41 L50_1 188.90 1587.04
2 L50_1 190.85 1570.83 42 L50_1 188.85 1587.46
3 L50_1 190.80 1571.24 43 L50_1 188.80 1587.88
4 L50_1 190.75 1571.65 44 L50_1 188.75 1588.30
5 L50_1 190.70 1572.06 45 L50_1 188.70 1588.73
6 L50_1 190.65 1572.48 46 L50_1 188.65 1589.15
7 L50_1 190.60 1572.89 47 L50_1 188.60 1589.57
8 L50_1 190.55 1573.30 48 L50_1 188.55 1589.99
9 L50_1 190.50 1573.71 49 L50_1 188.50 1590.41
10 L50_1 190.45 1574.13 50 L50_1 188.45 1590.83
11 L50_1 190.40 1574.54 51 L50_1 188.40 1591.26
12 L50_1 190.35 1574.95 52 L50_1 188.35 1591.68
13 L50_1 190.30 1575.37 53 L50_1 188.30 1592.10
14 L50_1 190.25 1575.78 54 L50_1 188.25 1592.52
15 L50_1 190.20 1576.20 55 L50_1 188.20 1592.95
16 L50_1 190.15 1576.61 56 L50_1 188.15 1593.37
17 L50_1 190.10 1577.03 57 L50_1 188.10 1593.79
18 L50_1 190.05 1577.44 58 L50_1 188.05 1594.22
19 L50_1 190.00 1577.86 59 L50_1 188.00 1594.64
20 L50_1 189.95 1578.27 60 L50_1 187.95 1595.06
21 L50_1 189.90 1578.69 61 L50_1 187.90 1595.49
22 L50_1 189.85 1579.10 62 L50_1 187.85 1595.91
23 L50_1 189.80 1579.52 63 L50_1 187.80 1596.34


S/ N
Sub-band
Name
Central
Frequenc
y (THz)
Central
Wavelengt
h (nm)
S/ N
Sub-band
Name
Central
Frequenc
y (THz)
Central
Wavelengt
h (nm)
24 L50_1 189.75 1579.93 64 L50_1 187.75 1596.76
25 L50_1 189.70 1580.35 65 L50_1 187.70 1597.19
26 L50_1 189.65 1580.77 66 L50_1 187.65 1597.62
27 L50_1 189.60 1581.18 67 L50_1 187.60 1598.04
28 L50_1 189.55 1581.60 68 L50_1 187.55 1598.47
29 L50_1 189.50 1582.02 69 L50_1 187.50 1598.89
30 L50_1 189.45 1582.44 70 L50_1 187.45 1599.32
31 L50_1 189.40 1582.85 71 L50_1 187.40 1599.75
32 L50_1 189.35 1583.27 72 L50_1 187.35 1600.17
33 L50_1 189.30 1583.69 73 L50_1 187.30 1600.60
34 L50_1 189.25 1584.11 74 L50_1 187.25 1601.03
35 L50_1 189.20 1584.53 75 L50_1 187.20 1601.46
36 L50_1 189.15 1584.95 76 L50_1 187.15 1601.88
37 L50_1 189.10 1585.36 77 L50_1 187.10 1602.31
38 L50_1 189.05 1585.78 78 L50_1 187.05 1602.74
39 L50_1 189.00 1586.20 79 L50_1 187.00 1602.17
40 L50_1 188.95 1586.62 80 L50_1 186.95 1603.57

176-Wavelength System
The wavelength allocation in a 176-channel system consisting of ZXWM
M900 is described in Table 169.


Appendix B
Configuration of Optical
Supervision System

This appendix describes the definition, working principle and configuration of
two kinds of supervision systems supported by the ZXWM M900: 2 M
supervision system and 100 M supervision system.
2 M Supervision System
Definition
The 2 M supervision system employs 32 bytes (64 kbit/s) to carry ECC data,
orderwire voice data, APS data and transparent user channel data of the
system, forwarding and exchanging them in the format of PCM32 frame.
The supervisory channel uses the 1510 nm wavelength. If the operating
wavelengths of the system only involve those in L band, the 1625 nm
wavelength will be used by the supervisory channel.
System Composition
The function of 2 M supervision system is mainly implemented by the NCP,
OSC and OHP board together.

Note: In the 2 M supervision system, the NCPF board can replace the NCP board to
complete the same function. In this case, the NET interface on the front panel of the
NCPF board should be connected to the EMS.

The control information between boards is transferred via the backplane.
Figure 172 illustrates the relationship between boards in the supervision
systems.



FI GURE 172 2 M SUPERVI SORY SYSTEM

Hardware Configurations
1. Installing boards
Insert the NCP (or NCPF), OSC and the OHP board into corresponding
slots in the OA subrack following the instruction in Table 7. These three
boards are mandatory for a 2 M supervision system.
2. Accessing to the EMS
The NCP or NCPF board implements the communication between the NE
and the EMS through the interface Qx.
For the NCP board, the Qx interface is the J9 interface in the common
interface area of the OA subrack.
For the NCPF board, the Qx interface is the NET interface on its front
panel.
If the NE communicates with the EMS directly, connect the network
interface of the NE to that of the NM computer with a crossover
network cable.
If the NE communicates with the EMS through a HUB, connect both
the network interface of the NE and that of the NM computer to the
HUB with straight network cables, as shown in Figure 172.
3. Connecting optical fibers
Connect optical fibers according to the actual networking and the
information forwarding direction to transfer the supervision information
between NEs.
Appendix B Configuration of Optical Supervision System

Connect the OSC board to the optical board of the main optical
channel (OA or OBM) with optical fibers following the instruction in
the section OSC Board.

Note: Each optical interface pair on the OSC board implements the recieving and
sending of the supervision information for one site.

Connect optical boards of the main optical channel with each other.
Refer to the instruction in the section OA Board for the connection
of OA boards.
Refer to the instruction in the section OBM Board for the connection
of OBM boards.
Optional Hardware Configurations
The following introduces optional configurations of a 2 M supervision system.
You can carry out corresponding configurations for the system according to
the actual requirements.
Adding a standby route
The standby route is the Ethernet route connecting NCP/NCPF boards of
all the NEs to the NM computer. When the optical supervisory channel
fails, the standby route can guarantee the forwarding and exchanging of
the supervision information.
When the NCP board is used, connect both the J9 interface of the OA
subrack and the network interface of the standby route to the HUB, as
shown in Figure 172.
When the NCPF board is used, connect both the NET interface on the
NCPF board and the network interface of the standby route to the HUB.
Managing the APS bus of multiple racks
In a 2 M supervision system, additional APSF boards are needed when
multiple racks have been equipped in the ZXWM M900 and so the APS
bus should be managed. The APSF board is used to transfer the APS bus
information between the master and the slave racks and implement the
APR function in multiple directions.
Transferring clock information in the TMUX subrack
If the ZXWM M900 in a 2 M supervision system implements the clock
function through the CA board in the TMUX subrack, an additional APSF
board is needed to transfer the clock information.

Note: The APSF board should be installed in the slot 9 of the OA subrack in the master
rack. Please refer to Table 8 for detailed information about the slot arrangement of
the OA subrack.



EMS Software Configurations
The ZXWM M900 is managed by the ZXONM E300 network management
software. The following introduces the common configuration of a 2 M
supervision system in the ZXONM E300.
Creating NEs in the 2 M supervision system
In the client operation window of ZXONM E300, click the menu item
Device Config > Create NE to create each NE in the supervision system
according to the requirements listed in Table 172.
TABLE 172 REQUI REMENTS ON THE CREATI ON OF NES I N A 2 M SUPERVI SI ON SYSTEM
I tem Requirement
System Type ZXWM M900
Device Type ZXWM M900
IP Address
The IP address of the NE should be unique in the whole network.
It is recommended to set 18 as the last section of the IP address.
Subnet Mask
The default setting is 255.255.255.0. It can be changed according to
actual requirements.
Others
There is no special requirement for other items. All the configuration
should observe the configuring principle of the EMS and be consistent
with the actual setting of the NE.

Double click the icon of the newly-created NE in the client operation
window to enter the Card Management dialog box.
Install the NCP, OHP, OSC and other service boards according to the
actual board configuration.
5. Establishing optical connections between NEs
Select the NEs to be connected in the client operation window, and then
click the menu item Device Config > Common Management > Link
Management to enter the Link dialog box.
Establish bidirectional optical connections between main optical channel
boards of each NE, such as OA boards.
6. Other configurations
If the orderwire function is needed, set the orderwire phone number for
each NE.
If it is necessary to deal with the transparent user channel data,
configure the user channel.
For more configuration operations in detail, please refer to related
manuals of the ZXONM E300.

100 M Supervision System
Definition and Features
The 100 M supervision system adopts the 10/100 M Ethernet technology to
encapsulate ECC data, orderwire voice data, APS data and transparent user
channel data in IP data packets. All these data are transferred and
exchanged in the format of Ethernet data frame.
The supervisory channel uses the 1510 nm wavelength. If the operating
wavelengths of the system only involve those in L band, the 1625 nm
wavelength will be used by the supervisory channel.
The 100 M supervision system shares the following features:
Supporting the supervision system at the rate of 10 Mbit/s and
100 Mbit/s
A 10 M supervision system is suitable for the long-distance
transmission complying with Ethenet protocols.
A 100 M supervision system is suitable for the short-distance
transmission complying with Ethenet protocols.
If the span is too large, which may cause too much line loss, we can
implement the in-band supervision by accessing the 100 M
supervision information to OTU boards. The precondition is that the
OTU boards support the accessing of continuous-rate traffic.
Compying with the OSPF protocol and supporting dynamic routes. When
the network topology changes, it will collect and regenerate the route
table automatically to keep the supervison channel unobstructed.
Performing various protection and control functions, such as APS MS and
channel protection, APR control and clock management
Adopting the VoIP technology to improve the orderwire communication
capability and expandability
Providing the transparent user channel based on RS232/RS422
interfaces, and supporting the communication between Ethernet
interfaces in the whole network
Supporting QoS guarantee by updating board software, which ensures
that IP packets with the higher priority, such as APS and voice data
packets, can be forwarded first.
Supporting large-scale networking, while just occupying rather few IP
addresses



System Composition
The function of 100 M supervision system is mainly implemented by the
NCPF, OSCF, APSF and OHPF board together.
Figure 173 illustrates the basic structure of a 100 M supervision system.
FI GURE 173 100 M SUPERVI SORY SYSTEM

In the figure above, the number 1 6 indicates six electrical Ethernet
interfaces on the OSCF board respectively (port 1 port 6); while the
number 7 and 8 indicates two optical interfaces respectively on the OSCF
board (IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2).
Due to the compliance with the OSPF protocol, the NCPF, APSF, OHPF,
slave OSCF, the standby route and the NM computer can be connected to
any one of port 1 port 6. There is no fixed relationship between the
ports and boards.
More than four optical supervision directions can be implemented by
equipping the OA subrack with more than two OSCF boards, among
which one OSCF board must be inserted into the slot 7. In this way, it is
unnecessary to configure several racks.


Note: This section only introduces the configuration of a 100 M supervision system
for your reference. The configuration of a 10 M supervision system is similar to that
of the 100 M supervision system.
For a 100 M supervision system, the NCPF, OSCF, APSF and OHPF board
must be installed in the OA subrack following the instruction in Table 9.

Note: If only two or less optical supervision directions are needed, insert one OSCF
board into the slot 7 of the OA subrack.
If three or more optical supervision directions are needed, insert more OSCF boards.
One of these OSCF boards should be inserted into the slot 7 of the OA subrack. Other
OSCF boards can be inserted into other unused slots of the OA subrack without
restriction.

2. Connecting network cables
In the 100 M supervision system, the control information between boards
is transferred via Ethernet interfaces on the front panel of the boards.
Connect the system boards, the standby route and the NM computer to
any one of the port 1 port 6 on the OSCF board.
i. The electrical Ethernet interfaces on the OSCF board have the
automatic crossover function. Therefore, they can be connected to
the boards or other devices with either crossover network cables or
straight-through network cables.
ii. If a standby route is needed, connect it to one electrical Ethernet
interface on the OSCF board.
iii. Each NCPF board can manage four racks. If there are more than four
racks, additional NCPF boards are needed. In this case, connect each
NCPF board to the OSCF board through a HUB.
iv. Each APSF board can support the transfer of the protection and
switching information among four racks. If there are more than four
racks, additional APSF boards are needed. In this case, connect each
APSF board to the OSCF board through a HUB.
3. Connecting optical fibers
Connect optical fibers according to the actual networking and the
forwarding direction to transfer the supervision information between
NEs.
Connect the OSCF board to optical boards of the main optical channel
(OA or OBM) with optical fibers following the instruction in the section
OSC Board.



Note: Each optical interface pair on the OSCF board implements the recieving and
sending of the supervision information for one site.


Note: Only the ZXONM E300 with the version V3.16R2 or above supports the
configuration of the 100 M supervision system consisting of ZXWM M900.

The following introduces the configuration steps of a 100 M supervision
system in the ZXONM E300.
1. Creating NEs in the 100 M supervision system
In the client operation window of ZXONM E300, click the menu item
Device Config > Create NE to create each NE in the supervision system
according to the requirements listed in Table 173.
TABLE 173 REQUI REMENTS ON THE CREATI ON OF NES I N A 100 M SUPERVI SI ON SYSTEM
I tem Requirement
System Type ZXWM M900 (100M)
Device Type ZXWM M900 (100M)
IP Address
The IP address of the NE should be unique in the whole network.
The last section of the IP address should be n32+1, where n is an
integer and n 7.
Subnet Mask
The default setting is 255.255.255.224. It can be changed according to
actual requirements.
Others
There is no special requirement for other items. All the configuration
should observe the configuring principle of the EMS and be consistent
with the actual setting of the NE.

Double click the icon of the newly-created NE in the client operation
window to enter the Card Management dialog box.
Install the NCPF, APSF, OHPF, OSCF and other service boards according
to the actual board configuration.
3. Establishing optical connections between NEs
Select the NEs to be connected in the client operation window, and then
click the menu item Device Config > Common Management > Link
Management to enter the Link dialog box.
Establish bidirectional optical connections between main optical channel
boards of each NE, such as OA boards.
4. Setting the IP address of OSCF


Select the NE in the client operation window, and then click the menu
item Device Config > 100M Route Management > Card IP
Configure. Set the IP address in the popped up dialog box based on the
following principles.
Electric Port 1-6
The Electric Port 1-6 in the Address SN column correspond to six
optical interfaces on the OSCF board respectively. These six optical
interfaces share the same IP address together, which are allocated by
the EMS automatically according to the IP address of the NE.
Optical Port 7/Optical Port 8
The Optical Port 7 and Optical Port 8 in the Address SN column
correspond to the optical interface IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2
respectively, which are the communication interfaces between the
OSCF boards of two adjacent NEs. Their IP address should be set
according to the optical connection relationship between NEs. Table
174 describes the configuration principles of them.
TABLE 174 CONFI GURATI ON PRI NCI PLE OF I P ADDRESS OF OPTI CAL I NTERFACES ON OSCF
BOARD
I tem Configuration Principle
IP Address
It can not conflict with other IP addresses in the network.
If two OSCF boards are connected to each other with optical fibers, the
IP addresses of corresponding optical interfaces should be set in the
same network section.
If there is no optical connection between two OSCF boards, the IP
addresses of their optical interfaces can not be set in the same network
section. For example, the IP address of the optical interface 7 and that of
the optical interface 8 on the same OSCF board can not be set in the
same network section.
Subnet Mask
The default setting is 255.255.255.0. It can be changed according to actual
requirements. If the optical interface has not been enabled, set 0.0.0.0 as the
subnet mask.
Area ID
The default value is 0. It is recommended to adopt the default value when the
quantity of NEs is less than 200.

Checkpoint: To enable the IP address, you must reset the OSCF board through
hardware or NM software after configuring its IP address.

5. Configuring the multicast group route
If the function of orderwire or MS protection is needed in the supervision
system, you should calculate the route of corresponding multicast group
first in the EMS.

Checkpoint: Only after the orderwire or MS protecion has been configured correctly,
can the system generate corresponding multicast group automatically. For the



configuration operations in detail, please refer to related manuals of the ZXONM
E300.

The 100 M supervision system issues the orderwire and protection
switching commands to related NEs in the multicast group following the
multicast mode. Each supervision system involves three multicast
groups, one orderwire group and two protection groups. The system
generates the IP addresses of these multicast groups automatically,
which are in the multicast network section (224.*.*.*).
Configure the multicast group route by the following steps:
i. Select the NE in the client operation window, and then click the menu
Device Config > 100M Route Management > NE Multicast
Group Route to pop up the configuration dialog box;
ii. Select the group in the Select Group pull-down list, and then click
the Calculation and Apply button to load the route information to
the board.


Ap p e n d i x C
Configuration of Integrated
Wavelength Supervision
Subsystem

This appendix introduces the basic concepts, hardware continuation and
software configuration of the integrated wavelength supervision subsystem.
Overview
Stable wavelengths reflect that their corresponding frequencies do not drift.
The impact of frequency drift on the system is relatively small in a DWDM
system with the channel spacing at 100 GHz. However, in a system with
higher single channel rate and smaller channel spacing (for example, in an
80-channel system with the spacing at 50 GHz), the frequency drift will
impact on the system stability directly.
The ZXWM M900 supports two wavelength stabilization modes suitable for
systems with different channel spacings.
For systems with the spacing at 100 GHz, the automatic power control,
and the temperature and internal wavelength feedback is used to
stabilize wavelengths via optical transponder boards.
For systems with the spacing at 50 GHz, the internal and external
wavelength feedback is adopted to improve the stability and precision of
wavelength control.
Internal wavelength feedback: Its function is same as that of system
with the spacing at 100 GHz, which is performed by optical
transponder boards.
External wavelength feedback: This function is implemented through
integrated inspection and sequence adjustment. This mode is
adopted in integrated wavelength supervision subsystems.
The following sections describe the configuration of integrated supervision
subsystem in detail.


Subsystem Composition
An integrated wavelength supervision subsystem is composed of OWM board,
boards of multiplexing type, optical transponder boards, NCP or NCPF board
and the EMS ZXONM E300. Figure 174 illustrates the functional block
diagram of the subsystem.
FI GURE 174 I NTEGRATED WAVELENGTH SUPERVI SI ON SUBSYSTEM
OWM
Multiplexing
board
O
T
U
1
O
T
U
2
O
T
U
n
NCP/NCPF
...
Output of OTU
Output from MON
interface
Wavelength control information
ZXONM E300

The function of each board in the subsystem is described as follows.
OWM board
Detecting the wavelength deviation of each channel in the aggregate
optical signal, and informing the NCP/NCPF board if the deviation of
any wavelength is out of limit.
Receiving commands relative to wavelength adjustment from the
ZXONM E300, and then feeding the adjusting result back to the
ZXONM E300.
NCP/NCPF board
It receives the wavelength adjustment commands from the OWM board,
and forwards the commands to corresponding optical transponder
boards until the wavelength deviation meets the requirement.
Multiplexing board
It outputs the aggregate optical signal, which will be inspected, to the
OWM board. In actual connections, the aggregate optical signal is output
from the MON interface on the board of amplification type.
Optical transponder board
It receives the wavelength adjustment command from the NCP/NCPF
board, and then sends the adjusting result back to the NCP/NCPF board.
It can be the board of OTU series, SRM41, SRM42 or GEMF board. The
channel spacing of the board should be 50 GHz.
Appendix C Configuration of Integrated Wavelength Supervision Subsystem

ZXONM E300
Users can set related parameters, enables or disables the wavelength
adjustment function through the ZXONM E300, which gives the
adjustment command to the OWM board.
In terms of equipment type in DWDM systems, this section introduces the
hardware configuration of OTM and OADM equipment for an integrated
wavelength supervision subsystem.
Configurations of OTM
Taking an 80-channel DWDM system as example, Figure 175 illustrates the
position of OWM board configured in OTM equipment.
FI GURE 175 POSI TI ON OF OWM BOARD I N OTM EQUI PMENT

As shown in Figure 175, the OWM board is equipped at the transmitting
end, with the IN interface connected to the MON interface on the OBA
board.
The wavelengths of all the OTUs monitored by the OWM board should be
in either C band or L band. For a DWDM system involving wavelengths in
C+L band, two OWM boards should be equipped, one for wavelengths in
C band and the other for those in L band.


The OWM board and all the OTUs monitored by it must be managed by
the same NCP/NCPF board. In other words, the OWM board and all the
monitored OTU boards should be installed in the cabinet(s) managed by
the same NCP/NCPF board.
For back-to-back OTM equipment, boards of two optical directions should
be installed in two different cabinets. In each cabinet, mount the
NCP/NCPF board and OWM board of one direction.
Configurations of OADM
Taking a bidirectional OADM site as example, Figure 176 illustrates the
position of OWM board configured in OADM equipment.
FI GURE 176 POSI TI ON OF OWM BOARD I N OADM EQUI PMENT
OAD
OAD
OPA
OBA
OBA
OPA
OSC OSC
OWM
OWM
MON
interface
MON
interface
OTU
OTU

In OADM equipment, the OWM board only monitors the added wavelengths
instead of those passing through.
The IN interface on the OWM board is connected to the MON interface on
the OBA board so as to monitor the wavelengths added at the OAD
board.
An OWM board can only monitor wavelengths in the same band. For a
DWDM system involving wavelengths in C+L band, two OWM boards
should be equipped, one for wavelengths in C band and the other for
those in L band.
One OWM board should be equipped in each line direction of OADM
equipment, so that the EMS can filter the supervision wavelength
according to the direction information.
The OWM board and all the OTUs monitored by it must be managed by
the same NCP/NCPF board. In other words, the OWM board and all the
monitored OTU boards should be installed in the cabinet(s) managed by
the same NCP/NCPF board.
Appendix C Configuration of Integrated Wavelength Supervision Subsystem


software configuration of integrated wavelength supervision subsystems.

The EMS software configurations for an integrated wavelength supervision
subsystem include the setting of supervision wavelength, and the
commanding of inspection and adjustment etc.
The detailed configurations are described in Table 175 as follows.
TABLE 175 EMS SOFTWARE CONFI GURATI ONS OF I NTEGRATED WAVELENGTH
SUPERVI SI ON SUBSYSTEM
1. Automatic Wavelength Adjustment Configuration
Purpose
To set the inspection port of the OWM board, enable or disable the
inspection and adjustment of the wavelengths for the boards
monitored by the OWM board.
Menu Item
Maintenance > Power Management > OWM Set Wavelength
Auto Adjustment
Configuration
Board: Select an OWM board from the pull-down list box to
display the information about all the OTU boards which can be
monitored by this OWM board in the dialog box.
I n Port: Select the inspection port, Port1 or Port2, from
corresponding pull-down list box. The default option is Port1. The
Port2 is usually used for the automatic calibration function.
Whether Auto Inspect: Select from the pull-down list box to
enable or disable the automatic wavelength inspection function for
each board one by one. You can also tick the Whole Inspect
check box to enable the function for all boards at one time.
Enable Adjust: Select or unselect this check box to enable or
disable the automatic adjustment function for all boards whose
automatic inspection function has been enabled.
Result
After selecting the OWM board, the EMS will filter out the boards
with the wavelength locking function and those without the
wavelength adjustment function.
After the supervision command has been given, the OWM board
will report the alarm when the wavelength drift of the inspected
OTU is out of limit.
After the adjustment command has been given, the OTU adjusts
the wavelength automatically when the wavelength drift of the
inspected OTU is out of limit.



2. Automatic Calibration Configuration
Purpose
Optical components age after longtime running, due to which the
wavelength inspection error can not meet the requirement of index. In
order to guarantee the system precision, the automatic calibration
function is provided. Offering a standard wavelength to the OWM
board, the EMS gives an automatic calibration command. Then the
OWM board calculates the deviation between the measured
wavelength and the standard one. When the OWM inspect the
operating wavelength, it will deduct the deviation from the measured
value to ensure the precision.
Menu Item Maintenance > Power Management > OWM Calibrate
Configuration
Board: Select an OWM board from the pull-down list box.
Port: Select the inspection port of the OWM board. The default
option is Port2.
Frequency (THz): Select the calibrating wavelength (unit: THz).
Result
Click the Apply button to give the calibration command, and then the
OWM board will return the calibration result.


Ap p e n d i x D
Configuration of OMS Layer
Power Management
Subsystem

This appendix introduces the basic concepts and configurations of the Optical
Multiplex Section (OMS) layer power management.
Introduction to Automatic Power
Management
The ZXWM M900 provides the automatic power management function by
adopting the optical power equalization technology for the OMS layer and the
Optical Channel (OCH) layer
Power management of OCH layer
The purpose of OCH power management is to establish and hold the
power equalization of the optical channel. It includes the fixed power
compensation and the dynamic channel power management.
Fixed power compensation: It uses the LAC board with Gain
Flattening Filter (GFF) to ensure the flatness of the gain spectrum.
Dynamic channel power management: It uses the VMUX board and
adopts the gain spectrum slope adjustment technology, dynamic
gain equalization technology, and the optical performance
supervision technology to solve the problem of power disequilibrium
between different channels, which is caused by non-linearity effect
and unflatness accumulation of multi-stage OAs in ultra long-haul
and large-capacity systems.
Power management of OMS layer
The purpose of OMS power management is to establish and keep the
optimal status of OMS aggregate power. The following sections introduce
the concept and implementation of OMS power management.


Power Management of OMS
Layer
Working principle
The power management of OMS layer is based on each power
management domain. A power management domain is the transmission
section between two OTMs, that is, the OMS, as shown in Figure 177.
FI GURE 177 POWER MANAGEMENT DOMAI N
OTM OTM OLA OLA OLA OLA
A1 A2 A3 An
G1 G2 G3 Gn-1
OMS
OTS OTS
Gn
NODE1 NODE2 NODE3 NODEn-1 NODEn

OMS: Optical Multiplex Section
OTS: Optical Transmission Section
Ax: Line attenuation before node x, x=1, 2, 3, , n
Gx: Gain of node x, x=1, 2, 3, , n-1, n

The power of the OMS layer is optimized according to the preset
parameters of the system and the current power of each OTS. Ideally,
the difference between gain attenuation meets the following formula.
0
1 1
=

= =
n
i
n
i
Ai Gi
In actual optical path, the optimization begins once the attenuation
difference meets the fault condition of OMS power management. When
the difference reaches the value in a specified range, the optimization
ends. Finally, it ensures that all the attenuation difference in the same
OMS approaches to zero.

Appendix D Configuration of OMS Layer Power Management Subsystem

Hardware and Software Support
The power management function of OMS layer needs related hardware
and software support, as listed in Table 176.
TABLE 176 HARDWARE/ SOFTWARE NEEDED I N POWER MANAGEMENT OF OMS LAYER
Hardware/ Software Function
LAC
It determines the attenuation amount of LAC according to
the optimization algorithm when the line attenuation
changes.
OA
HOBA
Hardware
(Board)
DRA
They provide the gain adjustment function through
determining the gain according to the optimization algorithm
when the line attenuation changes.
Software
(EMS)
ZXONM E300
It supports the setting of related parameters of power
management, the query of current power status, the
commanding of power management. However, only the
ZXONM E300 of V3.16R2 or above supports these
operations.

Division of Power Management Domain
The OMS layer power management requires that the performance of
each power management domain is independent, such as the power and
SNR. The division of power management domain is different for systems
with different channels, as described below.
Systems with channels less than 80
In such systems, every OTM and OADM, OADM and OADM, and every
OTM and OTM constructs their respective power management
domain. Taking an 80-channel system as example, Figure 178
illustrates an OMS power management domain between two OTMs.
In the figure, all the OLAs between OTM1 and OTM2 are omitted.
FI GURE 178 DI VI SI ON OF POWER MANAGEMENT DOMAI N ( 80- CHANNEL SYSTEM)
OMU
(C)
OTU
.
.
OMU
(C+)
OTU
.
.
OCI
(C)
O
S
C
DRA
OCI
(C)
ODU
(C)
ODU
(C+)
OTU
.
.
OTU
.
.
OTM1 OTM2
O
S
C
DCM VGSC
OPM
OBA
OBA OPA
OMS



The OA, LAC, HOBA and DRA boards in the OMS can all be taken as
the monitoring boards and the implementing boards of this power
management domain.
Systems with channels more than 80
When a system has more than 80 operating wavelengths covering C
band and L band, the power management domain should be divided
into the domain of C band and that of L band, as illustrated in Figure
179. All the OLAs between OTM1 and OTM2 are omitted in the figure.
FI GURE 179 DI VI SI ON OF POWER MANAGEMENT DOMAI N ( MORE THAN 80 CHANNELS)
OMU
(C)
OTU
.
.
OMU
(C+)
OTU
.
.
OMU
(L)
OTU
.
.
OMU
(L+)
OTU
.
.
OCI
(C)
OCI
(L)
OBM
C/L
OBA
OBA
O
S
C
OBM
(C/L)
O
S
C
OPA OBA
DCM VGSC
OPA OBA
DCM VGSC
OPM
OPM
DRA
OCI
(C)
OCI
(L)
ODU
(C)
ODU
(C+)
ODU
(L)
ODU
(L+)
OTU
.
.
OTU
.
.
OTU
.
.
OTU
.
.
OTM1 OTM2
OMS (C Band)
OMS (L Band)

In the OMS (C Band), all the OA, LAC and HOBA boards processing
optical signals in C band can be taken as the monitoring boards and
the implementing boards of the C band power management domain.
In the OMS (L Band), all the OA, LAC and HOBA boards processing
optical signals in L band can be taken as the monitoring boards and
the implementing boards of the L band power management domain.

Note: The DRA board amplifies both the optical signals in C band and those in L band,
which makes the C band and L band can not be independent of each other. Therefore,
in systems with channels more than 80, the DRA board can not be taken as the
implementing board in the power management domain.

Working Conditions of OMS Power Optimization
When the ZXONM E300 detects that the gain attenuation difference
meets the start/end condition of power optimization, it will give the
start/end command to corresponding boards.
The OMS layer power management includes the following two modes:


OMS layer power optimization: The operator gets the adjustment
value of each executor according to the automatic power
optimization algorithm, determines whether to modify the value, and
then gives the adjustment command to the board through the
ZXONM E300.
Automatic power management: The operator sets the optimization
conditions first. The ZXONM E300 will send the adjustment value
calculated through the optimization algorithm automatically to the
board without the need of manual operation.
Table 177 describes the working conditions of the two optimization
modes with default settings.
TABLE 177 WORKI NG CONDI TI ONS OF OMS LAYER POWER MANAGEMENT
Default Threshold
Working
Condition
Fault
OMS Power
Optimization
Automatic Power
Management
Remark
OTS
attenuation
mismatch
2 dB 2 dB
It can be
changed in the
ZXONM E300.
OMS
attenuation
mismatch
3 dB 3dB
It can be
changed in the
ZXONM E300.
Optimization
starting
OMS
normalized
optical power
difference
between the
beginning
and the end
OA
2 dB 2 dB
It can be
changed in the
ZXONM E300.
OTS
attenuation
mismatch
1 dB 1 dB -
OMS
attenuation
mismatch
1 dB 1 dB -
Optimization
ending
OMS
normalized
optical power
difference
between the
beginning
and the end
OA
1 dB 1 dB -
No input light - - -
No output
light
- - -
Optimization
failure
OTS
attenuation
mismatch
3 dB -
It can be
changed in the
ZXONM E300.


Default Threshold
Working
Condition
Fault
OMS Power
Optimization
Automatic Power
Management
Remark
OMS
attenuation
mismatch
4 dB -
It can be
changed in the
ZXONM E300.
OMS
normalized
optical power
difference
between the
beginning
and the end
OA
3 dB -
It can be
changed in the
ZXONM E300.

EMS Configurations

configuration of the OMS layer power management function.

This section introduces the creation and configuration of the OMS power
management domain.

Checkpoint: Before the configuration, you should check the following items first.
All necessary boards have been installed correctly;
The optical connections are correct;
The EMS communicates with the NE well.

Creating an OMS Power Management
Subsystem
The following describes the steps to create an OMS power management
subsystem.
1. Establish the optical connection of main optical channel between NEs
i. In the Main View of the client operation window, select the source
NE and the destination NE;
ii. Click the menu item Device Config > Common Management >
Link Management to establish the optical connections between
boards for the main optical channel according to the actual
networking requirements.


2. Establish the optical connections between boards in each NE
i. In the Main View of the client operation window, select the NE;
ii. Click the menu item Device Config > Common Management >
Inner Connection of NEs to pop up the configuration dialog box;
iii. Select a source board and then click the Config button;
iv. In the pop-up dialog box, select the destination board and establish
the optical connection between ports of the boards according to the
traffic flow direction.
3. Enable the SNMS resource
The OMS layer power management subsystem is a kind of Subnet
Management System (SNMS). Its functions can only be implemented in
the WDM SNMS View of the client operation window.
i. Open the WDM SNMS View in the client operation window first, and
then click the menu item System > SNMS Start/Stop to pop up the
SNMS Start Config dialog box.
ii. Click the Start button to enable the SNMS resource.

4. Configure the SNMS resource
Search the information about OTS/OMS already created in the SNMS and
save the searching result.

Note: Only when some connections in NEs or between NEs change, should the SNMS
resource be reconfigured. If no connection changes, and the SNMS resource has been
configured, this step can be skipped.

i. In the WDM SNMS View of the client operation window, click the
menu item Config > SNMS Resource Config to pop up the SNMS
Config dialog box.
ii. Click the Auto Compute button to refresh the information about
OTS/OMS in the EMS database.
iii. Select All Records in the Compute Result dialog box and then click
the Apply button.

5. Configure the power management domain

Note: If the power management domain adopts the default parameters, this stepcan
be skipped.

i. In the WDM SNMS View, click the menu item Power Adjust >
Power Management Domain Config to pop up the PNMS Config
dialog box;



ii. Select the PNMS Layer to configure the power management layer,
and then select the OMS layer (namely, power management domain)
and the PNMS layer (namely, OTS) from corresponding pull-down list
box;
iii. Click the Config Monitor button to select the monitor board in the
pop-up dialog box;
iv. Click the Config Executer button to select the executer board in the
pop-up dialog box;
v. In the Parameter Config combo box, set the SOTS attenuation limit,
OA supplemental gain, OMS compute powers K value and the OMS
mismatch power;
vi. Select the OMS in the SNMS TYPE combo box and then select the
OMS layer (namely, power management domain) to be configured.
vii. In the OMS configuration, set the corresponding parameters.
Configuring the OMS Power Management
Subsystem
After the OMS power management domain has been created successfully,
configure the management domain in the ZXONM E300 to implement the
OMS layer power optimization, automatic power management and the query
of optimization logs. Table 178 describes the configuration operations in
detail.
TABLE 178 CONFI GURATI ONS OF OMS POWER MANAGEMENT SUBSYSTEM
1. Configure OMS Layer Power Optimization
Purpose
To query current performance and optimization result of the OMS power
management domain, modify the adjustment value manually and issue
the command
Menu Item WDM SNMS View: Power Adjust > OMS Optimize
Query current performance of the OMS power management domain:
In the OMS optimization dialog box, select the PNMS, click the
Query performance button, and then the current power, modified
value and attenuation of each OTS will be shown in Monitor state,
Executer current value and SOTS attenuation list boxes.
Query the power optimization result:
In the OMS optimization dialog box, select the PNMS, click the
Power optimization button to display the attenuation sum of OMS
and each OTS after the optimization in the pop-up dialog box.
The query result is shown in the Monitor state, Executer current
value and SOTS attenuation list boxes. Moreover, the Executer
modified value list box displays the modified value of current
executor calculated by using the optimization algorithm.
Configuration
Adjust the modified value of the executer manually:
Click the Power optimization button to query the optimization
result of the PNMS first, modify the value in the Executer modified
value list box and then click the Apply button.

Result
This function is only effective for NEs in normal communication with
the EMS.
In the SOTS attenuation list box, the yellow background of a
queried item indicates that the attenuation sum of this OTS exceeds
the matching threshold.
In the Executer modified value list box, the yellow background of
a queried item indicates that the executer board should be adjusted
according to the optimization algorithm. At the same time, the
recommended value is displayed in the Modified value column,
which can be changed.
2. Configure Automatic Power Management
Purpose
To set the stop condition of automatic power management, configure the
time interval, enable or disable the automatic power management
Menu Item
WDM SNMS View: Power Adjust > Auto Power Optimize
Management
Configuration
1. Set the time interval of the automatic power management;
2. Set the stop condition of automatic power management. The
optimization will be stopped once any condition is met.
It is recommended to set the stop condition as follows.
One OTS gain decrease exceeds 3 dB
OMS gain decrease exceeds 4 dB
OMS OA power margin exceeds 3 dB
3. Click the Query button to report information about all the PNMSs
managed by the server (manager);
4. Configure the power management region. The Power Region
Config list box displays all the PNMSs which have been configured.
5. Enable or disable the PNMS. By default, the automatic power
management function is disabled.
Result
This function is only effective for NEs in normal communication with
the EMS.
If the automatic power management is enabled, the optimization
result can not be changed manually during the optimization.
3. Query Power Management Log
Purpose
To query the records of power optimization and automatic power
management
Menu Item WDM SNMS View: Power Adjust > Power Optimize Log Query
Configuration
Set the query condition (time period) in the dialog box, and click the
Query button to display the optimization log.
Or click the Advance button to set the filter condition (Succeed or Failed),
and select the PNMS to be queried.
Result
In the log, the Operation Type column displays the type of the OMS
power optimization, manually or automatically.




Abbreviations

Abbreviation Full Name
AFR Absolute Frequency Reference
AFEC Advanced FEC
AGENT Agent
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
APO Auto Performance Optimization
APR Automatic Power Reduction
APS Automatic Protection Switching
APSD Automatic Power ShutDown
APSF Automatic Protection Switching for FastEthernet
ASE Amplified Spontaneous Emission
AWG Array Waveguide Grating
BER Bit Error Ratio
BLSR Bidirectional Line Switching Ring
BSHR Bidirectional Self-Healing Ring
CDR Clock and Data Recovery
CMI Code Mark Inversion
CODEC Code and Decode
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
DBMS Database Management System
DCC Data Communications Channel
DCF Dispersion Compensation Fiber
DCG Dispersion Compensation Grating
DCN Data Communications Network
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module
DDI Double Defect Indication
DGFF Dynamic Gain Flattening Filter
DSF Dispersion Shifted Fiber
DGD Differential Group Delay
DTMF Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency


DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
DVB Digital Video Broadcasting
DXC Digital Cross-connect
EAM Electrical Absorption Modulation
ECC Embedded Control Channel
EDFA Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier
EFEC Enhanced FEC
ERZ Electrical Return to Zero
ES Errored Second
ESCON Enterprise System Connection
EX Extinction Ratio
FC Fiber Channel
FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface
FDI Forward Defection Indication
FEC Forward Error Correction
FICON Fiber Connection
FPDC Fiber Passive Dispersion Compensator
FWM Four Wave Mixing
GE Gigabits Ethernet
GEF Gain Equalizing Filter
GFF Gain Flattening Filter
GUI Graphical User Interfaces
HDTV High Definition TV
Interleaver -
IP Internet Protocol
IWF Integrated Wavelength Feedback
LD Laser Diode
LOF Loss of Frame
LOS Loss of Signal
MANAGER Manager
MCU Management and Control Unit
MBOTU OTU Main Board
MQW Multiple Quantum Well
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MST Multiplex Section Termination
NE Network Element
NNI Network Node Interface
Abbreviations

NMCC Network Manage Control Center
NRZ Non Return to Zero
NT Network Termination
NZDSF Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted Fiber
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
OBA Optical Booster Amplifier
OCH Optical Channel
ODF Optical fiber Distribution Frame
ODU Optical channel Data Unit
OGMD Optical Group Mux/DeMux Board
OLA Optical Line Amplifier
OLT Optical Line Termination
ONU Optical Network Unit
OP Optical Protection Unit
OPA Optical PreAmplifier
OSNR Optical Signal-Noise Ratio
OTM Optical Terminal
OTN Optical Transport Network
OXC Optical Cross-connect
PDC Passive Dispersion Compensator
PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion
PDL Polarization Dependent Loss
RAC Receiver Adaptive Control
RZ Return to Zero
SAN Storage Area Network
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SEF Severely Errored Frame
SES Severely Errored Second
SFP Small Form Factor Pluggable
SLIC Subscriber Line Interface Circuit
SMCC Sub-network Management Control Center
SMT Surface Mount
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
STM Synchronous Transfer Mode


SWE Electrical Switching Board
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TFF Thin Film Filter
TMN Telecommunications Management Network
TTI Trail Trace Identifier
UAS Unavailable Second
VCF Voltage-Controlled Optical Filter
VOA Variable Optical Attenuator
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing


Figures

Figure 1 Outline and Dimensions of ZTE Cabinet (with Depth 300 mm) ............... 2
Figure 2 Basic Fittings in ZTE Cabinet............................................................. 3
Figure 3 Grounding Terminals in Cabinet ........................................................ 5
Figure 4 Components Position in Cabinet ....................................................... 8
Figure 5 Structure of OA Subrack .................................................................. 9
Figure 6 Outline of Dustproof Net .................................................................11
Figure 7 Left Fiber Cable Reel-in Box.............................................................11
Figure 8 Boards Arrangement in OA Subrack (for 2 M Supervisory System without
APSF) ...............................................................................................12
Figure 9 Boards Arrangement in OA Subrack (for 2 M Supervisory System with APSF)
........................................................................................................13
Figure 10 Boards Arrangement in OA Subrack (for 100 M Supervisory System) ...14
Figure 11 Common Interface Area on Backplane of OA Subrack ........................15
Figure 12 Pins Order of DIP Switch (J10) .......................................................16
Figure 13 Pins of J1/J17 Power Socket ..........................................................19
Figure 14 DB9 Socket (male) .......................................................................19
Figure 15 DB9 Socket (female) ....................................................................20
Figure 16 Structure of OTU Subrack..............................................................22
Figure 17 Board Slots in OTU Subrack...........................................................23
Figure 18 Common Interface Area on Backplane of OTU Subrack ......................24
Figure 19 Board Slots in TMUX Subrack.........................................................26
Figure 20 Common Interface Area on TMUX Backplane ....................................27
Figure 21 Structure of Orderwire Phone Bracket .............................................29
Figure 22 Structure of Independent Fan Unit..................................................30
Figure 23 Maintenance of Independent Fan Unit .............................................31
Figure 24 Structure of Power Alarm Subrack ..................................................31
Figure 25 Structure of Power Distribution Subrack ..........................................32
Figure 26 Structure of Monitoring Plug-in Box.................................................34
Figure 27 Outline of ODF Plug-in Box ............................................................35
Figure 28 Inner Structure of ODF Plug-in Box.................................................35
Figure 29 Position and Number of Optical Connectors on ODF Board..................35
Figure 30 Structure of DCM Plug-in Box.........................................................36
Figure 31 Structure of OTU Board.................................................................41
Figure 32 Structure of PBX Board .................................................................42
Figure 33 Structure of PWSB Board...............................................................43
Figure 34 Structure of FCB Board .................................................................44
Figure 35 Operating Principle of Terminal OTU Board.......................................46
Figure 36 Operating Principle of Regenerator OTU Board..................................46
Figure 37 Front Panel of OTU Board ..............................................................48
Figure 38 Operating Principle of Terminal OTUF Board .....................................53
Figure 39 Operating Principle of Regenerator OTUF Board ................................53
Figure 40 Front Panel of OTUF Board.............................................................55
Figure 41 Operating Principle of Single-Path Bidirectional OTU10G ....................61
Figure 42 Operating Principle of Single-channel Unidirectional OTU10G G...........61
Figure 43 Front Panel of Single-Path Bidirectional OTU10G Board......................62
Figure 44 Operating Principle of Single-Channel Bidirectional EOTU10G............67
Figure 45 Operating Principle of Regenerator EOTU10G..................................68
Figure 46 Front Panel of Single-Channel Bidirectional EOTU10G Board .............70
Figure 47 Operating Principle of SRM41/SRM42 Board .....................................77
Figure 48 Front Panel of SRM41 Board ..........................................................79


Figure 49 Operating Principle of GEM2 Board................................................87
Figure 50 Front Panel of GEM2 Board ..........................................................89
Figure 51 Operating Principle of GEMF Board..................................................94
Figure 52 Front Panel of GEMF Board ............................................................97
Figure 53 Operating Principle of GEM8 Board..............................................103
Figure 54 Front Panel of GEM8 Board ........................................................104
Figure 55 Operating Principle of DSA Board................................................112
Figure 56 Front Panel of DSA Board ..........................................................114
Figure 57 TM Working Mode of DSA Board .................................................117
Figure 58 OAD Working Mode of DSA Board ...............................................117
Figure 59 Operating Principle of DSAF Board ..............................................125
Figure 60 Front Panel of DSAF Board.........................................................128
Figure 61 Operating Principle of DSAE Board ..............................................137
Figure 62 Front Panel of DSAE Board.........................................................139
Figure 63 TM Working Mode of DSAE Board................................................141
Figure 64 OAD Working Mode of DSAE Board..............................................142
Figure 65 Operating Principle of SMU Board................................................147
Figure 66 Front Panel of SMU Board..........................................................149
Figure 67 Operating Principle of OCI Board ..................................................155
Figure 68 Front Panel of OCI Board.............................................................156
Figure 69 Optical Connections of OCI Boards in an 80/96-Channel System.......158
Figure 70 Optical Connections of OCI Boards in a 160/176-Channel System......159
Figure 71 Operating Principle of OBM Board .................................................160
Figure 72 Front Panel of OBM Board............................................................162
Figure 73 Optical Connections of OBM Boards...............................................164
Figure 74 Operating Principle of OMU Board.................................................166
Figure 75 Front Panel of OMU40 Board........................................................168
Figure 76 Optical Connections of OMU Board (Wavelength Number n 40).....170
Figure 77 Optical Connections of OMU Board (more than 48-channel) ..............170
Figure 78 Operating Principle of VMUX Board ...............................................172
Figure 79 Front Panel of VMUX Board..........................................................173
Figure 80 Optical Connections of VMUX Board ..............................................175
Figure 81 Operating Principle of ODU Board .................................................176
Figure 82 Front Panel of ODU Board............................................................178
Figure 83 Optical Connection of ODU Board (Wavelength Number n 40) ......180
Figure 84 Operating Principle of OAD Board (8 Wavelengths)..........................181
Figure 85 Front Panel of OAD8 Board ..........................................................182
Figure 86 Optical Connections of OAD8 Board ..............................................184
Figure 87 Operating Principle of WBU/AD2 Board ........................................186
Figure 88 Operating Principle of WBU/DGE Board..........................................187
Figure 89 Front Panel of WBU Board..........................................................188
Figure 90 Optical Connections of WBU/AD2 Baord .......................................190
Figure 91 Operating Principle of WSUD/MA2 Board........................................193
Figure 92 Operating Principle of WSUD/E Board............................................194
Figure 93 Operating Principle of WSUA/MD2 Board........................................195
Figure 94 Operating Principle of WSUA/E Board ............................................195
Figure 95 Front Panel of WSU Board..........................................................196
Figure 96 Optcial Connections of WSUD/MA2 Board.....................................198
Figure 97 Optical Connections of WSUD/MA2 Board (with WSUA/E Boards).....199
Figure 98 Operating Principle of WBM Board...............................................201
Figure 99 Front Panel of WBM Board .........................................................202
Figure 100 Optical Connections of WBM Board............................................204
Figure 101 Operating Principle of SDM Board ...............................................206
Figure 102 Front Panel of SDM Board..........................................................207
Figure 103 Optical Connection of SDM Board................................................208
Figure 104 Operating Principle of EOLA Board ..............................................213
Figure 105 Operating Principle of EONA Board..............................................214
Figure 106 Front Panel of EOBA Board.........................................................216
Figure 107 Front Panel of EOLAD Board.......................................................218
Figure 108 Front Panel of EOPAD Board.......................................................220
Figure 109 Front Panel of EONA Board ........................................................222
Figures

Figure 110 Typical Optical Connections of EOA Board...................................224
Figure 111 Operating Principle of DRA Board (C Band)...................................227
Figure 112 Operating Principle of DRA Board (C+L Band)...............................228
Figure 113 Front Panel of DRA Board ..........................................................229
Figure 114 Operating Principle of LAC Board (LACG)......................................233
Figure 115 Front Panel of LAC Board...........................................................234
Figure 116 the optical connection of LAC boards (1) ......................................235
Figure 117 the optical connection of LAC boards (2) ......................................236
Figure 118 Operating Principle of OWM Board...............................................237
Figure 119 Front Panel of OWM Board .........................................................238
Figure 120 Operating Principle of OPM Board................................................241
Figure 121 Front Panel of OPM Board ..........................................................242
Figure 122 The Position of MCPD Board in the System...................................244
Figure 123 Operating Principle of MCPD Board..............................................245
Figure 124 Front Panel of MCPD Board ........................................................246
Figure 125 Operating Principle of OP Board..................................................248
Figure 126 Front Panel of OP Board ............................................................249
Figure 127 Optical Connections of OP Board (OTU 1+1 Protection, OTU Redundancy
Mode in Chain Network).....................................................................251
Figure 128 Optical Connections of OP Board (OTU 1+1 Protection, OTU Redundancy
Mode in Ring Network) ......................................................................252
Figure 129 Optical Connection of OP Board (OTU 1+1 Protection)....................253
Figure 130 Optical Connection of OP Board (OA shared configuration mode) .....254
Figure 131 Optical Connection of OP Board (EOA redundancy configuration mode)
......................................................................................................254
Figure 132 Operating Principle of OPMS Board............................................256
Figure 133 Front Panel of OPMS Board ......................................................257
Figure 134 Configuration for Multiplex Section Shared Protection................... 260
Figure 135 Operating Principle of OPCS Board ............................................261
Figure 136 Front Panel of OPCS Board.......................................................262
Figure 137 Configuration for Optica Channel Shared Protection .....................264
Figure 138 Operating Principle of OMCP Board..............................................265
Figure 139 Front Panel of OMCP Board ........................................................267
Figure 140 Optical Connection of OMCP Board (Bidirectional 1:8 Protection) .....269
Figure 141 Optical Connection of OMCP Board (Bidirectional 1:16 Protection)....270
Figure 142 Operating Principle of NCP Board ................................................272
Figure 143 Front Panel of NCP Board...........................................................273
Figure 144 Operating Principle of OSC Board................................................276
Figure 145 Front Panel of OSC Board ..........................................................277
Figure 146 Optical Connection of OSC Board ................................................279
Figure 147 Operating Principle of OHP Board................................................281
Figure 148 Front Panel of OHP Board ..........................................................282
Figure 149 Operating Principle of NCPF Board (100 M Supervision System) ......284
Figure 150 Front Panel of NCPF Board .........................................................285
Figure 151 Operating Principle of OSCF Board ..............................................287
Figure 152 Front Panel of OSCF Board.........................................................288
Figure 153 Optical Connection between OSCF Board and OTU Board................291
Figure 154 Operating Principle of OHPF Board ..............................................293
Figure 155 Front Panel of OHPF Board.........................................................295
Figure 156 Operating Principle of APSF Board...............................................297
Figure 157 Front Panel of APSF Board .........................................................298
Figure 158 Operating Principle of PBX Board ................................................300
Figure 159 Front Panel and Rear Panel of PBX Board .....................................301
Figure 160 Relations between PWSB Board and Power Distribution Subrack......303
Figure 161 Operating Principle of PWSB Board..............................................303
Figure 162 Front Panel of PWSB Board ........................................................304
Figure 163 DIP Switch on PWSB Board........................................................305
Figure 164 DB15 Socket (male) .................................................................307
Figure 165 Operating Principle of CA Board..................................................312
Figure 166 Front Panel of CA Board ............................................................313
Figure 167 Operating Principle of CSU Board ..............................................317


Figure 168 Front Panel of CSU Board.........................................................319
Figure 169 Application of ZXWM M900 (no more than 48-Channel System).......323
Figure 170 Application of ZXWM M900 (80/96-Channel System) .....................324
Figure 171 Application of ZXWM M900 (160/176-Channel System)..................325
Figure 172 2 M Supervisory System............................................................332
Figure 173 100 M Supervisory System........................................................336
Figure 174 Integrated Wavelength Supervision Subsystem.............................342
Figure 175 Position of OWM Board in OTM Equipment....................................343
Figure 176 Position of OWM Board in OADM Equipment .................................344
Figure 177 Power Management Domain.......................................................348
Figure 178 Division of Power Management Domain (80-Channel System) .........349
Figure 179 Division of Power Management Domain (More Than 80 Channels)....350


Tables

Table 1 Chapter Summary ..................................................................................... ii
Table 2 Typographical Conventions......................................................................... iv
Table 3 Mouse Operation Conventions .................................................................... iv
Table 4 Safety Signs ............................................................................................. v
Table 5 Structural Parameters of ZTE Cabinet .............................................................1
Table 6 Cabinet Configurations of ZXWM M900 ...........................................................6
Table 7 Relations between Boards and Slots (for 2 M Supervisory System without APSF) 12
Table 8 Relations between Boards and Slots (for 2 M Supervisory System with APSF)..... 13
Table 9 Relationship between Boards and Slots (for 100 M Supervisory System)............ 14
Table 10 Serial Number of Racks ............................................................................ 16
Table 11 Serial Number of Subracks........................................................................ 17
Table 12 Type and Function of Interfaces on OA Backplane......................................... 17
Table 13 Signal Definition of Pins in J1/j17 Socket..................................................... 19
Table 14 Signal Definitions of Pins in J2 Socket ......................................................... 19
Table 15 Signal Definition of Pins in J8 Socket .......................................................... 20
Table 16 Signal Definition of Pins in J11 Socket......................................................... 20
Table 17 Signal Definition of Pins in J3 Socket .......................................................... 20
Table 18 Signal Definitions of Pins in J12 Socket ....................................................... 21
Table 19 Functions of Components in OTU Subrack ................................................... 22
Table 20 Type and Function of Interfaces on OTU Backplane....................................... 24
Table 21 Relationship between Boards and Slots in TMUX Subrack............................... 26
Table 22 Types and Functions of Interface on TMUX Backplane ................................... 27
Table 23 Components Functions of Orderwire Phone Bracket....................................... 29
Table 24 Functions of Components in Independent Fan Unit........................................ 30
Table 25 Functions of Components in Power Distribution Subrack ................................ 33
Table 26 Functions of Components in Monitoring Plug-in Box ...................................... 34
Table 27 Structures of Components in ODF Plug-in Box.............................................. 36
Table 28 Functions of Components of DCM Plug-in Box .............................................. 37
Table 29 Available Boards for ZXWM M900............................................................... 39
Table 30 Front Panel Descriptions of OTU Board and Related Operation Information ....... 48
Table 31 Relations between OTU Board and Indicator Status....................................... 49
Table 32 Performance and Alarm Messages of OTU Board........................................... 50
Table 33 Front Panel Description of OTUF Board and Related Operation Information....... 55
Table 34 Performance and Alarm Messages of OTUF Board ......................................... 57
Table 35 Front Panel Descriptions of OTU10G Board and Related Operation Information . 63
Table 36 Performance and Alarm Messages of OTU10G Board ..................................... 64


Table 37 Signal Definition of EOUT10G Board ........................................................... 68
Table 38 Description of EOTU10G Boards Front Panel and Related Operation Information
.................................................................................................................. 70
Table 39 Performance, Alarm and Event Messages of OTU10G Board.......................... 71
Table 40 Functions of SRM41/SRM42 Board.............................................................. 75
Table 41 Front Panel Descriptions of SRM42/SRM41 Board and Related Operation Information
.................................................................................................................. 79
Table 42 Correspondence Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of the
SRM41/SRM42 Board..................................................................................... 80
Table 43 Performance Messages of SRM42/SRM41 Board ........................................... 82
Table 44 Alarm Messages of SRM42/SRM41 Board..................................................... 84
Table 45 Event Messages of SRM42/SRM41 Board..................................................... 86
Table 46 Description of GEM2 Boards Front Panel and Related Operation Information .. 89
Table 47 Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of GEM2 Board.... 91
Table 48 Performance Messages of GEM2 Board...................................................... 91
Table 49 Alarm Messages of GEM2 Board ............................................................... 92
Table 50 Front Panel Descriptions of GEMF Board and Related Operation Information ..... 97
Table 51 Correspondence Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of
GEMF Board ................................................................................................. 98
Table 52 Performance Messages of GEMF Board........................................................ 99
Table 53 Alarm Messages of GEMF Board ............................................................... 100
Table 54 Description of GEM8s Front Panel and Related Operation Information ......... 105
Table 55 Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of GEM8 Board.. 106
Table 56 Performance Messages of GEM8 Board.................................................... 106
Table 57 Alarm Messages of GEM8 Board ............................................................. 108
Table 58 Event Messages of GEM8 Board ............................................................. 111
Table 59 Descriptions of DSA Boards Front Panel and Related Operation Information . 115
Table 60 Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of DSA Board.... 116
Table 61 Performance Messages of DSA Board...................................................... 119
Table 62 Alarm Messages of DSA Board ............................................................... 121
Table 63 Event Messages of DSA Board................................................................ 123
Table 64 Types of DSAF Board............................................................................ 125
Table 65 Description of DSAF Boards Front Panel and Related Operation Information. 129
Table 66 Relations Between Working Status and Indicator Status of DSAF Board........ 130
Table 67 Performance Messages of DSAF Board .................................................... 130
Table 68 Alarm Messages of DSAF Board.............................................................. 132
Table 69 Event Messages of DSAF Board.............................................................. 134
Table 70 Description of DSAE Boards Front Panel and Related Operation Information. 140
Table 71 Relations Between the Working Status and Indicator Status of DSAE Board.. 140
Table 72 Performance Messages of DSAE Board .................................................... 143
Table 73 Alarm Messages of DSAE Board ............................................................. 143
Table 74 Event Messages of DSAE Board.............................................................. 145
Table 75 Description of SMU Boards Front Panel and Related Operation Information .. 149
Table 76 Relations Between the Working Status and Indicator Status of SMU Board ... 150
Tables

Table 77 Performance Messages of SMU Board...................................................... 150
Table 78 Alarm Messages of SMU Board............................................................... 151
Table 79 Event Messages of SMU Board ............................................................... 153
Table 80 Front Panel Descriptions of OCI Board and Related Basic Operation............... 157
Table 81 Performance and Alarm Messages of OCI Board ......................................... 159
Table 82 Front Panel Descriptions of OBM Board and Related Basic Operation.............. 162
Table 83 Performance and Alarm Messages of OBM Board ........................................ 165
Table 84 Type List of OMU Board .......................................................................... 166
Table 85 Front Panel Descriptions of OMU Board and Related Basic Operation ............. 168
Table 86 Performance and Alarm Messages of OMU Board ........................................ 170
Table 87 Front Panel Descriptions of VMUX Board and Related Basic Operation............ 174
Table 88 Performance and Alarm Messages of VMUX Board....................................... 175
Table 89 Type List of ODU Board .......................................................................... 176
Table 90 Front Panel Descriptions of ODU Board and Related Basic Operation.............. 178
Table 91 Performance and Alarm Messages of ODU Board ........................................ 180
Table 92 Front Panel Descriptions of OAD Board and Related Basic Operation.............. 183
Table 93 Performance and Alarm Messages of OAD Board ........................................ 185
Table 94 WBU Board Type ................................................................................... 186
Table 95 Front Panel Descriptions of WBU Board and Related Basic Operations .......... 188
Table 96 Performance, Alarm and Event Messages of WBU Board............................. 191
Table 97 Types of WSU Board............................................................................. 192
Table 98 Front Panel Descriptions of WSU Board and Related Basic Operations .......... 197
Table 99 Performance, Alarm and Event Messages of WSU Board............................. 200
Table 100 Description of WBM Boards Front Panel and Related Operation Information 203
Table 101 Performance, Alarm and Event Messages of WBM Board .......................... 205
Table 102 Front Panel Descriptions of SDM Board and Related Basic Operations........... 207
Table 103 Performance and Alarm Messages of SDM Board....................................... 209
Table 104 Type List of EOA Board ......................................................................... 210
Table 105 List of Board Subtype ........................................................................... 211
Table 106 Front Panel Descriptions of EOBA Board and Related Basic Operations ......... 216
Table 107 Front Panel Descriptions of EOLA Board and Related Basic Operations.......... 218
Table 108 Front Panel Descriptions of EOPA Board and Related Basic Operations ......... 220
Table 109 Front Panel Descriptions of EONA Board and Related Basic Operations ......... 222
Table 110 Performance Messages of EOA Board ...................................................... 224
Table 111 Alarm Messages of EOA Board ............................................................... 225
Table 112 Event Messages of EOA Board................................................................ 226
Table 113 Front Panel Descriptions of DRA Board and Related Basic Operations........... 229
Table 114 Performance and Alarm Messages of DRA Board....................................... 231
Table 115 Front Panel Descriptions of LAC Board and Related Basic Operations ........... 234
Table 116 Performance and Alarm Messages of LAC Board........................................ 236
Table 117 Front Panel Descriptions of OWM Board and Related Basic Operations.......... 238
Table 118 Performance and Alarm Messages of OWM Board...................................... 240
Table 119 Front Panel Descriptions of OPM Board and Related Basic Operations........... 242
Table 120 Performance and Alarm Messages of OPM Board....................................... 243


Table 121 Performance and Alarm Messages of MCPD Board..................................... 246
Table 122 Front Panel Descriptions of MCPD Board and Related Basic Operations......... 247
Table 123 Front Panel Descriptions of OP Board and Related Basic Operations ............. 249
Table 124 Correspondence Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of OP
Board........................................................................................................ 250
Table 125 Performance and Alarm Messages of OP Board ......................................... 255
Table 126 Front Panel Descriptions of OPMS Board and Related Basic Operations ....... 257
Table 127 Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of OPMS Board 259
Table 128 Event Messages of OPMS Board............................................................ 259
Table 129 Front Panel Descriptions of OPCS Board and Related Basic Operations ....... 262
Table 130 Performance, Alarm and Event Messages of OPCS Board.......................... 264
Table 131 Front Panel Descriptions of OMCP Board and Related Basic Operations......... 267
Table 132 Correspondence Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of
OMCP Board ............................................................................................... 268
Table 133 Performance and Alarm Messages of OMCP Board..................................... 271
Table 134 Front Panel Descriptions of NCP Board and Related Basic Operations ........... 273
Table 135 Correspondence Relations between the Working Status and the Indicator Status of
NCP/NCPF Board ......................................................................................... 274
Table 136 Performance and Alarm Messages of NCP Board ....................................... 275
Table 137 Front Panel Descriptions of OSC Board and Related Basic Operations........... 277
Table 138 Performance and Alarm Messages of OSC Board....................................... 279
Table 139 Front Panel Descriptions of OHP Board and Related Basic Operations........... 283
Table 140 Performance and Alarm Messages of OHP Board....................................... 283
Table 141 Front Panel Descriptions of NCPF Board and Related Basic Operations.......... 285
Table 142 Front Panel Descriptions of OSCF Board and Related Basic Operations ......... 288
OSCF Board................................................................................................ 289
the Optical/Electrical Interfaces on OSCF Board ............................................... 290
Table 145 Performance and Alarm Messages of OSCF Board ..................................... 292
Table 146 Front Panel Descriptions of OHPF Board and Related Basic Operations ......... 295
Table 147 Performance and Alarm Messages of OHPF Board ..................................... 296
Table 148 Front Panel Descriptions of APSF Board and Related Basic Operations.......... 298
APSF Board ................................................................................................ 299
Table 150 Panel Descriptions of PBX Board and Related Basic Operations.................... 301
Table 151 Performance and Alarm Messages .......................................................... 302
Table 152 Corresponding Relations between Running Status and Indicator Status of PWSB
Board........................................................................................................ 305
Table 153 Description of Cabinet No...................................................................... 305
Table 154 Definitions of Pins in -48_In1/-48_In2 Power Socket ................................. 306
Table 155 Definitions of Pins in Alm_In Socket........................................................ 306
Table 156 Definitions of Pins in Alm_Out Socket...................................................... 307
Table 157 Definitions of Pins in Warn Socket .......................................................... 308
Tables

Table 158 Definitions of Pins in Sp_Alm Socket ....................................................... 308
Table 159 Performance and Alarm Messages of PWSB Board..................................... 309
Table 160 Front Panel Descriptions of OAD Board and Related Basic Operation ............ 310
Table 161 Performance and Alarm Messages of FCB Board ....................................... 311
Table 162 Front Panel Descriptions of CA Board and Related Basic Operations ............. 313
Table 163 Correspondence Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of CA
Board........................................................................................................ 314
Table 164 Performance and Alarm Messages of CA Board ......................................... 316
Table 165 Front Panel Descriptions of CSU Board and Related Operation Information.. 319
Table 166 Relations Between the Working Status and Indicator Status of CSU Board .. 320
Table 167 Performance, Alarm and Event Messages of CSU Board............................ 321
Table 168 Wavelength Allocation (8/32/40 Channel, C Band) .................................... 326
Table 169 Wavelength Allocation (48/96 Channel, C Band) ....................................... 326
Table 170 Wavelength Allocation (80 Channel, C Band)............................................ 328
Table 171 Wavelength Allocation (80 Channel, L Band) ............................................ 329
Table 172 Requirements on the Creation of NEs in a 2 M Supervision System.............. 334
Table 173 Requirements on the Creation of NEs in a 100 M Supervision System.......... 338
Table 174 Configuration Principle of IP Address of Optical Interfaces on OSCF Board .... 339
Table 175 EMS Software Configurations of Integrated Wavelength Supervision Subsystem
................................................................................................................ 345
Table 176 Hardware/Software Needed in Power Management of OMS Layer ................ 349
Table 177 Working Conditions of OMS Layer Power Management ............................... 351
Table 178 Configurations of OMS Power Management Subsystem.............................. 354



Index


Index
3-pin power socket (J1/J17)...............19
APS................................................13
APSF Board ................................... 296
Automatic Lock of Service Type ..........45
Basic Fittings in Cabinet ..................... 3
Alarm Panel ....................................4
Cable Area......................................4
Front Door.......................................4
Grounding Copper Busbar..............4
Heat Dissipation Aperture...............5
Mounting Hole................................4
Outlet...............................................4
Board Slots Mode .............................12
Boards arrangement for 100 M
supervisory system....................14
supervisory system (with APSF)
...................................................13
supervisory system (without
APSF)........................................12
CA Board ...................................... 311
Common Interface Area ....................15
CSU Board .................................... 316
DB9 socket (female) (J3/J12).............20
DB9 socket (male) (J2/J8/J11) ...........19
DCM Plug-in Box ..............................36
DeMUX module .............................. 155
DRA Board .................................... 226
C-band RAMAN module............228
L-band RAMAN module............228
DSA Board .................................... 111
DSAE Board................................... 136
DSAF Board................................... 123
Aggregate side............................124
Clock function............................124
Clock Processing Unit................127
Control and communication unit 156
Convergence & Framing Unit....126
Coupler .......................................155
Interleaver...................................155
................................................155
OTN Optical Module..................127
Tributary Optical Module...........126
Tributary side..............................123
EOA Board .................................... 209
EOBA .................................210, 215
EOLA..................................210, 217
EOPA..........................210, 219, 221
EVOA ........................................... 232
FCB Board..................................... 310
GEM2 Board.................................... 86
GEM8 Board.................................. 102
GEMF Board
Aggregate side..............................94
Control and communication unit..96
Demultiplexing direction..............95
GE convergence unit.....................95
GE optical module........................95
Multiplexing direction..................94
OTN optical module.....................96
OTN processing unit.....................95
Tributary side................................94
GEMF Board .................................... 94
GFP data encapsulation format......... 135
Independent Fan Unit ....................... 29
J10 ...............................................16
LAC Board


Coupler........................................233
EVOA .........................................233
EVOA drive circuit.....................233
GFF.............................................233
LACG..........................................232
LACT..........................................232
Optical power measuring unit.....233
LAC Board..................................... 232
MAC controller unit ...........................95
Manual Lock of Service Rate...............45
Manual Lock of Service Type ..............45
Monitoring Plug-in Box ......................34
MUX module.................................. 155
NCP Board..................................... 271
NCPF Board ................................... 283
Non-specific wavelength optical
transmitting module......................47
OA Board
1510/1550 multiplexer........213, 214
A1510/1550 demultiplexer.213, 214
Control and communication unit214,
215
Coupler................................213, 214
EDFA, EDFA drive circuit.213, 215
.........................................213, 215
OA redundancy mode...................... 254
OA shared configuration mode.......... 253
OA Subrack ...................................... 9
Backplane......................................10
Board area.....................................10
Chute.............................................10
Dustproof net................................10
Fan area.........................................10
Fiber cable reel-in box..................11
Lug................................................10
Orderwire phone bracket...............10
OAD Board .................................... 181
OADM.............................................. 7
OBM Board.................................... 160
Broadband multiplexer................161
Control and communication unit161,
167, 177
Coupler........................161, 167, 177
................................161, 167, 177
OCI Board..................................... 154
ODF Plug-in Box .............................. 34
ODU Board.................................... 176
OADM........................................181
................................................181
OHP Board .................................... 280
Control and communication
information processing...........281
Orderwire overhead information
processing...............................281
Transparent user channel
information processing...........281
OHPF Board .................................. 293
OLA ................................................. 7
OMCP Board.................................. 265
Optical switch module................265
OMU Board
OMU16.......................................166
OMU32.......................................166
OMU40.......................................166
OMU8.........................................166
OMU80.......................................166
OMU Board ................................... 166
OP Board ...................................... 247
concurrent transmitting direction248
OCH 1+1 Protection...................251
OMS 1+1 Protection...................253
preferred receiving direction.......248
OPCS Board .................................. 260
OPM Board.................................... 240
OPMS Board.................................. 255
Orderwire Phone Bracket................... 29
OSC Board.................................... 275
OSCL ..........................................275
OSCT..........................................275
OSCF Board .................................. 286
OTM................................................. 7
OTU Board
client side......................................44
Index


line side.........................................44
Optical receiving module..............46
Optical transmitting module.........47
OTU (Regenerator, OTUG)..........45
OTU (Terminal)............................44
Performance and overhead
supervision unit.........................47
OTU Board ......................................44
OTU redundancy configuration mode. 251
OTU shared configuration mode........ 252
OTU Subrack ...................................21
Board Slots....................................23
Common Interface Area................24
OTU10G Board.................................65
OTUF Board
AFEC............................................60
Control and Communication Unit.69
FEC...............................................60
FEC framer....................................54
FEC Framer...................................69
Optical receiving module..............54
Optical Receiving Module............69
Optical transmitting module.........54
Optical Transmitting Module........69
Regenerator OTU10G (OTU10G G)
...................................................60
Regenerator OTUF (OTUFG).......52
Single-channel bidirectional
OTU10G...................................59
Terminal OTUF ............................51
OTUF Board.....................................51
OWM Board ................................... 236
12 optical switch.......................237
Drive circuits...............................237
TF................................................237
Wavelength supervisor................237
PBX Board .................................... 300
PCB ............................................... 42
Power Alarm Subrack ....................... 31
Power Distribution Subrack................ 32
PWSB Board.................................. 302
RAMAN......................................... 226
RM41/SRM42 board.......................... 77
Aggregate optical module.............77
Clock processing unit...................78
Convergence unit..........................77
Tributary optical module..............77
SDH overhead processing unit ........... 95
SDM Board.................................... 205
Serial number of cabinet ................... 16
Serial number of subrack .................. 16
Slots for PBX Boards......................... 17
SMU Board.................................... 145
Specific wavelength optical transmitting
module ....................................... 47
Structure of Boards in OA/OTU/TMUX
Subrack ...................................... 41
Structure of FCB Board ..................... 43
Structure of PBX Board ..................... 42
Structure of PWSB Board .................. 43
TMUX Subrack................................. 25
VMUX Board.................................. 171
AWG...........................................172
Coupler .......................................172
................................................173
Temperature control and drive
circuit......................................172
VOA............................................172
VOA............................................. 171
WBM Board................................... 200
WBU Board ................................... 185
WSU Board ................................... 191

ZXWM M900 V2 20 Hardware Manual 156108 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ZXWM M900 V2 20 Hardware Manual 156108 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ZXWM M900

Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

STM-16_1 STM-16_1 STM-16_2 STM-16_2

Drop 1 Drop 2 Drop 9

You might also like